Docstoc

Fiat Linea Handbook

Document Sample
Fiat Linea Handbook Powered By Docstoc
					Dear Customer,
Thank you for selecting Fiat and congratulations on your choice of a Fiat Linea.
We have written this handbook to help you get to know all the features of your car and use it in the best possible way.
You should read it right through before taking the road for the first time.
You will find information, tips and important warnings regarding the driving of your car to help you derive the maximum from the
technological features of your Fiat.
You are recommended to read carefully the warnings and indications, marked with the respective symbols:


         personal safety;


         the car’s wellbeing;


         environmental protection.


The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services that Fiat offers to its Customers:
❒ the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity
❒ the range of additional services available to Fiat Customers.
Best regards and happy motoring!




                             This Owner Handbook describes all Fiat Linea versions.
           As a consequence, you should consider only the information which is related to the engine and
                                   bodywork version of the car you purchased.
                                        MUST BE READ!
REFUELLING
         petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95 conforming to the


 K
         European specification EN 228.
         Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590.
         The use of other products or mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently cause lapse of
         warranty in relation to the damage caused.

ENGINE STARTING
         petrol engines: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift lever to neutral; fully depress the clutch
         without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVVand release it as soon as the engine has started.
         Diesel engines: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift lever to neutral; fully depress the clutch
         without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the warning lights Y and m
         to go off; turn the ignition key to AVVand release it as soon as the engine has started.


PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL
         The catalytic converter develops high temperature during operation. Do not park on grass, dry leaves, pine needles
         or other flammable material: fire risk .




RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
         The car is fitted with a system that allows continuous diagnosis of the components correlated with emissions to
         ensure better respect for the environment.
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery),
visit a Fiat Dealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car’s electric
system can support the required load.




CODE card
Keep it in a safe place, non in the car. Make sure you have the electronic code with you at all times.




SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safety
features, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.




THE OWNER’S MANUAL CONTAINS…
... important information, advise and warnings for correct use, driving safety and maintenance of your car in time.
Pay special attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (environmental protection) ! (car’s wellbeing).
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                                                         DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS
                                DASHBOARD........................................................................            5   EXTERNAL LIGHTS ............................................................                  66
                                SYMBOLS ...............................................................................      6   WINDOW WASHING .......................................................                        68
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM..................................................                       6   CRUISE CONTROL ............................................................                   70
                                THE KEYS ..............................................................................      8   CEILING LIGHTS ..................................................................              72
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                                                                 CONTROLS...........................................................................            75
    OF THE CAR




                                ALARM ...................................................................................   11
                                IGNITION DEVICE ..............................................................              13   FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH ..................................................                        77
                                                                                                                                 INTERIOR FITTINGS...........................................................                  78
                                INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................                   14
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES




                                                                                                                                 DOORS ..................................................................................       82
 WARNING




                                INSTRUMENTS .....................................................................           16
                                                                                                                                 POWER WINDOWS...........................................................                      83
                                DIGITAL DISPLAY ...............................................................             18
                                                                                                                                 BOOT ......................................................................................    86
                                MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY ............................................                          23
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                                                                 BONNET.................................................................................        88
     IN AN




                                RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY .......                                                32
                                                                                                                                 ROOF RACK/SKI RACK ....................................................                       90
                                TRIP COMPUTER ................................................................              42
                                                                                                                                 HEADLIGHTS ........................................................................            91
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                FRONT SEATS .....................................................................           44
                                                                                                                                 ABS SYSTEM .........................................................................           92
                      CAR




                                REAR SEATS ..........................................................................       45
                                                                                                                                 ESP SYSTEM ..........................................................................          93
                                HEAD RESTRAINTS.............................................................                45   EOBD SYSTEM .....................................................................              96
     TECHNICAL




                                STEERING WHEEL ..............................................................               47   PARKING SENSORS ...........................................................                   97
                                REARVIEW MIRRORS .........................................................                  47   SOUND SYSTEM ..................................................................                99
                                HEATING AND VENTILATION ......................................                              49   ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER ..........                                                 100
               INDEX




                                MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ....................                                          53   AT THE FILLING STATION .............................................                          101
                                AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ............                                               59   PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT.............................                                       102
                     4
DASHBOARD




                                                                                                                                         AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                          DASHBOARD
The presence and position of the controls, the instruments and the indicators may vary according to the versions.




                                                                                                                                         DEVICES
                                                                                                                                         SAFETY
                                                                                                                                         CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                          OF THE CAR
                                                                                                                                         LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                          MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                          WARNING
                                                                                                                                         EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                           IN AN
                                                                                                                                         SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                           TECHNICAL        CAR
                                                                                                                              F0R0001m
fig. 1


1. Adjustable side air vents - 2. Fixed side air vents - 3. Left stalk: external lights control - 4. Instrument panel -
5. Right stalk: windscreen wiper controls, trip computer - 6. Controls on dashboard - 7. Adjustable central air vents - 8. Fixed up-




                                                                                                                                         INDEX
per air vent - 9. Front airbag - passenger side - 10. Oddment compartment - 11. Sound system (where provided) - 12. HVAC
controls - 13. Ignition device - 14. Front airbag - driver’s side - 15. Steering wheel adjustment lever - 16. Control panel: fog
lights/rear fog light/headlight position adjustment/digital display/multifunctional display.
                                                                                                                                         5
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   SYMBOLS                                                                                  THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM
                                Special coloured labels have been attached                                               This is an electrical engine locking system
                                near or actually on some of the compo-                                                   which increases protection from at-
                                nents of your car. These labels bear sym-                                                tempted theft of the car. It is automatically
                                bols that remind you of the precautions                                                  activated when the ignition key is ex-
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                to be taken as regards that particular com-                                              tracted.
                                ponent.
                                                                                                                         Each key contains an electronic device
                                                                                                                         which modulates the signal emitted dur-
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                              fig. 1                          F0R0002m   ing ignition by an antenna incorporated in
                                                                                                                         the ignition device. This signal is the ‘pass-
                                                                              The plate summarising the symbols used     word’ which changes at each ignition and
                                                                              can be found under the bonnet fig. 1.      which the control unit uses to recognise
                                                                                                                         the key and allow ignition.
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING

   EMERGENCY
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




                     6
                                                                                             Warning light Y




                                                                                                                                          AND CONTROLS
OPERATION                                      In this case, turn the key to STOP and




                                                                                                                                           DASHBOARD
                                               then back to MAR; try with the other          coming on when driving
Each time the car is started turning the ig-   keys provided if the problem persists.
nition key to MAR, the Fiat CODE sys-          Contact a Fiat Dealership if you still can-   ❒ If the warning light Y turns on, this
tem control unit sends a recognition code      not start the engine.                           means that the system is running a self-
to the engine control unit to deactivate                                                       test (for example for a voltage drop).
the inhibitor.                                 IMPORTANT Each key has its own code




                                                                                                                                          DEVICES
                                                                                                                                          SAFETY
                                               which must be stored by the system ECU.       ❒ If the warning light Y stays on, con-
The code is sent only if the Fiat CODE         Contact a Fiat Dealership to have new           tact a Fiat Dealership.
system control unit has recognised the         keys (up to eight) stored.
code transmitted from the key.




                                                                                                                                          CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                           OF THE CAR
Each time the ignition key is turned to
STOP, the Fiat CODE system deactivates                                                                 The electronic components
the functions of the engine electronic con-                                                            inside the key may be dam-
trol unit.                                                                                             aged if the key is submitted to




                                                                                                                                          LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                           MESSAGES
                                                                                                       sharp knocks.




                                                                                                                                           WARNING
If the code has not been recognised cor-
rectly, the warning light Y turns on ac-
companied by the related message on the
display (see section “Warning lights and




                                                                                                                                          EMERGENCY
messages”).




                                                                                                                                            IN AN
                                                                                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                            TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                          INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                          7
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   THE KEYS

                                CODE CARD fig. 2
                                (Optional for versions/markets
                                where applicable)
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                The car is delivered with two copies of the
                                ignition key and with the CODE card
                                which bears the following:
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                   F0R0003m                                     F0R0004m
                                A the electronic code;                        fig. 2                                          fig. 3

                                B the mechanical key code to be given         KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROL
                                  to the Fiat Dealership when ordering
                                  duplicate keys.                             fig. 3
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                Make sure you have the electronic code        The metal insert A is retractable and it op-
                                A-fig. 2 with you at all times.               erates:

                                IMPORTANT In order to ensure perfect          ❒ the ignition switch;
                                efficiency of the electronic devices con-     ❒ the door locks;
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                tained inside the keys, they should never
                                be exposed to direct sunlight.                ❒ the fuel filler lock (where provided).
                                                                              To extract the metal insert, press button       fig. 4                            F0R0005m

                                                                              B.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                          All the keys and the CODE                                                           To refit it proceed as follows:
                      CAR




                                          card must be handed over to
                                          the new owner when selling                                                          ❒ keep button B pressed and move the
                                          the car.                                                                              metal insert A;
                                                                                                                              ❒ release button B and turn the metal in-
     TECHNICAL




                                                                                                                                sert A until hearing the proper lock-
                                                                                                                                ing click.
               INDEX




                     8
                                         Button Ë is used for opening the doors




                                                                                                                                     AND CONTROLS
                 WARNING




                                                                                                                                      DASHBOARD
                                         and the tailgate.
         Only press button B with the
         key away from your body,        Button Á is used for locking the doors and
specifically from your eyes and from     the tailgate.
objects which could get damaged (e.g.    Button R (present in some versions on-
your clothes). Do not leave the key




                                                                                                                                     DEVICES
                                                                                                                                     SAFETY
                                         ly) is used for remote opening of the tail-
unattended to avoid the button from      gate.
being accidentally pressed while it is
being handled, e.g. by a child.          The passenger’s compartment lights will




                                                                                                                                     CORRECT USE
                                         come on for a preset time when the doors




                                                                                                                                      OF THE CAR
                                                                                                                          F0R0006m
                                                                                       fig. 5
                                         are unlocked.
                                                                                       LED indications on the driver’s
                                                                                       door fig. 5




                                                                                                                                     LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                      MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                      WARNING
                                                                                       When locking the doors, led A switches
                                                                                       on for about 3 seconds and than starts
                                                                                       flashing (deterrence function).
                                                                                       If one or more doors or the tailgate are




                                                                                                                                     EMERGENCY
                                                                                       not closed correctly when the doors are




                                                                                                                                       IN AN
                                                                                       locked, the led and direction indicators
                                                                                       start flashing quickly. The operation will
                                                                                       not be completed.




                                                                                                                                     SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                       TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                     INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                     9
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   Request for additional remote
                                                                                                                                   Used batteries are harmful to
                                controls                                                                                           the environment. They should
                                The system may recognise up to 8 remote                                                            be disposed of as specified by
                                controls. Should a new remote control be                                                           law in the special containers
                                necessary, contact a Fiat Dealership, tak-                                                provided, or take them to a Fiat Deal-
                                ing with you the CODE card, a personal                                                    ership, which will deal with their dis-
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                identity document and the car’s owner-                                                    posal.
                                ship documents.
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                               F0R0007m
                                                                             fig. 6

                                                                             Replacing the battery of the key
                                                                             with remote control fig. 6
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                             Battery replacement:
                                                                             ❒ press button A and open the metal in-
                                                                               sert B;
                                                                             ❒ turn the screw C to : using a fine bit
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                                               screwdriver;
                                                                             ❒ take out the battery case D and replace
                                                                               the battery E making sure that the bias
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                               is correct;
                      CAR




                                                                             ❒ refit the battery case D inside the key
                                                                               and lock it turning the screw C to Á
     TECHNICAL
               INDEX




                 10
                                                               ALARM




                                                                                                           AND CONTROLS
HEADLIGHT WASHER




                                                                                                            DASHBOARD
(where provided) fig. 7
The metal insert of the key A is fixed.                        The car alarm system is available at Lin-
                                                               eaccessori Fiat.
The key operates:
❒ the ignition switch;




                                                                                                           DEVICES
                                                                                                           SAFETY
❒ the door locks;
❒ the fuel filler lock (where provided).




                                                                                                           CORRECT USE
                                                                                                            OF THE CAR
                                                    F0R0008m
                                           fig. 7




                                                                                                           LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                            MESSAGES
                                                                                                            WARNING
                                                                                                           EMERGENCY
                                                                                                             IN AN
                                                                                                           SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                             TECHNICAL
                                                                                                           INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                           11
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   The main functions that can be activated with the keys (with or without remote control) are the following:

                                Type                             Unlocking           Locking the doors       Unlocking the      Windows down          Windows up
                                                                 the doors           from the outside          tailgate        (where provided)     (where provided)
                                Key without remote control Turn key anticlockwise   Turn key clockwise
                                                                                                                        –                   –                   –
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                           (driver’s side)          (driver’s side)
                                                           Turn key anticlockwise   Turn key clockwise                                      –
                                                                                                                        –                                       –
                                                           (driver’s side)          (driver’s side)
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                Key with remote control    Press briefly Ë          Briefly press Á      Briefly press R     Hold pressed Ë       Hold pressed button Á
                                                                                                                             (for longer than 2   (for longer than
                                                                                                                             seconds)             seconds)
                                Direction indicators       blinks twice             blinks once          blinks twice        blinks twice         blinks once
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                flashing (only with key
                                with remote control)
                                Deterrence led             Off                      Steady for           Deterrent           Off                  Deterrence led
                                                                                    approximately        blinking                                 blinks
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                    3 seconds and then
     IN AN




                                                                                    deterrent blinking

                                IMPORTANT The windows will be opened when the doors are unlocked; the windows will be closed when the doors are
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                locked.
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




                 12
IGNITION




                                                                                                                                      AND CONTROLS
                                                                                           STEERING COLUMN LOCK




                                                                                                                                       DASHBOARD
DEVICE                                                                                     Engaging
The key can be turned to 3 different po-                                                   When the key is at STOP, remove the
sitions fig. 8:                                                                            key and turn the steering wheel until it




                                                                                                                                      DEVICES
                                                                                           locks.




                                                                                                                                      SAFETY
❒ STOP: engine off, key extractable,
  steering locked. Some electrical devices
  (e.g. sound system, central door lock-                                                   Disengaging
  ing system, etc.) may work.




                                                                                                                                      CORRECT USE
                                                                                           Rock the steering wheel slightly as you




                                                                                                                                       OF THE CAR
                                                                                F0R0009m
                                              fig. 8
❒ MAR: driving position. All electrical de-                                                turn the ignition key to MAR.
  vices may work.
                                                                 WARNING
❒ AVV: engine starting (unstable posi-                   Always remove the key when




                                                                                                                                      LIGHTS AND
  tion).                                                                                                   WARNING




                                                                                                                                       MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                       WARNING
                                                         you leave your car to pre-
The ignition switch is fitted with an elec-    vent someone from accidentally op-                   Never extract the key while
tronic safety system that, in the event the    erating the controls. Remember to                    the vehicle is moving. The
engine is not started, turns back the igni-    apply the handbrake. Engage first           steering wheel would be locked as
                                               gear if the car is parked uphill or re-     soon as the steering wheel is turned.




                                                                                                                                      EMERGENCY
tion key to STOP before repeating the
                                                                                           This also applies to when the car is




                                                                                                                                        IN AN
starting operation.                            verse if the car is parked downhill.
                                               Never leave children unattended in          towed.
                                               the car.




                                                                                                                                      SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                  WARNING




                                                                                                                                                         CAR
         If the ignition device is tam-                                                                      WARNING
         pered with (e.g.: attempted                                                                It is absolutely forbidden to
theft), have it checked over by a Fiat                                                              carry out whatever after-
Dealership as soon as possible.                                                            market operation involving steering




                                                                                                                                        TECHNICAL
                                                                                           system or steering column modifica-
                                                                                           tions (e.g.: installation of anti-theft
                                                                                           device) that could badly affect per-
                                                                                           formance and safety, cause the lapse
                                                                                           of warranty and also result in non-




                                                                                                                                      INDEX
                                                                                           compliance of the car with homolo-
                                                                                           gation requirements.

                                                                                                                                      13
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   INSTRUMENT PANEL
                                                              Versions with digital display
                                                              A Speedometer (speed indicator)
                                                              B Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                light
                                                              C Engine coolant temperature gauge and
                                                                excessive temperature warning light
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                              D Rev counter
                                                              E Digital display
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                fig. 9             F0R0010m
                                                              Versions with multifunction display
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                              A Speedometer (speed indicator)
                                                              B Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
                                                                light
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                              C Engine coolant temperature gauge and
                      CAR




                                                                excessive temperature warning light
                                                              D Rev counter
     TECHNICAL




                                                              E Multifunction display
               INDEX




                                fig. 10            F0R0011m


                 14
                                                               AND CONTROLS
                                                                DASHBOARD
                     Versions with reconfigurable
                     multifunction display
                     A Speedometer (speed indicator)




                                                               DEVICES
                                                               SAFETY
                     B Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
                       light
                     C Engine coolant temperature gauge and




                                                               CORRECT USE
                                                                OF THE CAR
                       excessive temperature warning light
                     D Rev counter
                     E Reconfigurable multifunction display




                                                               LIGHTS AND
                                                                MESSAGES
                                                                WARNING
                                                               EMERGENCY
fig. 11   F0R0215m




                                                                 IN AN
                                                               SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                 TECHNICAL
                                                               INDEX              CAR
                                                               15
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   INSTRUMENTS
                                Instrument background colour and type
                                may vary according to the version.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                  F0R0012m                                        F0R0013m
                                                                        fig. 12                              fig. 13

                                                                        SPEEDOMETER fig. 12                  REV. COUNTER fig. 13
                                                                        It shows the car speed.              Rev counter shows engine rpm.
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                                             IMPORTANT The electronic injection
                                                                                                             control system gradually shuts off the flow
                                                                                                             of fuel when the engine is ‘over-revving’
                                                                                                             resulting in a gradual loss of engine pow-
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                                             er.
     IN AN




                                                                                                             When the engine is idling, the rev counter
                                                                                                             may indicate a gradual or sudden increase
                                                                                                             of the speed.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                             This is normal and does not indicate a
                      CAR




                                                                                                             fault. It may be caused, for example, by the
                                                                                                             operation of the climate control system
                                                                                                             or fan. In these case, a slow change in en-
                                                                                                             gine speed is used to protect the battery
     TECHNICAL




                                                                                                             charge.
               INDEX




                 16
                                                                                                                                            AND CONTROLS
                                                                                              Warning light B may light up (and a mes-




                                                                                                                                             DASHBOARD
                                                                                              sage on the multifunctional display may ap-
                                                                                              pear in certain versions) to indicate that
                                                                                              the coolant fluid temperature is too high;
                                                                                              in this case, stop the engine and contact
                                                                                              a Fiat Dealership.




                                                                                                                                            DEVICES
                                                                                                                                            SAFETY
                                                                                                        If the needle reaches the red




                                                                                                                                            CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                             OF THE CAR
                                     F0R0014m                                      F0R0015m
fig. 14                                         fig. 15
                                                                                                        area, stop the engine imme-
                                                                                                        diately and contact a Fiat
FUEL LEVEL GAUGE fig. 14                        ENGINE COOLANT                                          Dealership.
This shows the amount of fuel left in the       TEMPERATURE GAUGE fig. 15




                                                                                                                                            LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                             MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                             WARNING
fuel tank.                                      This shows the temperature of the engine
E empty tank(see “At the filling station”).     coolant fluid and begins working when the
                                                fluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C.
F full tank.
                                                Under normal conditions, the needle




                                                                                                                                            EMERGENCY
The reserve warning light A turns on to         should hover around the middle of the




                                                                                                                                              IN AN
indicate that approximately 7 litres of fu-     scale according to the working conditions.
el are left in the tank.
                                                C Low engine coolant temperature.
Do not travel with the tank nearly empty:




                                                                                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
lack of fuel supply could damage the catal-     H High engine coolant temperature.




                                                                                                                                                               CAR
yser.
IMPORTANT The needle will point to E
and warning light A will blink to indicate a




                                                                                                                                              TECHNICAL
fault in the system. Go to a Fiat Dealer-
ship to have the system checked.




                                                                                                                                            INDEX
                                                                                                                                            17
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   DIGITAL DISPLAY

                                STANDARD SCREEN fig. 16
                                The standard screen shows the following
                                indications:
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                A Headlight aiming position (only with
                                  dipped beam headlights on).
   CORRECT USE




                                B Clock (always displayed, even with ig-
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                             F0R0016m                                        F0R0017m
                                                                           fig. 16                                      fig. 17
                                  nition key removed and front doors
                                  closed).
                                                                           CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 17                      Note Buttons + and – activate different
                                C Odometer (distance covered in kilo-                                                   functions according to the following situ-
                                  metres or miles) and TRIP data.          +    To scroll the displayed menu and the    ations:
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                related options upwards or to in-
                                Note With key removed (when opening             crease the value displayed.
                                one of the front doors) the display will                                                To adjust light inside the passenger
                                turn on and show for a few seconds the     MENU Press briefly to access the menu        compartment
                                km or mi covered.                           ESC and/or go to next screen or to          – standard screen, to adjust instrument
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                     confirm the required menu op-      panel brightness, sound system, and auto-
     IN AN




                                                                                     tion.                              matic climate control system.
                                                                                     Hold pressed to go back to the     Setup menu
                                                                                     standard screen.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                                        – to scroll the menu options upwards and
                                                                           –    To scroll the displayed menu and the    downwards;
                      CAR




                                                                                related options downwards or to de-     – to increase or decrease values during set-
                                                                                crease the displayed value.             tings.
     TECHNICAL
               INDEX




                 18
                                                                                                                                         AND CONTROLS
SETUP MENU fig. 18                            Selecting a menu option                     Hold button MENU ESC pressed




                                                                                                                                          DASHBOARD
The menu comprises a series of functions      – press briefly button MENU ESC to se-      – to quit the set up menu if you are in the
arranged in a cycle which can be selected     lect the menu option to set;                menu;
through buttons + and – to access the dif-
ferent select operations and settings (set-   – press buttons + and – (by single press-   – to quit the displayed menu if you are set-
up) given in the following paragraphs.        es) to select the new setting;              ting an option;




                                                                                                                                         DEVICES
                                                                                                                                         SAFETY
                                              – press briefly button MENU ESC to          – to save only the settings stored yet (and
The setup menu can be activated by press-                                                 confirmed by pressing button MENU
ing briefly button MENU ESC.                  store the new setting and to go back to
                                              the previously selected menu option.        ESC).
Single presses on buttons + and – will




                                                                                                                                         CORRECT USE
                                                                                          The setup menu displaying is timed; when




                                                                                                                                          OF THE CAR
scroll the setup menu options.                Selecting “Set Clock”
                                                                                          quitting the menu due to timing expiry, on-
Handling modes differ with each other ac-     – briefly press button MENU ESC to se-      ly settings stored yet by the user (and con-
cording to the characteristic of the option   lect the first value to change (hours);     firmed by pressing briefly button MENU
selected.                                                                                 ESC).
                                              – press buttons + and – (by single press-




                                                                                                                                         LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                          MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                          WARNING
                                              es) to select the new setting;
                                              – briefly press button MENU ESC to
                                              store the new setting and to go to the
                                              next setup menu option (minutes);




                                                                                                                                         EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                           IN AN
                                              – after setting the values with the same
                                              procedure, the system will go back to the
                                              menu option previously selected.




                                                                                                                                         SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                           TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                         INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                         19
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                            Briefly press button MENU ESC to start browsing
                                            from the standard screen. Press + or – to browse with-
                                            in the menu.
                                            Note Only the short menu may be accessed for rea-
                                            sons of safety while the car is moving (“SPEEd” setting).
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                            Stop the car to access the full menu.
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                              –

                                                                                          +
                                        –
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                             +
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                                                                        +
                                                                                                            –
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                      CAR




                                    +
     TECHNICAL




                                –                                             +
                                                                                                                F0R2003g




                                                                                  –
               INDEX




                                                                                                                fig. 18


                 20
                                                                                                                                       AND CONTROLS
Setting the speed limit (SPEEd)               – briefly press button MENU ESC to go       Adjusting the buzzer volume




                                                                                                                                        DASHBOARD
                                              back to the menu screen or press the but-   (bUZZ)
This function may be used to set the car      ton for long to go back to the standard
speed limit (km/h or mph), when this lim-     screen without storing settings.To cancel   This function is used to adjust the buzzer
it is exceeded the driver is immediately      the setting, proceed as follows:            volume used for failure/warning indica-
alerted (see section “Warning lights and                                                  tions and when MENU ESC, + and –
messages”).                                   – briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)       buttons are pressed.




                                                                                                                                       DEVICES
                                                                                                                                       SAFETY
                                              will blink on the display;
To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:                                               To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
                                              – press button –: (Off) will blink on the
– briefly press button MENU ESC, the          display;                                    – briefly press button MENU ESC, the




                                                                                                                                       CORRECT USE
message (SPEEd) and the previously set                                                    display will show the wording (bUZZ);




                                                                                                                                        OF THE CAR
unit (km/h) or (mph) will appear on the       – briefly press button MENU ESC to go
display;                                      back to the menu screen or press the but-   – press button + or – to select the re-
                                              ton for long to go back to the standard     quired volume (volume can be adjusted ac-
– press button + or – to activate (on) or     screen without storing settings.            cording to 8 levels).
deactivate (OFF) the speed limit function;




                                                                                                                                       LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                        MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                        WARNING
                                                                                          – briefly press button MENU ESC to go
– if the function is on, press buttons + or   Setting the clock (Hour)                    back to the menu screen or press the but-
– to select the required speed limit and                                                  ton for long to go back to the standard
then press MENU ESC to confirm;               This function is used to set the clock.     screen without storing settings.




                                                                                                                                       EMERGENCY
Note The speed may be set in the range        Proceed as follows:




                                                                                                                                         IN AN
from 30 to 200 km/h, or from 20 to 125        – briefly press button MENU ESC,
mph according to the previously chosen        “hours” will flash on the display;
unit (see “Setting the distance unit”) de-    – press button + or – for setting;
scribed below. The setting will in-




                                                                                                                                       SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
crease/decrease by five units each time       – briefly press button MENU ESC, “min-




                                                                                                                                                          CAR
button +/– is pressed. Hold button +/–        utes” will flash on the display;
pressed to increase/decrease the setting      – press button + or – for setting;
rapidly. Complete the setting by briefly      – briefly press button MENU ESC to go
pressing the button when you approach




                                                                                                                                         TECHNICAL
                                              back to the menu screen or press the but-
the required setting.                         ton for long to go back to the standard
                                              screen without storing settings.




                                                                                                                                       INDEX
                                                                                                                                       21
                                                                                                                                            F0R1001g
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   Setting the distance unit (Unit)               Front passenger’s airbag
                                With this function it is possible to set the   and side bag
                                unit.                                          activation/deactivation
                                                                               (where provided) (BAG P)
                                To set the required unit proceed as fol-
                                lows:                                          This function is used to activate/deactivate
                                                                                                                              MENU ESC
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                               the front passenger’s airbag.
                                – briefly press button MENU ESC, the                                                           + +
                                display will show the message (Unit) and       Proceed as follows:                             – –
                                the previously set unit (km) or (mi);          ❒ press button MENU ESC and after
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                                                                 F0R1002g




                                                                                                                                                       F0R1003g
    OF THE CAR




                                – press button + or – to select the re-          the message (BAG P OFF) (to deacti-
                                quired distance unit.                            vate) or (BAG P On) (to activate) is dis-
                                                                                 played by pressing buttons + or –, press
                                – briefly press button MENU ESC to go            again button MENU ESC;
                                back to the menu screen or press the but-
                                                                               ❒ the confirmation request message will
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                ton for long to go back to the standard
                                screen without storing settings.                 be displayed;                                MENU ESC
                                                                               ❒ press buttons + or – to select (YES)          + +
                                                                                 (confirming activation/deactivation) or       – –
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                 (no) (to abort);
     IN AN




                                                                                                                                 F0R1005i




                                                                                                                                                       F0R1006g
                                                                               ❒ briefly press button MENU ESC to
                                                                                 confirm setting e to go back to the
                                                                                 menu screen or press the button for
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                 long to go back to the standard screen
                                                                                 without storing settings.
                      CAR




                                                                                                                              MENU ESC
     TECHNICAL




                                                                                                                                 F0R1002g




                                                                                                                                                        F0R1003g
               INDEX




                 22
MULTIFUNCTION




                                                                                                                                         AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                          DASHBOARD
DISPLAY
(where provided)
The car can be equipped with the multi-




                                                                                                                                         DEVICES
                                                                                                                                         SAFETY
functional display that, according to the
settings made, will show useful informa-
tion necessary when driving.




                                                                                                                                         CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                          OF THE CAR
                                                                              F0R0018m                                        F0R0019m
                                            fig. 20                                      fig. 21
“STANDARD” SCREEN fig. 20
The standard screen shows the following     CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 21                      Note Buttons + and – activate different
information:                                                                             functions according to the following situ-
A Date.                                     +    To scroll the displayed menu and the    ations:




                                                                                                                                         LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                          MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                          WARNING
                                                 related options upwards or to in-
B Odometer (covered km or miles).                crease the value displayed.
C Clock (always displayed, even with ig-                                                 To adjust light inside the passenger
    nition key removed and front doors                                                   compartment
                                            MENU Press briefly to access the menu
    closed).                                 ESC and/or go to next screen or to          – standard screen, to adjust instrument




                                                                                                                                         EMERGENCY
                                                                                         panel brightness, sound system, and auto-




                                                                                                                                           IN AN
D External temperature.                               confirm the required menu op-
                                                      tion.                              matic climate control system.
E Headlight aiming position (only with
    dipped beam headlights on).                       Hold pressed to go back to the     Setup menu
                                                      standard screen.




                                                                                                                                         SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
Note When opening one of the front                                                       – to scroll the menu options upwards and
doors, the display will turn on and show    –    To scroll the displayed menu and the    downwards;




                                                                                                                                                            CAR
for a few seconds the clock and the kilo-        related options downwards or to de-     – to increase or decrease values during set-
metres or miles covered.                         crease the value displayed.             tings.




                                                                                                                                           TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                         INDEX
                                                                                                                                         23
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   SETUP MENU fig. 22                             Selecting an option of the main menu with     Selecting “Set Date” and
                                The menu comprises a series of functions       submenu:                                      “Set time”:
                                arranged in a cycle which can be selected      – briefly press button MENU ESC to dis-       – briefly press button MENU ESC to se-
                                through buttons + and – to access the dif-     play the first submenu option;                lect the first value to change (e.g. hours
                                ferent select operations and settings (set-    – press buttons + or – (by single press-      /minutes or year / month / day);
                                up) given in the following paragraphs. A       es) to scroll all the submenu options;        – press buttons + or – (by single press-
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                submenu is provided for some items                                                           es) to select the new setting;
                                (Clock and Unit setting).                      – press briefly button MENU ESC to se-
                                                                               lect the displayed submenu option and to      – briefly press button MENU ESC to store
                                The setup menu can be activated by press-      open the relevant setup menu;                 the new setting and to go to the next set-
                                ing briefly button MENU ESC.
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                                                             up menu option, if this is the last one you
    OF THE CAR




                                                                               – press buttons + or – (by single press-
                                Single presses on buttons + or – will scroll   es) to select the new setting for this sub-   will go back to the previously selected op-
                                the setup menu options.                        menu option;                                  tion of the main menu.
                                Handling modes differ with each other ac-      – briefly press button MENU ESC to            Hold button MENU ESC pressed:
                                cording to the characteristic of the option
LIGHTS AND




                                                                               store the new setting and to go back to
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                selected.                                                                                    – to quit the set-up menu if you are in the
                                                                               the previously selected submenu option.       main menu;
                                Selecting an option of the main menu with-
                                out submenu                                                                                  – to quit the main menu if you are at an-
                                                                                                                             other point of the menu (e.g.: at submenu
                                – press briefly button MENU ESC to se-
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                                                             option setting level, at submenu level or
     IN AN




                                lect the main menu option to set;                                                            at main menu option setting level);
                                – press buttons + or – (by single press-                                                     – to save only the settings stored yet (and
                                es) to select the new setting;                                                               confirmed by pressing button MENU
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                – press briefly button MENU ESC to                                                           ESC).
                                store the new setting and to go back to
                      CAR




                                the main menu option previously select-                                                      The setup menu environment is timed.
                                ed.                                                                                          Only the changes saved by the user b
                                                                                                                             briefly pressing MENU ESC will be saved
                                                                                                                             when the menu is automatically closed.
     TECHNICAL
               INDEX




                 24
Example:                                                                                                                     Example:




                                                                                                                                                             AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                                              DASHBOARD
            Türk           Nederlands                Briefly press MENU ESC on the standard screen to                                        Day
 Italiano                                            browse. Press + or – to browse within the menu.
                                    Português        Note Only the short menu may be accessed for rea-
Deutsch                              Polski          sons of safety while the car is moving (“Speed Beep”                        Year                Month
                                                     setting). Stop the car to access the full menu.




                                                                                                                                                             DEVICES
                                                                                                                                                             SAFETY
    English                       Français
                    Español
                                                                                                                                            ESC
                                                                             +                        +                                     MENU




                                                                                                                                                             CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                                              OF THE CAR
                                                                                                                                            briefly press
 ESC                                                        +                –                       –                           +
 MENU                                                                            RAIN SENSOR
 briefly press                                              –   SPEED BEEP       (where provided )        HEADLIGHTS         –
                                                                                                          SENSOR
                                    +                                                                     (where provided)




                                                                                                                                                             LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                                              MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                                              WARNING
                                                EXIT MENU
                                        –                                                                                TRIP B DATA         – +
                 +                                                                                                           SET TIME
                              PASSENGER BAG
                      –




                                                                                                                                                             EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                                – +




                                                                                                                                                               IN AN
                          SERVICE
                                                                                                                          SET DATE
     +




                                                                                                                                                             SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
            –                                                                                                                           –




                                                                                                                                                                                CAR
                                                                                                                  SEE RADIO                 +
                     BELT BUZZER (*)

                –                                                                                                    –




                                                                                                                                                               TECHNICAL
       +               BUTTON VOLUME                                                            AUTOCLOSE
                                                                                                                             +
                              –   WARNING VOLUME                              UNIT UNIT        –
                                                            LANGUAGE
                          +                            –                –                      +                                                F0R2004g




                                                                                                                                                             INDEX
                                                   +                     +                                                                       fig. 21

 (*) This function may only be displayed after the SBR system is deactivated by a Fiat Dealership.
                                                                                                                                                             25
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   Speed limit (Speed Beep)                        To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:       Headlight sensor
                                This function may be used to set the car        – briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)            (Automatic headlight sensor
                                speed limit (km/h or mph); when this lim-       will blink on the display;                       sensitivity adjustment)
                                it is exceeded the driver is immediately                                                         (where provided)
                                alerted (see section “Warning lights and        – press button –: (Off) will flash on the dis-
                                                                                play;                                            This function is used to adjust the
                                messages”).
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                                                                                 dusk sensor sensitivity to three levels
                                To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:     – briefly press button MENU ESC to go            (level 1 = minimum, level 2 = medium, lev-
                                                                                back to the menu screen or press the but-        el 3 = maximum); higher the sensitivity,
                                – briefly press button MENU ESC, the            ton for long to go back to the standard          lower the quantity of external light need-
                                display will show the wording (Speed
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                screen without storing settings.
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                                 ed to switch the headlights on.
                                Buzz);
                                – press button + or – to select speed lim-                                                       Proceed as follows to set:
                                                                                Rain sensor sensitivity adjustment
                                it activation (On) or deactivation (Off);       (Rain sensor) (where provided)                   – briefly press button MENU ESC, the
                                – if the function has been activated (On),                                                       previously set level will flash on the dis-
LIGHTS AND




                                                                                With this function it is possible to adjust
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                press buttons + or – to select the re-                                                           play;
                                                                                the rain sensor sensitivity according to 4
                                quired speed limit and then press MENU          levels.                                          – press button + or – for setting;
                                ESC to confirm.
                                                                                To set the required sensitivity level pro-       – briefly press button MENU ESC to go
                                Note The speed may be set in the range
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                ceed as follows:                                 back to the menu screen or press the but-
                                from 30 to 200 km/h, or from 20 to 125 mph
     IN AN




                                                                                – briefly press button MENU ESC, the             ton for long to go back to the standard
                                according to the previously chosen unit (see                                                     screen without storing settings.
                                “Setting the distance unit”) described below.   previously set sensitivity “level” will flash
                                The setting will increase/decrease by five      on the display;
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                units each time button +/– is pressed. Hold     – press button + or – for setting;
                                button +/– pressed to increase/decrease the
                      CAR




                                setting rapidly. Complete the setting by        – briefly press button MENU ESC to go
                                briefly pressing the button when you ap-        back to the menu screen or press the but-
                                proach the required setting.                    ton for long to go back to the standard
                                                                                screen without storing settings.
     TECHNICAL




                                – briefly press button MENU ESC to go
                                back to the menu screen or press the but-
                                ton for long to go back to the standard
                                screen without storing settings.
               INDEX




                 26
                                                                                                                                            AND CONTROLS
Trip B On/Off (tripB data)                    Setting the clock (Set time)                    When you have made the required set-




                                                                                                                                             DASHBOARD
                                              This function allows to set the clock through   tings, briefly press button MENU ESC
Through this option it is possible to acti-                                                   to go back to the menu screen or press
vate (On) or deactivate (Off) the Trip B      two sub-menus: “Time” and “Mode”.
                                                                                              the button for long to go back to the stan-
(partial trip).                               Proceed as follows:                             dard screen without storing settings.
For further information see “Trip com-        – briefly press button MENU ESC, the            – hold MENU ESC pressed to go back




                                                                                                                                            DEVICES
                                                                                                                                            SAFETY
puter”.                                       display will show the two sub-menus             to the standard screen or main menu ac-
                                              “Time” and “Mode”;                              cording to the points of the menu where
Proceed as follows to switch the function     – press button + or – to surf the two sub-
on and off:                                                                                   you are at.
                                              menus;




                                                                                                                                            CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                             OF THE CAR
– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)         – select the required option and then           Set date (Set Date)
or (Off) will flash on the display (accord-   press button MENU ESCbriefly;
ing to previous setting);                                                                     This function may be used to update the
                                              – when accessing the “Hour” submenu: –          date (year - month - day).
– press button + or – for setting;            briefly press button MENU ESC,
                                                                                              To correct the date proceed as follows:




                                                                                                                                            LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                             MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                             WARNING
                                              “hours” will flash on the display;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to go                                                         – briefly press button MENU ESC: “day”
back to the menu screen or press the but-     – press button + or – for setting;
                                              – briefly press button MENU ESC, “min-          will flash on the display;
ton for long to go back to the standard
screen without storing settings.              utes” will flash on the display;                – press button + or – for setting;




                                                                                                                                            EMERGENCY
                                              – press button + or – for setting;              – briefly press button MENU ESC:




                                                                                                                                              IN AN
                                              – when accessing the “Format” submenu:          “month” will flash on the display;
                                              briefly press button MENU ESC : the             – press button + or – for setting;
                                              previously set display format will flash on




                                                                                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                              the display;                                    – briefly press button MENU ESC:
                                                                                              “year” will flash on the display;




                                                                                                                                                               CAR
                                              – press button + or – to select “24h” or
                                              “12h”.                                          – press button + or – for setting.




                                                                                                                                              TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                            INDEX
                                                                                                                                            27
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   Note The setting will increase or de-          – press button + or – for setting;             button for long to go back to the stan-
                                crease by one unit each time + or – is                                                        dard screen without storing settings.
                                pressed. Hold the button pressed to in-        – briefly press button MENU ESC to go
                                                                               back to the menu screen or press the but-      – hold MENU ESC pressed to go back
                                crease/decrease the setting rapidly. Com-                                                     to the standard screen or main menu ac-
                                plete the setting by briefly pressing the      ton for long to go back to the standard
                                                                               screen without storing settings.               cording to the points of the menu where
                                button when you approach the required                                                         you are at.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                setting.
                                                                               Automatic door locking with car
                                – briefly press button MENU ESC to go          running (Autoclose)                            Set units (Unit of measure)
                                back to the menu screen or press the but-
                                ton for long to go back to the standard        When activated (On), this function locks       With this function it is possible to set the
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                screen without storing settings.               automatically the doors when the car           units through three sub-menus: “Distances”,
                                                                               speed exceeds 20 km/h.                         “Consumption” and “Temperature”.
                                Audio repetition (See radio)                   This function is available on all versions     Proceed as follows to set the required unit:
                                With this function the display repeats in-     and may only be switched off by means          – briefly press button MENU ESC to dis-
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                formation relevant to the sound system.        of the multifunctional display or reconfig-    play the three sub-menus;
                                – Radio: tuned radio station frequency or      urable multifunctional display.
                                                                                                                              – press button + or – to surf the three sub-
                                RDS message, automatic tuning activation       To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) this   menus;
                                or AutoSTore;                                  function proceed as follows:
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                                                              – select the required sub-menu and then
     IN AN




                                – CD audio, CD MP3: track number;              – briefly press button MENU ESC to dis-        press briefly button MENU ESC;
                                – CD Changer: CD number and track              play the three sub-menus;
                                number;                                                                                       – when accessing the “Distances”submenu:
                                                                               – briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)          briefly press MENU ESC: either “km” or
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off)        or (Off) will flash on the display (accord-    “mi” will appear on the display (according
                                sound system info displaying proceed as        ing to previous setting);
                      CAR




                                                                                                                              to the previous setting);
                                follows:
                                                                               – press button + or – for setting;             – press + or – to make your choice;
                                – briefly press MENU ESC: (On) or (Off)
                                will flash on the display (according to pre-   – briefly press button MENU ESC to
     TECHNICAL




                                vious setting);                                go back to the menu screen or press the
               INDEX




                 28
                                                                                                                                               AND CONTROLS
– when you are in the “Consumption” sub-         Selecting the language (Language)               Adjusting the failure/warning




                                                                                                                                                DASHBOARD
menu: briefly press MENU ESC: either                                                             buzzer volume (Buzzer Volume)
“km/l” or “mpg” will appear on the display       The messages may be displayed in the fol-
(according to the previous setting);             lowing languages: Italian, Turkish, Dutch,      With this function the volume of the
                                                 Portuguese, Polish, French, Spanish, Eng-       buzzer accompanying any failure/warning
If the distance unit set is “km” the fuel con-   lish, German.                                   indication can be adjusted according to 8
sumption unit will be displayed in km.                                                           levels.




                                                                                                                                               DEVICES
                                                                                                                                               SAFETY
                                                 To set the required language proceed as
If the distance unit set is “mi” the fuel con-   follows:                                        To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
sumption unit will be displayed in “mpg”.                                                        – briefly press button MENU ESC: the
                                                 – briefly press button MENU ESC: the




                                                                                                                                               CORRECT USE
– press button + or – for setting;               previously set “language” “ will flash on the   previously set volume “level” will flash on




                                                                                                                                                OF THE CAR
                                                 display;                                        the display;
– when accessing the “Temperature”sub-
menu: briefly press MENU ESC: either             – press button + or – for setting;              – press button + or – for setting;
“°C” or “°F” will appear on the display (ac-     – briefly press button MENU ESC to go           – briefly press button MENU ESC to go
cording to the previous setting);




                                                                                                                                               LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                                MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                                WARNING
                                                 back to the menu screen or press the but-       back to the menu screen or press the but-
– press button + or – for setting;               ton for long to go back to the standard         ton for long to go back to the standard
When you have made the required set-             screen without storing settings.                screen without storing settings.
tings, briefly press button MENU ESC to




                                                                                                                                               EMERGENCY
go back to the menu screen or press the




                                                                                                                                                 IN AN
button for long to go back to the standard
screen without storing settings.
– hold MENU ESC pressed to go back
to the standard screen or main menu ac-




                                                                                                                                               SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
cording to the points of the menu where




                                                                                                                                                                  CAR
you are at.




                                                                                                                                                 TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                               INDEX
                                                                                                                                               29
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   Adjusting the button volume                   Scheduled Servicing (Service)                  Note The “Service Schedule” requires the
                                (Button Vol.)                                                                                car to be serviced every 30,000 km (or
                                                                              Through this function it is possible to dis-   18,000 mi) or every 20,000 km (where
                                This function may be used to adjust the       play information connected to proper car       provided); this indication will appear au-
                                volume of the beep accompanying the ac-       servicing.                                     tomatically with the key at MAR when
                                tivation of buttons MENU ESC, + and           Proceed as follows:                            there are 2000 km left (or 1240 mi) and
   DEVICES




                                – can be adjusted according to 8 levels.
   SAFETY




                                                                                                                             will be presented automatically every 200
                                                                              – briefly press button MENU ESC: ser-          km (or 124 mi). The indications will ap-
                                To adjust the volume proceed as follows:      vice in km or mi, according to previous        pear more frequently where there are 200
                                – briefly press button MENU ESC: the          setting, will be displayed (see paragraph      km left. The indication will appear in kilo-
   CORRECT USE




                                previously set volume “level” will flash on   “Units”);
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                             metres or miles according to the settings.
                                the display;                                  – briefly press button MENU ESC to go          When the next scheduled service opera-
                                – press button + or – for setting;            back to the menu screen or press the but-      tion is approaching, the message “Service”
                                                                              ton for long to go back to the standard        will appear on the display followed by the
                                – briefly press button MENU ESC to go         screen.                                        number of kilometres or miles left when
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                back to the menu screen or press the but-                                                    the key is turned to MAR. Go to a Fiat
                                ton for long to go back to the standard                                                      Dealership where the “Scheduled Service”
                                screen without storing settings.                                                             operations will be performed and the mes-
                                                                                                                             sage will be reset.
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




                 30
                                                            F0R1009g




                                                                                                                                    AND CONTROLS
Passenger front and side airbag                                                    Exit Menu




                                                                                                                                     DASHBOARD
activation/deactivation                                                            This is the last function that closes the cir-
(where provided) (passenger bag)                                                   cular setting cycle listed in the initial menu
This function shall be used to activate/de-                                        screen.
activate the front passenger’s airbag.        MENU ESC
                                               + +                                 Briefly press button MENU ESC to go




                                                                                                                                    DEVICES
                                                                                                                                    SAFETY
Proceed as follows:                            – –                                 back to the standard screen without stor-
                                                                                   ing settings.
❒ press button MENU ESC and press




                                                 F0R1010g




                                                                       F0R1011g
  MENU ESC again after the message                                                 Press button – to return to the first menu




                                                                                                                                    CORRECT USE
                                                                                   option (Speed Beep).




                                                                                                                                     OF THE CAR
  (Bag pass: Off) (to deactivate) or (Bag
  pass: On) (to activate) is displayed by
  pressing buttons + and –;                   MENU ESC
❒ display will show the confirmation mes-
                                               + +




                                                                                                                                    LIGHTS AND
  sage;




                                                                                                                                     MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                     WARNING
                                               – –
❒ press buttons + or – to select (Yes)
  (confirming activation/deactivation) or




                                                 F0R1013g




                                                                       F0R1014g
  (No) (to abort);




                                                                                                                                    EMERGENCY
❒ briefly press button MENU ESC to




                                                                                                                                      IN AN
  confirm setting e to go back to the
  menu screen or press the button for         MENU ESC
  long to go back to the standard screen
                                               + +




                                                                                                                                    SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
  without storing settings.
                                               – –




                                                                                                                                                       CAR
                                                 F0R1009g




                                                                        F0R1009g




                                                                                                                                      TECHNICAL
                                              MENU ESC




                                                                                                                                    INDEX
                                                 F0R1015g




                                                                        F0R1016g




                                                                                                                                    31
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   RECONFIGURABLE
                                MULTIFUNCTION
                                DISPLAY
                                (where provided)
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                The car may be equipped with reconfig-
                                urable a multifunctional display that, ac-
                                cording to the settings made, will show
   CORRECT USE




                                useful driving information.
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                 F0R2010g                                      F0R0241m
                                                                              fig. 23/a                                     fig. 23/b

                                “STANDARD” SCREEN fig. 23/a                   CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 24
                                The standard screen shows the following       +    To scroll the displayed menu and the
LIGHTS AND




                                information:
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                   related options upwards or to in-
                                A Time                                             crease the displayed value.
                                B Date                                        MENU Press briefly to access the menu
                                                                              ESC  and/or go to next screen or to
   EMERGENCY




                                C Sport driving mode indication (where                    confirm the required menu op-
     IN AN




                                  provided)                                               tion.
                                D Odometer (distance travelled in kilo-                   Long press to go back to the                                         F0R0019m
                                                                                                                            fig. 24
                                  metres/miles)                                           standard screen.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                E Car conditions (e.g. doors open, ice on     –    To scroll the displayed menu and the     Note Buttons + and – activate different
                      CAR




                                  road, etc.)                                      related options downwards or to de-      functions according to the following situ-
                                                                                   crease the value displayed.              ations:
                                F Headlight aiming position (with dipped
                                  beam headlights on only)                                                                  – to scroll the menu options upwards and
     TECHNICAL




                                G Outside temperature                                                                       downwards;

                                When rotating the ignition key to MAR                                                       – to increase or decrease values during
                                position, the display shows, as main                                                        settings.
                                screen, the indication of the date fig.23/a                                                 Note When opening one of the front
               INDEX




                                or the overpressure of the turbo-charg-                                                     doors, the display will turn on and show
                                er fig.23/b according to the previous se-                                                   for a few seconds the clock and the km or
                                lection in the menu item “First screen”                                                     mi covered.
                                (“Date” or “Engine Info”).
                 32
                                                                                                                                         AND CONTROLS
SETUP MENU fig. 25                              Selecting an option of the main menu       Selecting an option of the main menu with




                                                                                                                                          DASHBOARD
                                                without submenu                            submenu:
The menu comprises a series of functions
arranged in a “circular fashion” which can      – press briefly button MENU ESC to se-     – press briefly button MENU ESC to dis-
be selected through buttons + and – to          lect the main menu option to set;          play the first submenu option;
access the different select operations and
settings (setup) given in the following para-   – press buttons + or – (by single press-   – press buttons + or – (by single press-




                                                                                                                                         DEVICES
                                                                                                                                         SAFETY
graphs. A submenu is provided for some          es) to select the new setting;             es) to scroll all the submenu options;
items (Clock and Unit setting).                 – press briefly button MENU ESC to         – press briefly button MENU ESC to se-
The setup menu can be activated by press-       store the new setting and to go back to    lect the displayed submenu option and to




                                                                                                                                         CORRECT USE
                                                the main menu option previously select-    open the relevant setup menu;




                                                                                                                                          OF THE CAR
ing briefly button MENU ESC.
                                                ed.
Single presses on buttons + or – will scroll                                               – press buttons + or – (by single press-
the setup menu options. Management                                                         es) to select the new setting for this sub-
modes differ with each other according to                                                  menu option;




                                                                                                                                         LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                          MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                          WARNING
the characteristic of the option selected.                                                 – press briefly button MENU ESC to
                                                                                           store the new setting and to go back to
                                                                                           the previously selected submenu option.




                                                                                                                                         EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                           IN AN
                                                                                                                                         SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                           TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                         INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                         33
                                Example:
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                                                                    On the standard screen, briefly press MENU ESC to start brows-                                Day
                                                                                    ing. Press + or – to browse within the menu. Note Only the short
                                                                                    menu may be accessed for reasons of safety while the car is moving                Year               Month
                                           Türk        Nederlands
                                                                                    (“Brightness” and “Speed Beep”). Stop the car to access the full menu.
                                Italiano                            Português
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                Deutsch                            Polski                                                              +                                          MENU ESC
                                                                                                              +                                                                   briefly press
                                   English                      Français                                                                                          +
                                                  Español
                                                                                         +                                             –
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                               –       SPEED BEEP            RAIN SENSOR
                                                                                                                                           (where provided)
                                                                                                                                                              –
                                  MENU ESC                                                   –   EXIT MENU
                                                                                                                                                      HEADLIGHT
                                                                                                                                                                                   +
                                  briefly press                    +                                                                                  SENSOR
                                                                                                                                                      (where provided)
                                                                                                                                                                          –
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                PASSENGER BAG
                                                                            –                                                                                 TRIP B DATA


                                                  +             SERVICE
                                                                                                                                                                              –         +
   EMERGENCY




                                                            –
     IN AN




                                                                                                                                                               SET TIME



                                     +            BELT BUZZER                                                                                                         –
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                              –                                                                                                                               +
                      CAR




                                                                                                                                                  SET DATE
                                                  BUTTON VOL.
                                                                                                                                                       –
                                                                                                                                    FIRST PAGE
                                   +         –                                                                                                                    +
     TECHNICAL




                                                      BUZZER VOL.
                                                                                                                                       –
                                                                                                                           SEE RADIO
                                                      –     LANGUAGE                                  AUTOCLOSE    –                        +
                                                                                  UNIT
               INDEX




                                                                                                                                                                              F0R2005g
                                             +                              –                    –
                                                                                                                       +                                                                 fig. 25
                                                                       +                         +
                 34
                                                                                                                                            AND CONTROLS
Speed beep (Speed limit)                      Note The speed may be set in the range       – briefly press button MENU ESC to go




                                                                                                                                             DASHBOARD
                                              from 30 to 200 km/h, or from 20 to 125       back to the menu screen or press the but-
This function is used to set the car speed    mph according to the previously chosen       ton for long to go back to the standard
limit (km/h or mph); when this limit is ex-   unit (see “Setting the distance unit”) de-   screen without storing settings.
ceeded the driver is immediately alerted      scribed below. The setting will in-
(see section “Warning lights and mes-         crease/decrease by five units each time      To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:
sages”).




                                                                                                                                            DEVICES
                                                                                                                                            SAFETY
                                              button +/– is pressed. Hold button +/–       – briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)
To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:   pressed to increase/decrease the setting     will blink on the display;
                                              rapidly. Complete the setting by briefly
– briefly press button MENU ESC, the          pressing the button when you approach        – press button –: (Off) will flash on the dis-




                                                                                                                                            CORRECT USE
display will show the wording (Speed                                                       play;




                                                                                                                                             OF THE CAR
                                              the required setting.
Buzz);
                                                                                           – briefly press button MENU ESC to go
– press button + or – to select speed lim-                                                 back to the menu screen or press the but-
it activation (On) or deactivation (Off);                                                  ton for long to go back to the standard
                                                                                           screen without storing settings.




                                                                                                                                            LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                             MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                             WARNING
– if the function has been activated (On),
press buttons + or – to select the re-
quired speed limit and then press MENU
ESC to confirm.




                                                                                                                                            EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                              IN AN
                                                                                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                              TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                            INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                            35
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   Rain sensor sensitivity adjustment              – press button + or – for setting;               Setting the time (Clock)
                                (Rain sensor) (where provided)                  – briefly press button MENU ESC to go            This function allows to set the clock
                                With this function it is possible to adjust     back to the menu screen or press the but-        through two sub-menus: “Time” and
                                the rain sensor sensitivity according to 4      ton for long to go back to the standard          “Mode”.
                                levels.                                         screen without storing settings.                 Proceed as follows:
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                To set the required sensitivity level pro-
                                ceed as follows:                                Trip B data (Trip B on)                          – briefly press button MENU ESC, the
                                                                                                                                 display will show the two submenus
                                – briefly press button MENU ESC, the            This function may be used to activate (On)       “Time” and “Mode”;
                                previously set sensitivity “level” will flash   or deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip).
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                                                                 – press button + or – to switch between
    OF THE CAR




                                on the display;
                                                                                For further information see “Trip com-           the two submenus;
                                – press button + or – for setting;
                                                                                puter”.                                          – select the required option and then
                                – briefly press button MENU ESC to go
                                back to the menu screen or press the but-       Proceed as follows to switch the function        press button MENU ESCbriefly;
LIGHTS AND




                                ton for long to go back to the standard         on and off:
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                                                                 - when accessing the “Time” submenu: –
                                screen without storing settings.                – briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)            briefly press button MENU ESC,
                                                                                or (Off) will flash on the display (accord-      “hours” will flash on the display;
                                Headlight sensor                                ing to previous setting);                        – press button + or – for setting;
                                (Automatic headlight sensor
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                – press button + or – for setting;               – briefly press button MENU ESC, “min-
     IN AN




                                sensitivity adjustment)
                                                                                                                                 utes” will flash on the display;
                                (where provided)                                – briefly press button MENU ESC to go
                                                                                back to the menu screen or press the but-        – press button + or – for setting.
                                This function is used to adjust the dusk
                                                                                ton for long to go back to the standard
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                sensor sensitivity to three levels (level 1
                                = minimum, level 2 = medium, level 3 =          screen without storing settings.
                      CAR




                                maximum); higher the sensitivity, lower
                                the quantity of external light needed to
                                switch the headlights on. Proceed as fol-
                                lows to set:
     TECHNICAL




                                – briefly press button MENU ESC, the
                                previously set level will flash on the dis-
                                play;
               INDEX




                 36
                                                                                                                                        AND CONTROLS
Note The setting will increase or de-         Set date (Set Date)                         First screen (information displayed




                                                                                                                                         DASHBOARD
crease by one unit each time + or – is                                                    in the main screen)
pressed. Hold the button pressed to in-       This function may be used to update the
                                              date (year - month - day).                  (where provided)
crease/decrease the setting rapidly. Com-
plete the setting by briefly pressing the     To correct the date proceed as follows:     This function enables to select the type of
button when you approach the required                                                     information displayed in the main screen.




                                                                                                                                        DEVICES
                                              – briefly press button MENU ESC:




                                                                                                                                        SAFETY
setting.                                                                                  It is possible to display the date or the
                                              “year” will flash on the display;           pressure of the turbo-compressor.
– when accessing the “Format” submenu:
briefly press button MENU ESC: the            – press button + or – for setting;          To select one of the two items, proceed
previously set display format will flash on                                               as follows:




                                                                                                                                        CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                         OF THE CAR
                                              – briefly press button MENU ESC:
the display;                                  “month” will flash on the display;          – push the button MENU ESC for a
– press button + or – to select “24h” or                                                  short time, “First screen” is displayed;
“12h”.                                        – press button + or – for setting;
                                                                                          – press again the button MENU ESC for
                                              – briefly press button MENU ESC: “day”




                                                                                                                                        LIGHTS AND
When you have made the required set-                                                      a short time to display the “Date” and




                                                                                                                                         MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                         WARNING
tings, briefly press button MENU ESC to       will flash on the display;                  “Engine Info” options;
go back to the menu screen or press the       – press button + or – for setting.
button for long to go back to the standard                                                – press + or – to select the type of infor-
screen without storing settings.              Note The setting will increase or de-       mation to be displayed in the main screen;




                                                                                                                                        EMERGENCY
                                              crease by one unit each time + or – is      – press MENU ESC for a short time to




                                                                                                                                          IN AN
– hold MENU ESC pressed to go back            pressed. Hold the button pressed to in-
to the standard screen or main menu ac-                                                   store the selection and return to the pre-
                                              crease/decrease the setting rapidly. Com-   vious screen or press the button for a
cording to the points of the menu where       plete the setting by briefly pressing the
you are at.                                                                               longer time to return to the standard
                                              button when you approach the required




                                                                                                                                        SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                          screen without storing the selection.
                                              setting.




                                                                                                                                                           CAR
                                                                                          Rotating the ignition key on MAR, the re-
                                              – briefly press button MENU ESC to go       configurable multifunctional display, after
                                              back to the menu screen or press the but-   the start-up check, displays the previous-
                                              ton for long to go back to the standard     ly set information using the “First screen”




                                                                                                                                          TECHNICAL
                                              screen without storing settings.            function of the menu.




                                                                                                                                        INDEX
                                                                                                                                        37
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   See radio                                     Autoclose                                     Unit of measure (Set units)
                                (Repeat audio information)                    (Automatic door lock operation                This function may be used to set the unit
                                This function is used to display informa-     with car running)                             for measure in three submenus: “Dis-
                                tion relevant to the sound system.            When activated (On), this function locks      tances”, “Consumption” and “Tempera-
                                                                              automatically the doors when the car          ture”.
                                – Radio: tuned radio station frequency or
   DEVICES




                                                                              speed exceeds 20 km/h.
   SAFETY




                                RDS message, automatic tuning activation                                                    Proceed as follows to set the required
                                or AutoSTore;                                 This function is available on all versions    unit:
                                – CD audio, CD MP3: track number;             and may only be switched off by means         – briefly press button MENU ESC to dis-
                                                                              of the multifunctional display or reconfig-
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                                                            play the three sub-menus;
    OF THE CAR




                                – CD Changer: CD number and track             urable multifunctional display.
                                number;                                                                                     – press button + or – to browse the three
                                                                              Proceed as follows to switch this function    submenus;
                                To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off)       on or off:
                                sound system info displaying proceed as                                                     – select the required submenu and then
LIGHTS AND




                                                                              - briefly press button MENU ESC to dis-
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                follows:                                                                                    press briefly buttonMENU ESC;
                                                                              play a submenu;
                                – briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)                                                       – when accessing the “Distance” submenu:
                                or (Off) will flash on the display (accord-   – briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)         briefly press MENU ESC: either “km” or
                                ing to previous setting);                     or (Off) will flash on the display (accord-   “mi” will appear on the display (accord-
   EMERGENCY




                                                                              ing to previous setting);                     ing to the previous setting);
     IN AN




                                – press button + or – for setting;
                                                                              – press button + or – for setting;            – press button + or – for setting;
                                – briefly press button MENU ESC to go
                                back to the menu screen or press the but-     – briefly press button MENU ESC to go         – when accessing the “Consumption” sub-
                                                                              back to the menu screen or press the but-
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                ton for long to go back to the standard                                                     menu: briefly press MENU ESC: either
                                screen without storing settings.              ton for long to go back to the standard       “km/l”, “l/100km” or “mpg” will appear on
                      CAR




                                                                              screen without storing settings.              the display (according to the previous set-
                                                                              – hold MENU ESC pressed to go back to         ting);
                                                                              the standard screen or main menu accord-      If the distance unit set is “km” the fuel con-
     TECHNICAL




                                                                              ing to the points of the menu where you are   sumption unit will be displayed in km/l or
                                                                              at.                                           l/100km.
               INDEX




                 38
                                                                                                                                               AND CONTROLS
If the distance unit set is “mi” the fuel con-   Language (Selecting the language)               Buzzer volume (Adjusting the




                                                                                                                                                DASHBOARD
sumption unit will be displayed in “mpg”.                                                        failure/warning buzzer volume)
                                                 The messages may be displayed in the fol-
– press button + or – for setting;               lowing languages: Italian, German,              With this function the volume of the
                                                 English, Spanish, French, Portuguese,           buzzer accompanying any failure/warning
– when accessing the “Temperature” sub-          Dutch.
menu: briefly press MENU ESC: either                                                             indication can be adjusted according to 8




                                                                                                                                               DEVICES
                                                                                                 levels.




                                                                                                                                               SAFETY
“°C” or “°F” will appear on the display ac-      To set the required language proceed as
cording to the previous setting;                 follows:                                        To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
– press button + or – for setting;               – briefly press button MENU ESC: the            – briefly press button MENU ESC: the




                                                                                                                                               CORRECT USE
                                                 previously set “language” “ will flash on the




                                                                                                                                                OF THE CAR
When you have made the required set-                                                             previously set volume “level” will flash on
                                                 display;                                        the display;
tings, briefly press button MENU ESC to
go back to the menu screen or press the          – press button + or – for setting;              – press button + or – for setting;
button for long to go back to the standard
screen without storing settings.                 – briefly press button MENU ESC to go           – briefly press button MENU ESC to go




                                                                                                                                               LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                                MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                                WARNING
                                                 back to the menu screen or press the but-       back to the menu screen or press the but-
– hold MENU ESC pressed to go back               ton for long to go back to the standard         ton for long to go back to the standard
to the standard screen or main menu ac-          screen without storing settings.                screen without storing settings.
cording to the points of the menu where
you are at.




                                                                                                                                               EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                                 IN AN
                                                                                                                                               SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                                 TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                               INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                               39
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   Button volume                                 Service (Scheduled servicing)                  Note The “Service Schedule” requires the
                                (Button volume adjustment)                                                                   car to be serviced every 30,000 km (or
                                                                              This function may be used to display in-       18,000 mi) or every 20,000 km (12,000 mi)
                                This function may be used to adjust the       formation connected to proper car ser-         (where provided); this indication will ap-
                                volume of the beep accompanying the ac-       vicing.                                        pear automatically with the key at MAR
                                tivation of buttons MENU ESC, + and           Proceed as follows:                            when there are 2000 km left (or equiva-
                                – can be adjusted according to 8 levels.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                                                                             lent distance in miles) and will be pre-
                                                                              – briefly press button MENU ESC: ser-          sented automatically every 200 km (or
                                To adjust the volume proceed as follows:      vice in km or mi, according to previous set-   equivalent distance in miles). The indica-
                                – briefly press button MENU ESC: the          ting, will be displayed (see paragraph         tions will appear more frequently where
   CORRECT USE




                                previously set volume “level” will flash on   “Units”);
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                             there are 200 km left. The indication will
                                the display;                                  – briefly press button MENU ESC to go          appear in kilometres or miles according to
                                – press button + or – for setting;            back to the menu screen or press the but-      the settings. When the next scheduled
                                                                              ton for long to go back to the standard        service operation is approaching, the mes-
                                – briefly press button MENU ESC to go         screen.                                        sage “Service” will appear on the display
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                back to the menu screen or press the but-                                                    followed by the number of kilometres or
                                ton for long to go back to the standard                                                      miles left when the key is turned to MAR.
                                screen without storing settings.                                                             Go to a Fiat Dealership where the “Sched-
                                                                                                                             uled Service” operations will be per-
                                                                                                                             formed and the message will be reset.
   EMERGENCY




                                Belt buzzer (Buzzer activation
     IN AN




                                for S.B.R. indication)
                                This function can be only displayed after
                                Fiat Dealership has deactivated the S.B.R.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                system (see paragraph “S.B.R. system” in
                                section “Safety devices”).
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




                 40
                                                              F0R2006g




                                                                                                                          AND CONTROLS
Passenger bag Front passenger’s                                          Exit Menu




                                                                                                                           DASHBOARD
airbag and side bag                                                      This is the last function that closes the cir-
activation/deactivation                                                  cular setting cycle listed in the initial menu
(where provided)                                                         screen.
This function may be used to activate/de-                                Briefly press button MENU ESC to go




                                                                                                                          DEVICES
                                                                                                                          SAFETY
activate the front passenger’s airbag.         +                         back to the standard screen without stor-
                                                   MENU ESC              ing settings.
Proceed as follows:                            –
– press MENU ESC and press MENU                                          Press button – to return to the first menu




                                                              F0R2007g




                                                                                                                          CORRECT USE
                                                                         option (Speed Beep).




                                                                                                                           OF THE CAR
ESC again after displaying the message
(Bag pass: Off, to deactivate) or (Bag pass:
On, to activate) by means of buttons
+ and –;




                                                                                                                          LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                           MESSAGES
– the confirmation request message will




                                                                                                                           WARNING
be displayed;                                  +
                                                   MENU ESC
– press buttons + or – to select (Yes) for     –
confirming activation/deactivation, or (No)




                                                              F0R2008g




                                                                                                                          EMERGENCY
to abort;




                                                                                                                            IN AN
– briefly press MENU ESC to confirm
setting e to go back to the menu screen
or press the button for long to go back to




                                                                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
the standard screen without storing set-
tings.




                                                                                                                            TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                          INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                          41
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   TRIP COMPUTER                                  “Trip B”, available on multifunctional dis-    Values displayed
                                                                               play only, shall be used to display the fig-
                                                                               ures relating to:                              Range
                                General features                                                                              This indicates the distance which may be
                                                                               – Trip distance B
                                The “Trip computer” is used to display in-                                                    travelled with the fuel in the tank
                                formation on car operation when the key        – Average consumption B                        assuming that driving conditions will not
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                is turned to MAR. This function allows to                                                     change. The message “——” will appear
                                                                               – Average speed B                              on the display in the following cases:
                                define two separate trips called “Trip A”
                                and “Trip B” for monitoring the car’s          – Travel time B (driving time).                – range shorter than 50 km (or 30 mi)
                                “complete mission” in a reciprocally in-
   CORRECT USE




                                                                               Note “Trip B” functions may be exclud-
    OF THE CAR




                                dependent manner.                                                                             – car left parked with engine running for
                                                                               ed (see “Trip B on”). “Range” and “In-         long.
                                Both functions are resettable (reset - start   stantaneous consumption” cannot be re-
                                of new mission).                               set.                                           Distance travelled
                                “Trip A” may be used to display the fig-                                                      This indicates the distance covered from
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                ures relating to:                                                                             the start of the new mission.
                                – Range
                                – Distance travelled
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                – Average consumption
                                – Instant consumption
                                – Average speed
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                – Travel time (driving time).
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




                 42
                                                                                                                                             AND CONTROLS
Average consumption                                                                             – after disconnecting/reconnecting the




                                                                                                                                              DASHBOARD
                                                                                                battery.
This indicates the average consumption
from the start of the new mission.                                                              IMPORTANT The reset operation in the
                                                                                                presence of the screens concerning the
Instant consumption                                                                             “Trip A” makes it possible to reset only
                                                                                                the information associated with this func-




                                                                                                                                             DEVICES
This indicates the fuel consumption. The




                                                                                                                                             SAFETY
value is constantly updated. The message                                                        tion.
“----” will appear on the display                                                               IMPORTANT The reset operation in the
if the car is parked with the engine run-                                                       presence of the screens concerning the




                                                                                                                                             CORRECT USE
ning.




                                                                                                                                              OF THE CAR
                                                                                     F0R0020m
                                               fig. 26                                          “Trip B” makes it possible to reset only
Average speed                                                                                   the information associated with this func-
                                               TRIP button fig. 26                              tion.
This shows the car average speed as a
function of the overall time elapsed since     Button TRIP, set on the top of the right
                                                                                                Start of journey procedure




                                                                                                                                             LIGHTS AND
                                               steering column stalk, shall be used (with




                                                                                                                                              MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                              WARNING
the start of the new mission.
                                               ignition key at MAR) to display and to re-       With ignition key at MAR, press and keep
Travel time                                    set the previously described values to start     button TRIP pressed for over 2 seconds
This value shows the time elapsed since        a new mission:                                   to reset.
the start of the new mission.                  – briefly press to display the different val-




                                                                                                                                             EMERGENCY
                                               ues




                                                                                                                                               IN AN
IMPORTANT If information is not avail-                                                          Exit Trip
able, the message “----” will appear instead   – hold pressed to reset and then start a
                                               new mission.                                     To exit the Trip function: hold MENU
of the Trip Computer values. Displaying                                                         ESC pressed for longer than 2 seconds.




                                                                                                                                             SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
of the values will be resumed when nor-
mal operation is restored without reset-       New mission




                                                                                                                                                                CAR
ting the values displayed before the prob-     Reset can be:
lem nor starting a new mission.                – “manual” resetting by the user, by press-
                                               ing the relevant button;




                                                                                                                                               TECHNICAL
                                               – “automatic” resetting, when the “Trip dis-
                                               tance” reaches 3999.9 km or 9999.9 km
                                               (according to the type of display) or when
                                               the “Travel time” reaches 99.59 (99 hours
                                               and 59 minutes);




                                                                                                                                             INDEX
                                                                                                                                             43
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   FRONT SEATS                                                                               Back rest angle adjustment fig. 27
                                                                                                                          Turn knob C.
                                                WARNING
                                          All adjustments must be
                                          made with the car stationary.                                                                    WARNING
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                                                                                    For maximum safety, keep
                                                                                                                                    the back of your seat up-
                                                                                                                          right, lean back into it and make sure
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                                                          the seat belt fits closely across your
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                               F0R0021m
                                                                            fig. 27
                                          The fabric upholstery of your                                                   chest and hips.
                                          car is designed to withstand
                                          the normal wear and tear of                         WARNING
                                          your car for a long time. Some              After releasing the lever, al-
LIGHTS AND




                                precautions are however needed. Avoid
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                      ways check that the seat is
                                prolonged rubbing against clothing ac-       locked on the guides by trying to
                                cessories, such as metal buckles, Velcro     move it backwards and forth. If it is
                                strips and the like, which by applying a     not locked, the seat may move unex-
                                high pressure on the fabric in a small       pectedly and make you loose control
   EMERGENCY




                                area could cause the breakage of some
     IN AN




                                                                             of the car.
                                threads and damage the upholstery.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                Backwards/Forwards adjustment               Seat height adjustment
                      CAR




                                fig. 27                                     (where provided) fig. 27
                                Lift lever A and push the seat forwards     Move lever B upwards or downwards to
                                and backwards: your arms should rest on     achieve the required height.
     TECHNICAL




                                the steering wheel rim while you are dri-
                                ving.                                       IMPORTANT Adjustment must be car-
                                                                            ried out only seated in the relevant seat.
               INDEX




                 44
                                            REAR SEATS                                   HEAD RESTRAINTS




                                                                                                                                       AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                        DASHBOARD
                                            To folds the rear seats refer to paragraph
                                            “Extending the boot” in this section.        FRONT fig. 29
                                                                                         On certain versions head restraints are ad-
                                                                                         justable in height and they lock automati-




                                                                                                                                       DEVICES
                                                                                                                                       SAFETY
                                                                                         cally in the required position.
                                                     The fabric upholstery of your
                                                     car is designed to withstand        To adjust head restraints proceed as fol-
                                                     the normal wear and tear of         lows:




                                                                                                                                       CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                        OF THE CAR
                                 F0R0022m
fig. 28
                                                     your car for a long time.           ❒ upward adjustment: raise the head re-
                                            Some precautions are however need-             straint until you hear it click.
Electric lumbar adjustment                  ed. Avoid prolonged rubbing against
(where provided) fig. 28                    clothing accessories, such as metal




                                                                                                                                       LIGHTS AND
                                            buckles, Velcro strips and the like,




                                                                                                                                        MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                        WARNING
For electric lumbar adjustment, use con-
trols E.                                    which by applying a high pressure on
                                            the fabric in a small area could cause
                                            the breakage of some threads and
                                            damage the upholstery.




                                                                                                                                       EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                         IN AN
                                                                                                                                       SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                         TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                       INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                       45
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                                                                                                    To lift out rear head restraints: press at
                                                                                                                                 the same time buttons A and B set on
                                                                                                                                 both sides and take them out.
                                                                                                                                 IMPORTANT Rear seat passengers shall
                                                                                                                                 always set the head restraints in the po-
                                                                                                                                 sition of use.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                    F0R0024m                                          F0R0025m
                                fig. 29                                        fig. 30

                                ❒ downward adjustment: press A and             REAR (where provided) fig. 30
                                  lower the head restraint.
                                                                               To use the head restraint, raise it until hear-
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                To lift out front head restraints: press at    ing the click (position of use).
                                the same time buttons A and B set on
                                both sides and take them out.                  To bring it back to the original position
                                                                               (position of non use), press button A and
                                                                               push the head restraint down into the
   EMERGENCY




                                                                               back rest.
     IN AN




                                                  WARNING
                                          The head restraints must be
                                          adjusted so that they sup-
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                 port your neck and not your head.
                      CAR




                                 Only in this way may they perform
                                 their protective action.
     TECHNICAL




                                To optimise head restraint protective ac-
                                tion, adjust the seat back upright and keep
                                your head as close as possible to the head
               INDEX




                                restraint.



                 46
STEERING WHEEL                                                                           REARVIEW MIRRORS




                                                                                                                                      AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                       DASHBOARD
The driver can adjust the steering wheel
position both axially and in height.                                                     DRIVING MIRROR fig. 32
Proceed as follows:                                                                      The mirror is fitted with a safety device
                                                                                         that causes it to be released in the event




                                                                                                                                      DEVICES
                                                                                                                                      SAFETY
❒ release the lever A-fig. 31 pushing it                                                 of a violent crash.
  forwards (position 2);
❒ adjust the steering wheel as required;




                                                                                                                                      CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                       OF THE CAR
                                                                              F0R0026m
                                            fig. 31
❒ lock the lever A pulling it towards the
  steering wheel (position 1).
                                                             WARNING
                                                      Any adjustment of the steer-




                                                                                                                                      LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                       MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                       WARNING
                                                      ing wheel position must be
                                             carried out only with the car station-
                                             ary and the engine turned off.




                                                                                                                                      EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                        IN AN
                                                               WARNING
                                                      It is absolutely forbidden to




                                                                                                                                      SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                      carry out whatever after-




                                                                                                                                                         CAR
                                             market operation involving steering
                                             system or steering column modifica-
                                             tions (e.g.: installation of anti-theft
                                             device) that could badly affect per-




                                                                                                                                        TECHNICAL
                                             formance and safety, cause the lapse
                                             of warranty and also result in non-
                                             compliance of the car with homolo-
                                             gation requirements.




                                                                                                                                      INDEX
                                                                                                                                      47
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
   DEVICES
   SAFETY
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                  F0R0027m                                       F0R0029m                                        F0R0030m
                                fig. 32                                      fig. 34                                        fig. 35

                                                                             DOOR MIRRORS                                   Manual adjustment fig. 35
                                                                                                                            Use knob A-fig. 35 to adjust manually.
LIGHTS AND




                                                                             Electrical adjustment fig. 33
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                             This operation is only possible with igni-
                                                                             tion key at MAR.                                         When driving the mirrors shall
                                                                             Proceed as follows:                                      always be in position 1-fig. 34.
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                                             ❒ use switch B to select the mirror re-
                                                                               quired (left or right);                      Demisting/defrosting
                                                                  F0R0028m
                                fig. 33                                                                                     (where provided)
                                                                             ❒ to adjust the mirror move the switch
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                               C in the four directions;                    Mirrors are fitted with resistors that will
                                The mirror can be adjusted to two differ-
                      CAR




                                                                                                                            activate when turning the heated rear win-
                                ent positions (normal or antiglare) by       Folding                                        dow on (by pressing button ().
                                means of the lever A.
                                                                             When required (for example when the            IMPORTANT This function is timed and
                                Some versions fit an electrochromic mir-     mirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces)     it will turn off automatically a few minutes
     TECHNICAL




                                ror. Button ON/OFF on the lower part         it is possible to fold the mirror moving it    later.
                                of the window is used to switch the elec-    from position 1-fig. 34 to position 2.
                                trochromic function on and off. Switch on
                                to shade the mirror for daytime use.                                                                          WARNING
                                                                                                                                      As the driver’s door mirror is
               INDEX




                                                                                                                                      curved, it may slightly alter the
                                                                                                                             perception of distance.

                 48
HEATING AND VENTILATION




                                                                                                                                       AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                        DASHBOARD
                                                                                                                         F0R0031m




                                                                                                                                       DEVICES
                                                                                                                                       SAFETY
                                                                                                                                       CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                        OF THE CAR
                                                                                                                                       LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                        MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                        WARNING
                                                                                                                                       EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                         IN AN
                                                                                                                                       SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                         TECHNICAL        CAR
fig. 36




                                                                                                                                       INDEX
1. Upper fixed vent - 2. Adjustable central vents - 3. Fixed side vent - 4. Adjustable side vents - 5. Lower vents for front seats -
6. Lower side vents for rear seats - 7. Lower central vent for rear seats (where provided).

                                                                                                                                       49
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
   DEVICES
   SAFETY
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                 F0R0032m
                                fig. 37
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING

   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                                                                                                    F0R0034m
                                                                            fig. 39
                                                                 F0R0033m
                                fig. 38
                                                                                                        Fan on/off and speed adjustment
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                            CONTROLS fig. 39
                                ADJUSTABLE SIDE AND                                                     knob B
                      CAR




                                CENTRAL VENTS fig. 37-38                    Air temperature knob A      p 0 = fan off
                                A Fixed vent for side windows.              (mixing hot and cold air)
                                                                                                        1-2-3 = ventilation speed
                                B Adjustable side vents.                    Red section = hot air
     TECHNICAL




                                                                                                        4 - = maximum fan speed
                                C Adjustable central vents.                 Blue section = cold air
                                Vents A are fixed.
                                To use vents B and C, operate the rele-
               INDEX




                                vant device to turn them as required.


                 50
                                                                                                                                    AND CONTROLS
Air distribution knob C                    VENTILATION                                FAST HEATING




                                                                                                                                     DASHBOARD
¶ to convey air to the central and side    To ventilate the passenger’s compartment   For fast heating of the passenger com-
   vents;                                  properly proceed as follows:               partment, proceed as follows:
ß to warm the feet and convey cooler       ❒ knob A turned to blue section;           ❒ turn knob A to the red sector;
   air to the dashboard vents, in inter-
                                           ❒ switch internal air recirculation off;   ❒ switch internal air recirculation on;




                                                                                                                                    DEVICES
                                                                                                                                    SAFETY
   mediate temperature conditions;
                                           ❒ turn knob C to ¶;                        ❒ turn knob C to ¶;
© for heating when the outside temper-
   ature is very cold: for maximum air     ❒ turn knob B to required speed.           ❒ knob B turned to 4 - (max. fan




                                                                                                                                    CORRECT USE
   flow to feet;                                                                        speed).




                                                                                                                                     OF THE CAR
® to warm the feet and demist the wind-    WARMING THE PASSENGER                      Then use the controls to keep the re-
   screen at the same time;                COMPARTMENT                                quired comfort conditions and press but-
- for quick windscreen demisting.          Proceed as follows:                        ton D to ¶ to turn air recirculation off
                                                                                      (button led off) and to prevent misting up.




                                                                                                                                    LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                     MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                     WARNING
                                           ❒ turn knob A to the red sector;
Air recirculation on/off slider D                                                     IMPORTANT With cold engine, you have
                                           ❒ turn knob C to the required position;    to wait for a few minutes to let the sys-
Take the slider to position v to re-                                                  tem fluid reach the operating temperature.
circulate internal air.                    ❒ turn knob B to required speed.




                                                                                                                                    EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                      IN AN
Take the slider to position ¶ to switch
internal air recirculation off.




                                                                                                                                    SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                      TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                    INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                    51
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   FRONT WINDOW FAST                           Window demisting
                                DEMISTING/                                  In the event of considerable outside mois-
                                DEFROSTING (WINDSCREEN                      ture and/or rain and/or considerable dif-
                                AND SIDE WINDOWS)                           ferences in temperature inside and outside
                                Proceed as follows:                         the passenger compartment, perform the
                                                                            following preventive demisting procedure:
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                ❒ turn knob A to the red sector;
                                                                            ❒ turn knob A to the red sector;
                                ❒ switch internal air recirculation off;
                                                                            ❒ switch internal air recirculation off;
                                ❒ turn knob C to -;
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                                                             F0R0035m
                                                                            ❒ turn knob C to -. Change it to posi-       fig. 40
                                ❒ knob B turned to 4 - (max. fan              tion con ® if demisting is insufficient;
                                  speed).                                                                                HEATED REAR WINDOW
                                                                            ❒ turn knob B to 2nd speed.
                                After demisting/defrosting, operate the                                                  AND DOOR MIRROR
LIGHTS AND




                                                                                                                         DEMISTING/DEFROSTING
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                controls to restore the required comfort.
                                                                                                                         (where provided) fig. 40
                                                                                                                         Press button A to start this function;
                                                                                                                         when this function is on the button led is
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                                                         on.
     IN AN




                                                                                                                         This function is timed and it will turn off
                                                                                                                         automatically after 20 minutes. Press A
                                                                                                                         again to switch it off before.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                                         IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on
                      CAR




                                                                                                                         the inside of the rear window over the
                                                                                                                         heating filaments to avoid damage that
                                                                                                                         might cause it to stop working properly.
     TECHNICAL
               INDEX




                 52
                                                                                            MANUAL CLIMATE




                                                                                                                               AND CONTROLS
INTERNAL AIR                                    IMPORTANT The inside air recirculation




                                                                                                                                DASHBOARD
RECIRCULATION                                   system makes it possible to reach the re-
                                                quired “heating” or “cooling” conditions    CONTROL SYSTEM
Move slider D to position v to switch           faster.                                     (where provided)
internal air recirculation on.
                                                Do not use the air recirculation function
It is advisable to switch internal air recir-   on rainy/cold days as it would consider-




                                                                                                                               DEVICES
                                                                                                                               SAFETY
culation on while standing in queues or in                                                  CONTROLS fig. 41
                                                ably increase the possibility of the win-
tunnels to prevent the introduction of pol-     dows misting up.
luted air. Do not use the function for a                                                    Air temperature knob A
long time, particularly if there are many                                                   (mixing hot and cold air)




                                                                                                                               CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                OF THE CAR
occupants on board, to prevent the win-
dows from misting up.                                                                       Red section = hot air
                                                                                            Blue section = cold air




                                                                                                                               LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                MESSAGES
                                                                                            Fan activation /speed adjustment




                                                                                                                                WARNING
                                                                                            knob B
                                                                                            p 0 = fan off
                                                                                            1-2-3 = ventilation speed




                                                                                                                               EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                 IN AN
                                                                                            4 - = maximum fan speed




                                                                                                                               SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                 TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                               INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                               53
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                                                                                           Air recirculation on/off slider D
                                                                                                                        Take the slider to position v to recir-
                                                                                                                        culate internal air.
                                                                                                                        Take the slider to position ¶to switch
                                                                                                                        internal air recirculation off.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                                                                        Switching the climate control
                                                                                                                        system on and off
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                        Press knob E- fig. 41 (LED on knob will
                                                                                                                        light up) to switch the climate control sys-
                                                                                                                        tem on.
                                                                                                                        Press knob E again (LED on knob will go
LIGHTS AND




                                                                                                                        off) to switch the climate control system
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                                                        off.
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                                                                             F0R0036m
                                fig. 41

                                Air distribution knob C                     ® to warm the feet and at the same time
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                               demist the windscreen;
                                ¶
                      CAR




                                    to convey air to the central and side
                                    vents;                                  - for quick windscreen demisting.
                                ß to warm the feet and convey cooler
                                    air to the dashboard vents, in inter-
     TECHNICAL




                                    mediate temperature conditions;
                                © for heating when the outside temper-
                                    ature is very cold: for maximum air
                                    flow to feet;
               INDEX




                 54
                                                                                                                                AND CONTROLS
VENTILATION                                CLIMATE CONTROL (cooling)                 Cooling adjustment




                                                                                                                                 DASHBOARD
To ventilate the passenger’s compartment   For fast cooling of the passenger com-    ❒ turn knob A rightwards to increase the
properly proceed as follows:               partment, proceed as follows:               temperature;
❒ knob A turned to blue section;           ❒ knob A turned to blue section;          ❒ switch internal air recirculation off;
❒ switch internal air recirculation off;   ❒ switch internal air recirculation on;   ❒ turn knob B to increase fan speed.




                                                                                                                                DEVICES
                                                                                                                                SAFETY
❒ turn knob C to ¶;                        ❒ turn knob C to ¶;
❒ turn knob B to required speed.           ❒ switch the climate control system on




                                                                                                                                CORRECT USE
                                             by pressing knob E: the LED on the




                                                                                                                                 OF THE CAR
                                             knob will light up;
                                           ❒ turn knob B to 4 - (maximum speed
                                             of fan).




                                                                                                                                LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                 MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                 WARNING
                                                                                                                                EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                  IN AN
                                                                                                                                SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                  TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                55
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   WARMING THE PASSENGER                   FAST HEATING                                 FRONT WINDOW FAST
                                COMPARTMENT                             For fast heating of the passenger com-       DEMISTING/DEFROSTING
                                Proceed as follows:                     partment, proceed as follows:                (WINDSCREEN AND SIDE
                                                                                                                     WINDOWS)
                                ❒ turn knob A to the red sector;        ❒ turn knob A to the red sector;
                                                                                                                     Proceed as follows:
                                ❒ turn knob C to the required symbol;   ❒ switch internal air recirculation on;
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                                                                     ❒ turn knob A to the red sector;
                                ❒ turn knob B to required speed.        ❒ turn knob C to ©;
                                                                                                                     ❒ turn knob B to 4 - (maximum fan
                                                                        ❒ knob B turned to 4 - (max. fan               speed);
   CORRECT USE




                                                                          speed).
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                     ❒ turn knob C to -;
                                                                        Then adjust the controls to obtain the re-
                                                                        quired conditions of comfort and switch      ❒ switch internal air recirculation off.
                                                                        internal air recirculation off.
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                        IMPORTANT With cold engine, you have
                                                                        to wait for a few minutes to let the sys-
                                                                        tem fluid reach the operating temperature.
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




                 56
                                                                                                                                           AND CONTROLS
After demisting/defrosting, operate the        Window demisting




                                                                                                                                            DASHBOARD
controls to restore the required comfort.
                                               In the event of considerable outside mois-
IMPORTANT The climate control system           ture and/or rain and/or considerable dif-
is very useful for faster demisting because    ferences in temperature inside and outside
it dries the air. Adjust the controls as de-   the passenger compartment, perform the
scribed above and press knob E to switch       following preventive demisting procedure:




                                                                                                                                           DEVICES
                                                                                                                                           SAFETY
the climate control system on: the LED on
the knob will light up.                        ❒ turn knob A to the red sector;
                                               ❒ switch internal air recirculation off;




                                                                                                                                           CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                            OF THE CAR
                                                                                                                                F0R0035m
                                               ❒ turn knob C to - and change it back        fig. 42
                                                 to ® if demisting does not improve;
                                                                                            HEATED REAR WINDOW AND
                                               ❒ turn knob B to 2nd speed.
                                                                                            DOOR MIRROR DEMISTING/
                                               IMPORTANT The climate control system




                                                                                                                                           LIGHTS AND
                                                                                            DEFROSTING (where provided)




                                                                                                                                            MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                            WARNING
                                               is very useful to prevent window misting     fig. 42
                                               up in presence of high humidity since it
                                               dries the air.                               Press button A to start this function;
                                                                                            when this function is on the button led is




                                                                                                                                           EMERGENCY
                                                                                            on.




                                                                                                                                             IN AN
                                                                                            This function is timed and it will turn off
                                                                                            automatically after 20 minutes. Press A
                                                                                            again to switch it off before.




                                                                                                                                           SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                            IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on




                                                                                                                                                              CAR
                                                                                            the inside of the rear window over the
                                                                                            heating filaments to avoid damage that
                                                                                            might cause it to stop working properly.




                                                                                                                                             TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                           INDEX
                                                                                                                                           57
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   AIR RECIRCULATION                               IMPORTANT The inside air recirculation      LOOKING AFTER THE SYSTEM
                                                                                system makes it possible to reach the re-
                                Move slider D to position v to switch           quired “heating” or “cooling” conditions    Run the climate control system for at least
                                internal air recirculation on.                  faster.                                     10 minutes every month during the win-
                                                                                                                            ter. Have the system inspected at a Fiat
                                It is advisable to switch internal air recir-   Do not use the air recirculation function   Dealership before the summer.
                                culation on while standing in queues or in      on rainy/cold days as it would consider-
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                tunnels to prevent the introduction of pol-     ably increase the possibility of the win-
                                luted air. Do not use the function for a        dows misting inside.
                                long time, particularly if there are many
                                occupants on board, to prevent the win-                                                              The system uses R134a re-
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                                                                     frigerant fluid which does not
    OF THE CAR




                                dows from misting up.
                                                                                                                                     harm the environment in the
                                                                                                                                     event of accidental leakage.
                                                                                                                            Never use R12 fluid which is not com-
                                                                                                                            patible with the system components.
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING

   EMERGENCY
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




                 58
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE




                                                                                                                                      AND CONTROLS
                                              The automatically controlled parameters   All functions may be manually changed. In




                                                                                                                                       DASHBOARD
                                              and functions are:                        order words, you may select one or more
CONTROL SYSTEM                                                                          functions and change the parameters as
                                              ❒ air temperature at the vents;
(where provided)                                                                        required. Automatic control of the man-
                                              ❒ air distribution at the vents;          ually changed functions will be suspended:
                                                                                        the system will change override your set-
                                              ❒ fan speed (continuous air flow varia-




                                                                                                                                      DEVICES
                                                                                                                                      SAFETY
GENERAL                                                                                 tings only for safety related reasons (e.g.
                                                tion);                                  risk of misting up).
The automatic climate control system ad-
justs the temperature, the quantity and the   ❒ compressor fan on (for cooling/dehu-    Manual selections will always have higher
distribution of the air in the passenger        midifying the air);                     priority over automatic settings and will




                                                                                                                                      CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                       OF THE CAR
compartment. Temperature is controlled        ❒ air recirculation.                      be stored until the user switches the sys-
on the basis of an “equivalent tempera-                                                 tem back to automatic control by press-
ture” principle; in other words, the sys-                                               ing AUTO expect for the cases in which
tem continuously works to keep the com-                                                 the system will intervene for particular,




                                                                                                                                      LIGHTS AND
fort level inside the car constant and to                                               safety-related reasons.




                                                                                                                                       MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                       WARNING
compensate for possible variations of ex-
ternal conditions, including sun radiation                                              You can adjust one function automatical-
detected by a specific sensor.                                                          ly and have the automatic system control
                                                                                        all the others.




                                                                                                                                      EMERGENCY
                                                                                        The air temperature is always automati-




                                                                                                                                        IN AN
                                                                                        cally controlled according to the temper-
                                                                                        ature shown on the display (except for
                                                                                        when the system is off or in certain con-




                                                                                                                                      SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                        ditions when the compressor is not run-
                                                                                        ning).




                                                                                                                                        TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                      INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                      59
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   The following parameters and functions
                                can be set or changed manually:
                                ❒ air temperature;
                                ❒ fan speed (continuous variation);
                                ❒ air distribution setting to seven posi-
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                  tions;
                                ❒ compressor enabling;
   CORRECT USE




                                ❒ fast defrosting/demisting;
    OF THE CAR




                                ❒ air recirculation;
                                ❒ system off.
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING

   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                                                                                                                    F0R0148m
                                                                            fig. 43

                                                                            CONTROLS fig. 43                        F Compressor enabling button.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                      CAR




                                                                            A AUTO button: automatic control of     G Air recirculation button.
                                                                              all functions.
                                                                                                                    H Fan speed buttons.
                                                                            B Air distribution selection buttons.
                                                                                                                    I   Temperature adjustment knob.
     TECHNICAL




                                                                            C Display.
                                                                            D MAX DEF function button.
                                                                            E System off button.
               INDEX




                 60
                                                                                                                                                 AND CONTROLS
USING THE CLIMATE                              During completely automatic system op-         Air temperature adjustment




                                                                                                                                                  DASHBOARD
CONTROL SYSTEM                                 eration, you can vary the set temperature,     knob (I)
                                               the air distribution and the fan speed us-
The system can be started in different         ing the corresponding buttons or knobs         Turn the knob either clockwise or anti-
ways, but it is advisable to start by press-   at any time: the system will automatically     clockwise to increase or lower the re-
ing the AUTO button and then turning           change settings to adapt to the new re-        quested temperature in the passenger
the knobs to set the temperature required                                                     compartment. The set temperature is




                                                                                                                                                 DEVICES
                                                                                                                                                 SAFETY
                                               quest.
on the display.                                                                               shown on the display.
                                               During fully automatic operation (FULL
The system will start running automatically    AUTO), the word FULL will disappear            Turn the knob either all to the right or
in this way and the set comfortable tem-       if the air distribution, air speed, compres-   all to the left to the extreme HI or LO




                                                                                                                                                 CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                                  OF THE CAR
perature will be reached as quickly as pos-    sor and/or recirculation settings are          position to use the maximum heating or
sible. The system will adjust the temper-      changed. In this way, the functions will       maximum cooling functions:
ature, the quantity and the distribution of    switch from automatic to manual control
the air introduced into the passenger com-                                                    ❒ HI function (maximum heating):
                                               until AUTO is pressed again. With on or
partment and will manage the recircula-                                                       select by turning the temperature knob




                                                                                                                                                 LIGHTS AND
                                               more manually set functions, the intro-




                                                                                                                                                  MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                                  WARNING
tion function and the compressor.              duced air temperature is still managed au-     clockwise over the maximum value
Manual intervention is only required for       tomatically by the system, except for when     (32 °C).
the following functions during fully auto-     the compressor is off: in the case, the air    This function may be used to heat up the
matic operation.                               introduced into the passenger compart-         passenger compartment exploiting the




                                                                                                                                                 EMERGENCY
                                               ment cannot be cooler than the outside




                                                                                                                                                   IN AN
❒ T air recirculation, to keep the                                                            system potential to the maximum. In this
                                               air.                                           condition, the system stop controlling
  function always either on or off;
                                                                                              temperature automatically and sets air
❒ Z to speed up demisting/defrosting of                                                       mixing to maximum heating. The air speed




                                                                                                                                                 SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
  windscreen, rear window and exter-                                                          and distribution are fixed.




                                                                                                                                                                    CAR
  nal rearview mirrors;
                                                                                              Specifically, if the heating fluid is not suffi-
                                                                                              ciently warm, the fan will not start up at
                                                                                              the maximum speed immediately to limit
                                                                                              introducing excessively cool air into the




                                                                                                                                                   TECHNICAL
                                                                                              passenger compartment.
                                                                                              All manual settings will be allowed when
                                                                                              this function is on.




                                                                                                                                                 INDEX
                                                                                                                                                 61
                                                                                                                             ▲ Air flow distributed between wind-
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   To switch the function off, simply turn the   Air distribution buttons (B)
                                temperature knob anticlockwise and set                                                       ˙ screen and front side window de-
                                the required temperature.                     Press these buttons to manually set one          froster/demister and central and side
                                                                              of the seven air distribution settings:          dashboard vents. This distribution al-
                                ❒ LO function (maximum cooling):
                                                                              ▲ Air flow to the windscreen and front           lows to maintain good levels of com-
                                select by turning the temperature knob          side window vents to demist or de-             fort and the passenger compartment
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                anticlockwise under the minimum value           frost them.                                    adequately cool (summer).
                                (16 °C).                                                                                     ▲ Air flow distributed between wind-
                                                                              ˙ Air flow at central and side dashboard
                                This function may be used to cool down          vents to ventilate the chest and the         ˙ screen and front side window de-
                                                                                                                             ▼ froster/demister and central and side
   CORRECT USE




                                the passenger compartment exploiting the        face during the hot season.
    OF THE CAR




                                system potential to the maximum. In this                                                       dashboard vents. This distribution al-
                                condition, the system stop controlling        ▼ Air flow to the front and rear foot well       lows adequate air diffusion and main-
                                temperature automatically and sets air          vents. Thanks to the natural tenden-           tains a good level of comfort both in
                                mixing to maximum cooling. The air speed        cy of hot air to spread upwards, this          summer and winter.
                                                                                distribution pattern allows to warm
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                and distribution are fixed. All manual set-                                                  The set distribution is shown by the cor-
                                tings will be allowed when this function        the passenger compartment up as
                                                                                quickly as possible, providing an im-        responding LEDs on the selected buttons.
                                is on.
                                                                                mediate feeling of warmth.                   To restore automatic air distribution con-
                                To switch the function off, simply turn the
                                                                              ˙ Air flow distributed between foot well       trol after a manual adjustment, press but-
   EMERGENCY




                                temperature knob anticlockwise and set        ▼ vents (hotter air) and central and side      ton AUTO.
     IN AN




                                the required temperature.
                                                                                dashboard vents (cooler air). This dis-
                                                                                tribution is particularly useful in spring
                                                                                and autumn on a sunny day.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                              ▲ Air flow distributed between foot well
                      CAR




                                                                              ▼ vents and windscreen and front side
                                                                                window defrosting/demisting vents.
                                                                                This allows an adequate warming of
                                                                                the passenger compartment and pre-
     TECHNICAL




                                                                                vents the windows from misting up.
               INDEX




                 62
                                                                                                                                             AND CONTROLS
Fan speed adjusting buttons (H)                AUTO (A) (automatic operation)                  Air recirculation on/off button (G)




                                                                                                                                              DASHBOARD
Press button H to increase or to decrease      Press AUTO to make the system auto-             Air recirculation works according to the
the fan speed and therefore the amount         matically adjust the quantity and distribu-     following operating logics:
of air admitted into the passenger com-        tion of the air introduced into the pas-
partment, although keeping the required        senger compartment. All previous manu-          ❒ override on (inside air recirculation
temperature set.                               al settings will be cancelled.                    always on), indicated by the the LED




                                                                                                                                             DEVICES
                                                                                                                                             SAFETY
                                                                                                 on button G and symbol T on
The fan speed is shown by the lit bars on      The message FULL AUTO will appear                 the display;
the display:                                   on the front display in this condition.
                                                                                               ❒ override off (air recirculation always
❒ max fan speed = all bars lit;




                                                                                                                                             CORRECT USE
                                               By manually intervening on at least of the        off and introduction of external air),




                                                                                                                                              OF THE CAR
                                               functions automatically managed by the            indicated by the fact that the LED on
❒ min fan speed = one bar lit.                 system (air recirculation, fan speed or           the button is off ê on the display.
                                                                                                                       is
The fan can be cut off only if the climate     compressor on/off), the word FULL will
                                               disappear from the display indicating that      These operating conditions are obtained
control compressor has been switched                                                           by pressing G in sequence.




                                                                                                                                             LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                              MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                              WARNING
off pressing button F-fig. 40.                 the system is no longer automatically con-
                                               trolling all the functions (the temperature     IMPORTANT The inside air recircula-
IMPORTANT To restore automatic fan             will still be controlled automatically by the   tion system makes it possible to reach
speed control after a manual adjustment,       system).                                        the required heating or cooling condi-
press button AUTO.                                                                             tions faster.




                                                                                                                                             EMERGENCY
                                               IMPORTANT Should the system (after




                                                                                                                                               IN AN
IMPORTANT At high speeds, the dynamic          manual settings) be no longer able to           It is however inadvisable to use it on
effect may increase the flow of air into the   guarantee the required temperature set          rainy/cold days as it would considerably
passenger compartment which in this case       in the passenger compartment, the set           increase the possibility of the windows
will not directly correspond to the fan        temperature value will start flashing to in-    misting inside, especially if the climate




                                                                                                                                             SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
speed bar display.                             dicate this condition, after one minute the     control compressor is off.




                                                                                                                                                                CAR
                                               AUTO message will turn off.
                                                                                               Recirculation is forced off (i.e. air is
                                               To restore system automatic control at          introduced from the outside) when the
                                               any time, after one or more manual ad-          the outside temperature is cold to pre-




                                                                                                                                               TECHNICAL
                                               justments, press button AUTO.                   vent misting up.
                                                                                               It is advisable not to use the air recircu-
                                                                                               lation function when the outside tem-
                                                                                               perature is low to prevent the windows
                                                                                               from rapidly misting up.




                                                                                                                                             INDEX
                                                                                                                                             63
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   Climate control compressor                     IMPORTANT With the compressor off,             Fast window demisting/defrosting
                                enabling button (F)                            it is not possible to introduced air cooler    button (D)
                                                                               than ambient temperature into the pas-
                                Press √ to switch the climate control          senger compartment. Furthermore, in            Press this button: the climate control sys-
                                compressor off (if on). The icon on the        certain conditions, the windows could          tem will automatically switch on all the
                                display will go out.                           mist up rapidly because the air is not de-     functions required for fast windscreen and
                                                                                                                              front side window demisting/defrosting,
   DEVICES




                                Press the button when the LED is off to
   SAFETY




                                                                               humidified.The switching off of the climate
                                restore automatically system control           control compressor remains in storage          that is:
                                and use of the compressor. The icon            even when the engine has been stopped.         ❒ switches on climate control compres-
                                will light up on the display in this case.                                                      sor when climatic conditions are suit-
                                                                               To restore automatic compressor control,
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                The system will switch recirculation off       press √ again (in this case, the system will     able;
                                when the compressor is switched off to         only work as a heater) or press AUTO.          ❒ air recirculation off;
                                prevent misting up. Although the system
                                is capable of maintaining the required tem-    With climate control compressor off, the       ❒ maximum air temperature HI on both
                                                                               fan speed can be set to zero manually (no        areas;
LIGHTS AND




                                perature, the word FULL will disappear
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                from the display. If on the other hand the     bar shown).
                                system cannot maintain the required tem-                                                      ❒ operates proper fan speed according
                                                                               With the compressor enabled and the en-          to engine coolant temperature to lim-
                                perature, the digits will blink and the word   gine started, the fan speed may be reduced
                                AUTO will disappear.                                                                            it the flow into the passenger com-
                                                                               to the minimum setting (only one bar             partment of air not warm enough to
   EMERGENCY




                                                                               shown).
     IN AN




                                                                                                                                demist the windows;
                                                                                                                              ❒ directs air flow to windscreen and
                                                                                                                                front side windows vents;
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                                              ❒ heated rear window on.
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




                 64
                                                                                                                                      AND CONTROLS
IMPORTANT The quick demisting/de-             Switching the system off (E)                  Press AUTO to switch the automatic cli-




                                                                                                                                       DASHBOARD
frosting function will stay on for approxi-                                                 mate control system back on.
mately 3 minutes after the engine coolant     Press E to switch the climate control sys-
temperature is warm enough to ensure          tem off. The display will go out as a con-
rapid window demisting.                       sequence.

When the function is on, the LED on the       The following climate control conditions




                                                                                                                                      DEVICES
                                                                                                                                      SAFETY
rear window demister button will light up     will be established when the system is off:
and the message FULL AUTO will go             ❒ display off;
out on the display.
                                              ❒ temperature not shown;




                                                                                                                                      CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                       OF THE CAR
You may only adjust the fan speed and
switch the rear window demister off man-      ❒ air recirculation on, passenger com-
ually when this function is running.            partment isolated from the outside
                                                (recirculation LED on);
To restore running operations before this
                                              ❒ climate control compressor off;




                                                                                                                                      LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                       MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                       WARNING
function was activated, press either but-
ton B, air recirculation button G, com-       ❒ fan off.
pressor button F or button AUTO A.




                                                                                                                                      EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                        IN AN
                                                                                                                                      SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                        TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                      INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                      65
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   EXTERNAL LIGHTS
                                The left-hand stalk fig. 44/a operates
                                most of the external lights.
                                The external lights can only be switched
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                on when the ignition key is at MAR.
                                The instrument panel and the various
                                dashboard controls will come on with the
                                external lights.
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                 F0R0037m                                          F0R0238m
                                                                           fig. 44/a                                        fig. 44/b
                                LIGHTS OFF
                                                                           MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS                             AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT
                                Knurled ring turned to symbol O.                                                            SENSOR (day light sensor)
                                                                           When the knurled ring is at 2, pull the
LIGHTS AND




                                                                                                                            fig. 44/b (where provided)
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                           lever towards the steering wheel (2nd un-
                                SIDELIGHTS - TAILLIGHTS                    stable position).                                This sensor detects changes of external
                                Turn the knurled ring to 6.                The warning light 1 1on the instrument           lights according to the sensitivity of the
                                                                           cluster will come on at the same time.           setting: higher the sensitivity, lower the
                                The warning light 3 on the instrument
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                                                            amount of external light needed to switch
                                cluster will come on at the same time.
     IN AN




                                                                           To turn the main beams off, pull again the       the lights on. The sensitivity of the day light
                                                                           lever towards the steering wheel (dipped         sensor may be adjusted by means of the
                                DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS                     beams will turn on again).                       “Setup menu” on the instrument panel.
                                Turn the knurled ring to 2.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                           FLASHING THE HEADLIGHTS                          Activation
                                The warning light 3 on the instrument
                      CAR




                                cluster will come on at the same time.     Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel        Turn the knurled ring to 2. the side/tail-
                                                                                                                                                     A
                                                                           (1st unstable position) regardless of the po-    lights and dipped beam headlights are
                                                                           sition of the knurled ring. The warning          switched on automatically according to
     TECHNICAL




                                                                           light 1 on the instrument cluster will           the external light.
                                                                           come on at the same time.
                                                                                                                            The headlights can only be flashed with the
                                                                                                                            sensor on.
               INDEX




                 66
                                                                                                                                              AND CONTROLS
Deactivation                                                                                    Warning light 3 on the instrument pan-




                                                                                                                                               DASHBOARD
                                                                                                el will light up and the corresponding mes-
The main beam headlights will go out fol-                                                       sage will appear on the display (see
lowed after approximately 10 seconds by                                                         “Warning lights and messages”) as long as
the side/taillights when the sensor is de-                                                      the function is on. The warning light will
activated.                                                                                      go out when the lever is operate and stay




                                                                                                                                              DEVICES
                                                                                                                                              SAFETY
The sensor cannot detect the presence of                                                        on until the function is automatically de-
fog: switch the lights on manually in this                                                      activated. Time for which the lights stay
case.                                                                                           on can only be increased by operating the
                                                                                                lever.




                                                                                                                                              CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                               OF THE CAR
                                                                                     F0R0038m
DIRECTION INDICATORS fig. 45                    fig. 45
                                                                                                Deactivation
Push the stalk to (stable) position:            “FOLLOW ME HOME” DEVICE
                                                                                                Keep the stalk pulled towards the steer-
❒ up (position 1): right-hand indicator;        This function allows the illumination of the    ing wheel for more than 2 seconds.




                                                                                                                                              LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                               MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                               WARNING
❒ down (position 2): left-hand indicator;       space in front of the car for a preset pe-
                                                riod of time.
Warning light Î or ¥ will blink on the in-
strument panel.                                 Activation




                                                                                                                                              EMERGENCY
Indicators are switched off automatically       With the ignition key at STOP or re-




                                                                                                                                                IN AN
when the steering wheel is straightened.        moved, pull the left-hand stalk towards the
If you want the indicator to flash briefly to   steering wheel within 2 minutes from
show that you are about to change lane,         when the engine is turned off.




                                                                                                                                              SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
move the stalk up or down without click-        At each single movement of the stalk, the
ing into position (unstable position). When




                                                                                                                                                                 CAR
                                                lights will remain on for an extra 30 sec-
released the stalk will return to its home      onds up to a maximum of 210 seconds;
position.                                       then the lights are switched off automati-
                                                cally.




                                                                                                                                                TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                              INDEX
                                                                                                                                              67
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   WINDOW WASHING                                                                              IMPORTANT Replace wiper blades as
                                                                                                                            specified in section “Car maintenance”.
                                The right stalk fig. 46 controls windscreen
                                wiper/washer operation.

                                WINDSCREEN WASHER/                                                                                    Do not use the windscreen
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                WIPER                                                                                                 wiper to remove layers of
                                                                                                                                      snow or ice from the wind-
                                The device can only work when the igni-                                                               screen. In such conditions, the
                                tion key is at MAR.                                                                         windscreen wiper may be subjected to
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                 F0R0039m
                                                                                fig. 46                                     excessive stress and the motor protec-
                                The stalk ring nut can be moved to four
                                different positions:                                                                        tion which prevents operation for a few
                                                                                With the ring in position ≤ the wind-       seconds may trip. If operation is not re-
                                O      windscreen wiper off;                    screen wiper will automatically adapt to    stored, even after turning the key and
                                                                                the speed of the car.                       restarting the engine, go to a Fiat Deal-
LIGHTS AND




                                ≤ intermittent;
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                                                            ership.
                                ≥ continuous slow;
                                ¥ continuous fast.
   EMERGENCY




                                Move the lever to position A (unstable)
     IN AN




                                to limit operation for the time for which
                                the lever is held in this position. The lever
                                will return to position and the wiper will
                                be automatically stopped when released.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




                 68
                                                                                                                                           AND CONTROLS
“Smart washing” function                      RAIN SENSOR                                    Deactivation




                                                                                                                                            DASHBOARD
Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel     (where provided)                               Change the stalk knurled ring position
(unstable position) to operate the wind-      The rain sensor is located behind the dri-     from ≤ fig. 46 or turn the ignition key
screen washer.                                ving mirror in contact with the windscreen     to STOP.
Keeping the stalk pulled for more than half   and has the purpose of automatically ad-       At the next start-up (key at MAR), the
                                              just, during the intermittent operation, the




                                                                                                                                           DEVICES
                                                                                                                                           SAFETY
a second, with just one movement it is                                                       sensor will not be reactivated even if the
possible to operate the washer jet and the    frequency of the windscreen wiper              knurled ring is at ≤ fig. 46. To reacti-
wiper at the same time.                       strokes as to the rain intensity.              vate the sensor, move the ring from po-
                                              IMPORTANT Keep clean the glass in the          sition ≤ to any other position and then




                                                                                                                                           CORRECT USE
The wiper stops working three strokes af-




                                                                                                                                            OF THE CAR
                                              sensor area.                                   return it to position ≤.
ter releasing the stalk.
                                                                                             Rain sensor activation will be indicated by
A further stroke after 6 seconds com-         Activation                                     at least one wiper “stroke” even if the
pletes the wiping operation.                                                                 windscreen is dry.
                                              Move the right-hand stalk knurled ring to




                                                                                                                                           LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                            MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                            WARNING
                                              ≤ fig. 46.                                     The rain sensor is able to recognize and
                                              The activation of the rain sensor is sig-      automatically adjust itself in the presence
                                              nalled by a control acquisition “stroke”.      of the following particular conditions:
                                                                                             ❒ presence of dirt on the controlled sur-




                                                                                                                                           EMERGENCY
                                              Through the set up menu it is possible to




                                                                                                                                             IN AN
                                              increase the sensitivity of the rain sensor.     face (salt, dirt, etc.);
                                              The increase of the sensitivity of the rain    ❒ difference between day and night.
                                              sensor is signalled by a control and acqui-    IMPORTANT Streaks of water may cause




                                                                                                                                           SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                              sition “stroke”.                               unnecessary blade moving.




                                                                                                                                                              CAR
                                              Operating the windscreen washer with
                                              the rain sensor activated the normal wash-
                                              ing cycle is performed at the end of which
                                              the rain sensor resumes its normal auto-




                                                                                                                                             TECHNICAL
                                              matic function.




                                                                                                                                           INDEX
                                                                                                                                           69
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   CRUISE CONTROL                               SWITCHING THE DEVICE ON
                                (constant speed                              Turn knob A-fig. 47 to ON.
                                regulator)                                   The Cruise Control cannot be engaged
                                                                             in first or reverse gear. It is advisable to
                                (where provided)                             engage it in 4th or higher gears.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                It is a device able to support the driver,   Travelling downhill with the device en-
                                with electronic control, which allows dri-   gaged, the car speed may increase more
                                ving at speed over 30 km/h on long and       than the memorised one.
   CORRECT USE




                                straight dry roads (e.g.: motorways), at a
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                                                                F0R0041m
                                                                             When the device is activated the warn-         fig. 47
                                desired speed, without pressing the ac-      ing light Ü turns on together with the rel-
                                celerator pedal. Therefore it is not sug-    evant message on the instrument panel          STORING THE CAR SPEED
                                gested to use this device on extra-urban     (where provided).
                                roads with traffic. Do not use it in town.                                                  Proceed as follows:
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                                                            ❒ turn knob A-fig. 47 to ON and press
                                                                                                                              the accelerator pedal to the required
                                                                                                                              speed;
                                                                                                                            ❒ push the lever up (+) for at least one
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                                                                                              second and release it: the car speed will
                                                                                                                              be stored. The accelerator pedal may
                                                                                                                              be released.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                                            If needed (e.g. for overtaking), press the
                                                                                                                            accelerator pedal to accelerate: the car
                      CAR




                                                                                                                            will return to the previously set speed
                                                                                                                            when the pedal is released.
     TECHNICAL
               INDEX




                 70
                                                                                           ❒ by pressing the accelerator pedal; in this




                                                                                                                                          AND CONTROLS
RESTORING STORED SPEED                       REDUCING THE STORED SPEED




                                                                                                                                           DASHBOARD
                                                                                             case the system is not really switched
If the device has been disengaged for ex-    The stored speed can be increased in two        off but the request for acceleration
ample pressing the brake or clutch pedal,    ways:                                           takes priority over the system. The
the memorised speed can be reset as fol-
lows:                                        ❒ by switching the device off and then          cruise control is however active and it
                                               storing a new speed;                          will not be necessary to press button




                                                                                                                                          DEVICES
                                                                                                                                          SAFETY
❒ accelerate gradually until reaching a                                                      RES B-fig. 47 to resume previous con-
  speed approaching the one stored;          or                                              ditions after ending acceleration.
❒ engage the gear selected at the time       ❒ by moving the stalk downwards (–) un-       The device is automatically switched off in
                                               til reaching the new speed which will be    one of the following cases:




                                                                                                                                          CORRECT USE
  when the speed was originally stored;




                                                                                                                                           OF THE CAR
                                               stored automatically.
❒ press RES B-fig. 47.                                                                     ❒ if the ABS or ESP systems cut-in;
                                             Each operation of the stalk will corre-
                                             spond to a slight reduction in speed (about   ❒ with car speed below the preset limit;
INCREASING THE STORED                        1 km/h), while keeping the stalk down-        ❒ in the case of system failure.




                                                                                                                                          LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                           MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                           WARNING
SPEED                                        wards will correspond to a continuous
                                             speed reduction.
The stored speed can be increased in two
ways:
                                             SWITCHING THE DEVICE OFF                                       WARNING
❒ by pressing the accelerator and then




                                                                                                                                          EMERGENCY
                                             The device can be switch off in the fol-               When travelling with the de-




                                                                                                                                            IN AN
  storing the new speed reached;
                                             lowing ways:                                           vice on, never set the
or                                                                                         gearshift lever to neutral.
                                             ❒ by turning knob A to OFF;
❒ by moving the stalk upwards (+).




                                                                                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                             ❒ by turning the engine off;
Each operation of the stalk will corre-




                                                                                                                                                             CAR
spond to a slight increase in speed (about   ❒ by pressing the brake pedal;
1 km/h), while keeping the stalk upwards                                                                  WARNING
                                             ❒ by pressing the clutch pedal;
will correspond to a continuous speed in-                                                         In the event of device faults




                                                                                                                                            TECHNICAL
crease.                                                                                           or failures, turn knob A to
                                                                                           OFF and contact a Fiat Dealership.




                                                                                                                                          INDEX
                                                                                                                                          71
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   CEILING LIGHTS

                                FRONT CEILING WITH SPOT
                                LIGHTS fig.48 /a AND WITH
                                DIFFUSED LIGHTIING LED
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                (where provided) fig.48 /b
                                Switch A turn on/off these lights.
                                With switch A in central position, lights
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                 F0R0043m                                      F0R0042m
                                                                             fig. 48/a                                      fig. 49
                                C and D will turn on/off when opening/
                                closing the front doors.
                                                                                                                            FRONT CEILING LIGHT WITH
                                With switch A pressed on the left side,                                                     MOVABLE LENS
                                lights C and D will always stay off. With
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                switch A pressed on the right side, lights                                                  The light will turn on/off by pressing the
                                C and D will always stay on.                                                                movable lens rightwards or leftwards as
                                                                                                                            shown in fig. 49.
                                Light turning on/off is gradual.
   EMERGENCY




                                Switch B performs the spot function; with
     IN AN




                                light off, it will turn on:
                                ❒ light C if pressed on the left side;                                           F0R0240m
                                                                             fig. 48/b
                                ❒ light D if pressed on the right side.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                             IMPORTANT Before getting out of the
                      CAR




                                                                             car, make sure the switch is at central po-
                                                                             sition: lights off with doors closed in or-
                                                                             der to avoid draining the battery.
     TECHNICAL




                                                                             In any case, if the switch is left inadver-
                                                                             tently to the on position, the lights will
                                                                             turn off automatically 15 minutes after
                                                                             turning the engine off.
               INDEX




                 72
                                                                                                                                           AND CONTROLS
Ceiling light timing                        LIGHT TIMING WHEN GETTING INTO THE CAR       LIGHT TIMING WHEN GETTING OUT




                                                                                                                                            DASHBOARD
                                                                                         OF THE CAR
On certain versions to facilitate getting   Lights will turn on as follows:
in/out of the car at night or with poor                                                  After removing the key from the ignition
lighting, 2 different timed switching on    ❒ for about 10 seconds when opening          switch, the ceiling lights will turn on as fol-
modes have been provided.                     front doors;                               lows:
                                            ❒ for about 3 minutes when opening one




                                                                                                                                           DEVICES
                                                                                                                                           SAFETY
                                                                                         ❒ within 2 minutes from turning the en-
                                              of the side doors;                           gine off for about 10 seconds;
                                            ❒ for about 10 seconds when closing the      ❒ when opening one of the side doors for
                                              doors.




                                                                                                                                           CORRECT USE
                                                                                           about 3 minutes;




                                                                                                                                            OF THE CAR
                                            Timing will stop when turning the ignition   ❒ when closing one of the doors for
                                            key to MAR.                                    about 10 seconds.
                                                                                         Timing will stop automatically when lock-




                                                                                                                                           LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                            MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                            WARNING
                                                                                         ing the doors.




                                                                                                                                           EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                             IN AN
                                                                                                                                           SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                             TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                           INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                           73
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                                                                                                                                   A




                                                                                                                                                                    B
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                                                                                   B
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                     F0R0044m                                     F0R0045m                                       F0R0216m
                                fig. 51                                         fig. 52                                      fig. 53

                                BOOT LIGHT (where provided)                     PUDDLE LIGHTS                                COURTESY LIGHTS
                                fig. 51                                         (where provided) fig. 52                     (where provided) fig. 53
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                For versions fitted with boot light, it will    These lights A are located in the doors      Lights B by the side of the courtesy mir-
                                turn on automatically when opening the          and they will turn on when opening the       ror will light up when cover A on the sun
                                tailgate and it will turn off at closing.       relevant door, regardless of the ignition    visor on driver’s or passenger’s side is
                                                                                key position.                                raised with the key at MAR. The lights al-
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                                                             lows to use the courtesy mirror also in
     IN AN




                                                                                                                             poor conditions of light.
                                                                                                                             IMPORTANT The lights may only be op-
                                                                                                                             erated for 15 minutes when the key is
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                                             turned to stop STOP. They will be au-
                                                                                                                             tomatically switched off after this to pro-
                      CAR




                                                                                                                             tect the battery charge.
     TECHNICAL
               INDEX




                 74
                                             CONTROLS




                                                                                                                                              AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                               DASHBOARD
                                             HAZARD LIGHTS fig. 55
                                             They turn on by pressing switch A, re-
                                             gardless of the position of the ignition key.




                                                                                                                                              DEVICES
                                                                                                                                              SAFETY
                                             When the device is on, the switch is flash-
                                             ing and warning lights Î e ¥ on the pan-
                                             el come blink.




                                                                                                                                              CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                               OF THE CAR
                                  F0R0305m                                                                                         F0R0047m
fig. 54                                                                                      fig. 55
                                             Press the switch again to turn the lights
                                             off.
ODDMENTS COMPARTMENT
COURTESY LIGHT                               The use of hazard lights is governed by the
                                             Highway Code of the country you are in.




                                                                                                                                              LIGHTS AND
(where provided) fig. 54




                                                                                                                                               MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                               WARNING
                                             Keep to the rules.
On versions where it is fitted, the light
comes on automatically when the com-
partment is opened and goes out when it




                                                                                                                                              EMERGENCY
is closed.




                                                                                                                                                IN AN
                                                                                                                                   F0R0048m
                                                                                             fig. 56




                                                                                                                                              SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                             FRONT FOG LIGHTS




                                                                                                                                                                 CAR
                                                                                             (where provided) fig. 56
                                                                                             To turn front fog lights on, press button
                                                                                             5, to activate these lights it is necessary




                                                                                                                                                TECHNICAL
                                                                                             to have the side/taillights switched on.
                                                                                             The warning light 5 on the instrument
                                                                                             cluster will come on at the same time.
                                                                                             Press the button again to turn the lights off.




                                                                                                                                              INDEX
                                                                                             The use of fog lights is governed by the
                                                                                             Highway Code of the country you are in.
                                                                                             Keep to the rules.
                                                                                                                                              75
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
   DEVICES
   SAFETY
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                    F0R0049m                                         F0R0035m                                       F0R0023m
                                fig. 57                                        fig. 58                                          fig. 59

                                REAR FOG LIGHTS fig. 57                        PARKING LIGHTS                                   DOOR LOCK fig. 59
                                Press button 4 to turn these lights on         These lights can only be turned on with ig-      To open: pull lever A.
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                providing the dipped beam headlights or        nition key at STOP or removed, by mov-
                                                                               ing the left stalk knurled ring first to O and   To close: close the door and press lever
                                the front fog lights (where provided) are                                                       A. Also the rear doors will be locked in
                                switched on.                                   then to position 6 or 2.
                                                                                                                                this way (centralised door locking system).
                                The warning light 4 on the instrument          The warning light 3 on the instrument
                                                                                                                                Warning light ´ will light up with the cor-
   EMERGENCY




                                panel will light up.                           panel will come on at the same time.
     IN AN




                                                                                                                                responding message on the multifunctional
                                Either press the button again or switch the                                                     display (see chapter “Warning lights and
                                dipped beam headlights and/or fog lights                                                        Messages”).
                                (where provided) off.                          HEATED REAR WINDOW
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                The use of fog lights is governed by the       (where provided) fig. 58
                      CAR




                                Highway Code of the country you are in.        Press button A to switch the device on.
                                Keep to the rules.                             The device will be switched off automati-
                                                                               cally after approximately 20 minutes.
     TECHNICAL
               INDEX




                 76
FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH




                                                                                                                                            AND CONTROLS
                                               The message “FPS on” will appear on the      Door unlocking in the event




                                                                                                                                             DASHBOARD
                                               digital display when the switch trips. The   of a crash
The car is fitted with a safety switch that    message “Inertia switch tripped. See hand-
                                               book” will appear on the multifunctional     If the fuel cut-off switch trips following an
in the event of a crash comes into opera-                                                   accident, the doors will be automatically
tion by cutting off fuel and turning off the   display.
                                                                                            unlocked to let you leave the car and the
engine as a consequence.                                                                    ceiling lights will be switched on at the




                                                                                                                                            DEVICES
                                                                                                                                            SAFETY
This device therefore prevents fuel leaks                                                   same time. The doors can always be
due to fuel piping breaking.                                                                opened from the inside of the car by
                                                                 WARNING                    means of the specific levers.
IMPORTANT After the accident, re-                       If, after a crash, you smell fu-




                                                                                                                                            CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                             OF THE CAR
member to remove the electronic key                     el or see leaks from the fuel       Proceed as follows if no fuel leakage is
from the ignition device to prevent drain-     system, do not reset the switch to           found and and the car is in condition to be
ing the battery.                               avoid fine risk.                             driven to rearm the fuel cut-off switch.




                                                                                                                                            LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                             MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                             WARNING
                                                                                                              WARNING
                                                                                                      If the centralised door lock-
                                                                                                      ing system was operated




                                                                                                                                            EMERGENCY
                                                                                            from inside the car and the fuel cut-




                                                                                                                                              IN AN
                                                                                            off switch did not manage to auto-
                                                                                            matically release the doors, it will not
                                                                                            be possible to access the passenger




                                                                                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                            compartment from the outside after
                                                                                            an accident. The possibility of open-




                                                                                                                                                               CAR
                                                                                            ing the doors from the outside de-
                                                                                            pends on the conditions of the doors
                                                                                            themselves after the accident: if may
                                                                                            not be possible to open a damaged




                                                                                                                                              TECHNICAL
                                                                                            door. In this case, try to open the oth-
                                                                                            er doors of the car.




                                                                                                                                            INDEX
                                                                                                                                            77
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                                                   INTERIOR FITTINGS

                                                                                ODDMENT DRAWER fig. 61-62
                                                                                To open the drawer operate handle A-
                                                                                fig. 61.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                                The compartment opening movement is
                                                                                slowed down by a dedicated device.
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                Inside the drawer there is a space A-fig.
    OF THE CAR




                                                                     F0R0208m                                                          F0R0104m
                                fig. 60                                                                                      fig. 61
                                                                                62 to keep documents.
                                Re-arming the fuel cut-off switch               When the oddment compartment is
                                                                                opened, an interior courtesy light comes
                                                                                on.
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                  WARNING
                                                                                ODDMENT COMPARTMENTS
                                          Before resetting the fuel cut-
                                          off switch carefully inspect          Oddment compartment A-fig. 63, is lo-
   EMERGENCY




                                 the car for fuel leaks.                        cated on the dashboard, on the left of the
     IN AN




                                                                                steering wheel.
                                                                                                                                       F0R0077m
                                                                                                                             fig. 62
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                To reset the fuel cut-off switch, press but-
                                ton A-fig. 60.
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




                                                                                                                                       F0R0078m
                                                                                                                             fig. 63


                 78
                                                                                                                                  AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                   DASHBOARD
                                                                                                                                  DEVICES
                                                                                                                                  SAFETY
                                                                                                                                  CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                   OF THE CAR
                                 F0R0053m                                  F0R0055m                                    F0R0057m
fig. 64                                     fig. 66                                   fig. 68

                                                                                      FRONT ARMREST WITH
                                                                                      ODDMENT COMPARTMENT




                                                                                                                                  LIGHTS AND
                                                                                      (where provided)




                                                                                                                                   MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                   WARNING
                                                                                      Certain versions are fitted with armrest
                                                                                      A-fig. 67 between the front seats.
                                                                                      To use it, push it down as shown in




                                                                                                                                  EMERGENCY
                                                                                      fig. 68.




                                                                                                                                    IN AN
                                                                                      Press button A-fig. 68 to raise the up-
fig. 65                          F0R0054m
                                            fig. 67                        F0R0056m
                                                                                      per part of the arm rest and access com-
                                                                                      partment B. Operate lever C to move the




                                                                                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
Oddment compartment B-fig. 64 is lo-        DOOR POCKETS fig. 66                      armrest down with respect to the posi-




                                                                                                                                                     CAR
cated in the middle of the dashboard.                                                 tion of normal use.
                                            Paper/map pockets are located in door
                                            panels.
CENTRAL CONSOLE ODDMENT




                                                                                                                                    TECHNICAL
COMPARTMENT
The compartiment A-fig. 65 is located on
the dashboard central zone.




                                                                                                                                  INDEX
                                                                                                                                  79
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
   DEVICES
   SAFETY
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                   F0R0058m                                    F0R0060m                                         F0R0061m
                                fig. 69                                       fig. 71                                     fig. 72

                                                                              CARD BOX - CD BOX fig. 71                   CIGAR LIGHTER
                                                                              The central console features recesses to    (where provided) fig. 72
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                              keep telephone cards CD holders and         It is located on the central console in front
                                                                              magnetic cards.                             of the handbrake.
                                                                                                                          Press button A to switch on the cigar
                                                                                                                          lighter with ignition key at MAR.
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                                                                                          After about 15 seconds the button will re-
                                                                                                                          turn to its initial position and is ready for
                                fig. 70                            F0R0059m                                               use.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                                          IMPORTANT Always check that the cig-
                                GLASS HOLDER - CAN HOLDER                                                                 ar lighter has turned off.
                      CAR




                                fig. 69-70
                                There are cup holders on the central tun-
                                nel (two cup holders in front of the gear-
     TECHNICAL




                                box and one behind it).                                                                                      WARNING
                                                                                                                                    The cigar lighter becomes
                                                                                                                                    very hot. Handle with care.
                                                                                                                           The device must not be used by chil-
                                                                                                                           dren: risk of fire and/or burns.
               INDEX




                 80
                                                                                                                                          AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                           DASHBOARD
                                                                                                                                          DEVICES
                                                                                                                                          SAFETY
                                                                                                                                          CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                           OF THE CAR
                                     F0R0062m                                      F0R0064m                                    F0R0065m
fig. 73                                         fig. 75                                       fig. 76

                                                SUN VISORS fig. 75                            MAP POCKET (where provided)
                                                These are arranged at the sides of the in-    On certain versions a map pocket is lo-




                                                                                                                                          LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                           MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                           WARNING
                                                ternal rearview mirror. They may be ori-      cated on the back of the seat backrest
                                                ented frontally and to the side.              fig. 76.
                                                A courtesy mirror can be applied to the
                                                back of sun visors.




                                                                                                                                          EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                            IN AN
                                                On certain versions to use the mirror
                                                (where provided) you shall open the slid-
fig. 74                              F0R0063m   ing cover A.




                                                                                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                A courtesy light may light up according
ASHTRAY (where provided)                        to the versions when the cover is opened.




                                                                                                                                                             CAR
fig. 73-74
The ashtray is a removable plastic box that
can be fitted into the glass/can recesses on




                                                                                                                                            TECHNICAL
the central console.
IMPORTANT Do not use the box as an
ashtray and a waste paper basket at the
same time: it might set on fire in contact




                                                                                                                                          INDEX
with cigarette stubs.



                                                                                                                                          81
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   DOORS

                                CENTRAL DOOR
                                LOCKING/UNLOCKING SYSTEM
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                Locking from the outside
                                With the doors closed, press button Á on
                                the remote control fig. 77 or insert and
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                turn the metallic insert in the driver’s side   fig. 77                               F0R0066m
                                                                                                                                 fig. 79                              F0R0000m

                                door lock and turn clockwise fig. 78 (an-
                                ticlockwise on the passenger door ). The                                                         Door locking/unlocking from the
                                LED on the driver’s door will blink once
                                to indicate that the doors have been                                                             inside
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                locked. The doors will be locked only if all                                                     Press lever A-fig. 79 to unlock all doors.
                                doors are closed. If one or more doors                                                           Pull the lever to unlock all doors. A LED
                                are open, the indication indicators and the                                                      on the driver’s door will indicate the state
                                LED on the driver’s door will flash in rapid                                                     (doors locked or unlocked). The LED is
                                sequence for approximately 3 seconds if                                                          on when the doors are locked and off
   EMERGENCY




                                one or more doors are open when but-
     IN AN




                                                                                                                                 when the doors are unlocked. The doors
                                ton Á on the remote control is pressed                                                           will be locked only if all doors are closed.
                                fig. 77.                                        fig. 78                               F0R0067m
                                                                                                                                 Lacking power (blown fuse, battery dis-
                                If instead one or more doors are opened
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                                                 connected, etc.) it is however possible to
                                after turning the metallic insert of the key,   Door unlocking from the outside                  lock the doors manually.
                      CAR




                                only the LED on the driver’s door will
                                blink rapidly for approximately three sec-      Briefly press button Ë fig. 77 to obtain         After exceeding 20 km/h speed, doors will
                                onds. If all the doors are closed and the       remote door unlocking, timed ceiling light       be locked automatically if the set up menu
                                boot is open, the doors are locked and:         turning on, directions indicator double          function has been selected (see paragraph
     TECHNICAL




                                the direction indicators (if locked by press-   flashing or fit the metal insert into the dri-   “Multifunction display” in this section).
                                ing Á fig. 77 only) and the LED on the          ver’s door lock and turn it anticlockwise.
                                driver’s door will flash rapidly for ap-
                                proximately 3 seconds.
               INDEX




                 82
                                             WINDOW WINDERS




                                                                                                                                    AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                     DASHBOARD
                                             POWER WINDOWS
                                             The driver’s door armrest features two
                                             fig. 82 or (where provided) five fig. 81




                                                                                                                                    DEVICES
                                                                                                                                    SAFETY
                                             switches that with key at MAR shall be
                                             used:
                                             A to open/close the left front window;




                                                                                                                                    CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                     OF THE CAR
                                  F0R0068m                                                                               F0R0200m
fig. 80                                                                                 fig. 81
                                             B to open/close the right front window;
CHILD LOCK fig. 80                           C to open/close the left rear window
                                               (where provided);
This device prevents opening the rear




                                                                                                                                    LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                     MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                     WARNING
doors from the inside. This device can be    D to open/close the right rear window
engaged only with rear doors open.             (where provided);
❒ position 1 - device engaged (door          E to inhibit rear door controls (where
   locked);                                    provided).




                                                                                                                                    EMERGENCY
❒ position 2 - device not engaged (door




                                                                                                                                      IN AN
   may be opened from the inside).
The device A-fig. 80 stays on even if the                                                                                F0R0201m
                                                                                        fig. 82
doors are unlocked by the centralised




                                                                                                                                    SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
system.
                                                                                        Automatic continuous operation




                                                                                                                                                       CAR
                                                                                        (where provided)
                                                                                        Power windows are equipped with an
                  WARNING                                                               up/down mechanism for the front driver




                                                                                                                                      TECHNICAL
          Always use this device when                                                   side window and of a mechanism just for
          transporting children. After                                                  the down movement of the other win-
 engaging the child lock on both rear                                                   dows.
 doors, check for proper engagement
 by trying to open a rear door with the




                                                                                                                                    INDEX
 internal handle.


                                                                                                                                    83
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   Hold one of the buttons pressed for        IMPORTANT With ignition key at STOP                        WARNING
                                longer than half a second to operate the   or removed, the power windows remain
                                automatic continuous window operation      activated for about 2 minutes and are de-           The system conforms to
                                function. The window will stop when its    activated immediately the moment a door             the forthcoming standard
                                reached end of travel or when the but-     is opened.                                  2000/4/EC concerning the safety of
                                ton is pressed again.                                                                  passengers leaning out of the pas-
                                                                                                                       senger compartment.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                       Important On some versions, pressing the
                                                                                                                       remote control button Ë for over 2 sec-
                                                                                                                       onds will open the windows whereas
                                                                                                                       pressing the remote control button Á for
                                                                                                                       over 2 seconds will close them.
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING

   EMERGENCY
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




                 84
                                                                                                                                         AND CONTROLS
                                                                WARNING




                                                                                                                                          DASHBOARD
                                                        Incorrect use of the power
                                                        windows may be dangerous.
                                               Before operation, always check that
                                               no-one is exposed to the risk of being
                                               injured by directly by the moving win-




                                                                                                                                         DEVICES
                                                                                                                                         SAFETY
                                               dow or objects getting caught and
                                               dragged. When leaving the car, al-
                                               ways remove the key from the igni-




                                                                                                                                         CORRECT USE
                                               tion device to avoid the risk of injury




                                                                                                                                          OF THE CAR
                                    F0R0069m                                                                                  F0R0070m
fig. 83                                                                                      fig. 85
                                               due to accidental operation of the
                                               power windows.
                                                                                             MANUAL REAR
                                                                                             (where provided) fig. 85




                                                                                                                                         LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                          MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                          WARNING
                                                                                             To open and to close the window use the
                                               Power window system initialisation            relevant window winder.
                                               Safety system shall be re-initialised after
                                               disconnecting the battery or if the rele-




                                                                                                                                         EMERGENCY
                                               vant protection fuse is blown.




                                                                                                                                           IN AN
                                               Initialisation procedure:
                                    F0R0000m
fig. 84
                                               ❒ fully close manually the window to ini-




                                                                                                                                         SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                 tialise;
Front and rear passenger door




                                                                                                                                                            CAR
windows (where provided)                       ❒ rafter the window has reached the up-
                                                 per end of travel, hold the up button
Front passenger door armrest and rear            pressed for at least one second.
door armrests feature the switches A-




                                                                                                                                           TECHNICAL
fig. 83 to be used for controlling the cor-
responding window.
Press button A-fig. 84 to inhibit rear door
controls (where provided).




                                                                                                                                         INDEX
                                                                                                                                         85
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   BOOT


                                         Do not fit additional objects
                                         onto the rear window shelf or
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                         tailgate (speakers, spoilers,
                                         etc.) except when contem-
                                plated by the manufacturer to ensure
                                the correct operation of the side gas
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                               F0R0071m                                        F0R0072m
                                                                          fig. 86                                         fig. 88
                                shock absorbers of the tailgate itself.
LIGHTS AND




                                                                                                                                    B
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                WARNING
                                        Never exceed the maximum
                                        allowed load in the boot (see
                                “Technical Specifications”). Make
   EMERGENCY




                                sure that the objects are well
     IN AN




                                arranged in the boot so that they will
                                not be projected forwards following
                                sudden braking.                           fig. 87                              F0R0210m
                                                                                                                          fig. 89                              F0R0239m
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                                          BOOT CLOSING
                      CAR




                                                                          OPENING THE BOOT
                                                                          The boot lock may be released from the          To close the boot, lower it onto the lock
                                                WARNING                                                                   until you hear it click. In emergency con-
                                                                          outside of the car by pressing R on the
                                         Never travel with objects on     remote control (where provided) or by           ditions (if either the remote control or car
     TECHNICAL




                                         the rear window shelf: they      inserting and turning the metallic insert of    battery is flat), release the boot lock by
                                cause cause injury to passengers in       the key in the boot lock anticlockwise as       turn the key in clockwise.
                                the event of an accident or sudden        shown in fig. 88. The boot lock can be re-
                                braking.                                  leased from inside the vehicle operating
                                                                          on lever A-fig.87 located on driver side
               INDEX




                                                                          seat or pressing push-button B-fig.89.


                 86
                                                                                                                                    AND CONTROLS
EXTENDING THE BOOT                                                                       The boot extension to the right makes it




                                                                                                                                     DASHBOARD
                                                                                         possible to carry two passengers on the
Partial extension (where provided)                                                       rear seat left-hand side.
(1/3 or 2/3) fig. 91                                                                     The boot extension to the left makes it
The boot can be partially (1/3 or 2/3) or                                                possible to carry one passenger on the
                                                                                         rear seat right-hand side.




                                                                                                                                    DEVICES
                                                                                                                                    SAFETY
totally extended splitting the rear seat.
Proceed as follows:
❒ tip the cushions forward;




                                                                                                                                    CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                     OF THE CAR
                                                                              F0R0075m
                                            fig. 90




                                                                                                                                    LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                     MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                     WARNING
                                                                                                                                    EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                      IN AN
                                                                              F0R0076m
                                            fig. 91




                                                                                                                                    SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                            ❒ pull the two locking devices A-fig. 90




                                                                                                                                                       CAR
                                              upwards to unlock respectively the left
                                              or right section of the backrest and
                                              then guide the backrest onto the cush-




                                                                                                                                      TECHNICAL
                                              ion.




                                                                                                                                    INDEX
                                                                                                                                    87
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                                                                                                 BONNET

                                                                                                                              OPENING THE BONNET
                                                                                                                              Proceed as follows:
   DEVICES




                                                                                                                              ❒ pull lever fig. 94 in the direction of the
   SAFETY




                                                                                                                                arrow;
                                                                                                                              ❒ operate lever A-fig. 95 as shown in the
                                                                                                                                figure;
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                   F0R0077m                                        F0R0078m
                                fig. 92                                       fig. 93
                                                                                                                              ❒ lift the bonnet and at the same time re-
                                Maximum extension fig. 92                     To return the rear seat back to its               lease the rod D-fig. 96 from the catch,
                                                                              original position fig. 93                         then fit end C-fig. 97 of the rod into
                                Tilt the rear seat completely to obtain                                                         the bonnet recess E.
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                maximum boot extension.                       Lift the backrests and push them back un-
                                Proceed as follows:                           til your hear both fastening mechanisms
                                                                              click and return the cushions to the nor-
                                ❒ completely lower the rear seat head re-     mal position of use.
                                  straints;
   EMERGENCY




                                                                              IMPORTANT When return the backrest
     IN AN




                                ❒ tip the cushions forward;                   to the position of use, make sure it is cor-
                                                                              rectly fastened and you hear the lock click.
                                ❒ pull the fastening devices A-fig. 90 up-
                                  wards to release the backrests and fold
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                  them onto the cushion.
                      CAR




                                                                                               WARNING
                                                                                         Make sure the backrest is
                                                                                         properly secured at both
     TECHNICAL




                                                                               sides to prevent it moves forward in
                                                                               the event of sharp braking causing in-
                                                                               juries to passengers.
               INDEX




                 88
                                                                                                                                           AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                            DASHBOARD
                                                                                                                                           DEVICES
                                                                                                                                           SAFETY
                                                                                                                                           CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                            OF THE CAR
                                 F0R0080m                                        F0R0079m                                       F0R0081m
fig. 94                                     fig. 95                                         fig. 96

IMPORTANT Before opening the bonnet,        CLOSING THE BONNET
check that windscreen wiper arms are not
lifted from the windscreen.                 Proceed as follows:




                                                                                                                                           LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                            MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                            WARNING
                                            ❒ hold the bonnet up with one hand and
                                              with the other remove rod C-fig. 97
                                              from seat E and fit it back into its catch
                                              D-fig. 96;




                                                                                                                                           EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                             IN AN
                                                                                                                                F0R0082m
                                                                                            fig. 97




                                                                                                                                           SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                            ❒ lower the bonnet to approximately 20




                                                                                                                                                              CAR
                                                                                              centimetres from the engine compart-
                                                                                              ment and let it drop. Make sure that the
                                                                                              bonnet is completely closed and not
                                                                                              only fastened by the safety catch by try-




                                                                                                                                             TECHNICAL
                                                                                              ing to open it. If it is not perfectly
                                                                                              closed, open the bonnet and repeat the
                                                                                              procedure. No not simply press it.
                                                                                            IMPORTANT Always check that the bon-




                                                                                                                                           INDEX
                                                                                            net is closed properly to avoid its opening
                                                                                            while the car is travelling.

                                                                                                                                           89
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                    WARNING                   ROOF RACK/SKI RACK
                                          The bonnet must always be
                                          perfectly closed while trav-     Front couplings are set at points A-fig. 98.
                                elling for reasons of safety. Make sure    Front couplings are set at points B.
                                that the bonnet is perfectly closed
                                and that the lock is engaged. If you
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                discover that the bonnet is not per-
                                fectly closed while travelling, stop im-                    WARNING
                                mediately and close the bonnet in the
                                                                                    Check that the attachment
   CORRECT USE




                                correct manner.
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                                                               F0R0217m
                                                                                    fastening screws are correct-         fig. 98
                                                                           ly positioned after a few kilometres.
                                                                                                                          IMPORTANT Follow the instructions
                                                                                                                          contained in the assembly kit to the letter.
                                                 WARNING                                                                  Assembly must be performed by qualified
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                         The bonnet may drop sud-                                                         personnel.
                                         denly if the supporting rod is              Respect the laws in force con-
                                not in correct position.                             cerning maximum clearance.
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                                                                           WARNING
     IN AN




                                                                                                                                    Distribute the load evenly
                                                                                                                                    and when driving, bear in
                                               WARNING                                                                     mind the increased sensitivity of the
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                         Perform these operations                                                          car to side wind.
                                         when the car is stationary
                      CAR




                                only.

                                                                                                                                    Never exceed the permitted
     TECHNICAL




                                                                                                                                    weight (see section “Techni-
                                                                                                                                    cal specifications”).
               INDEX




                 90
HEADLIGHTS




                                                                                                                                            AND CONTROLS
                                                                                            Aiming the headlights fig. 99




                                                                                                                                             DASHBOARD
                                                                                            Press Ò and  on the control panel.
BEAM DIRECTION                                                                              The display located on the instrument pan-
Correction direction of the headlights is                                                   el, provides the visual indication of the po-
essentially for the comfort and safety of                                                   sitions during the adjustment operation.




                                                                                                                                            DEVICES
                                                                                                                                            SAFETY
the driver and the other road users. The                                                    Position 0 - one or two passengers on
headlights must be correctly directed to                                                    front seats.
ensure the best visibility conditions when
the headlights are on. Contact Fiat Deal-                                                   Position 1 - five passengers.




                                                                                                                                            CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                             OF THE CAR
                                                                                 F0R0083m
                                             fig. 99
ership to have the headlights properly ad-                                                  Position 2 - five passengers + load in the
justed.                                                                                     boot.
                                             HEADLIGHT AIMING DEVICE
                                             This device works with the key at MAR          Position 3 - driver + maximum admitted
                                                                                            load in the boot.




                                                                                                                                            LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                             MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                             WARNING
                                             and the dipped beam headlights on. The
                                             car will slant backwards when it is loaded,    IMPORTANT Check beam aiming every
                                             raising the light beam. The beams must         time the load carried changes.
                                             therefore be directed again in this case.




                                                                                                                                            EMERGENCY
                                                                                            AIMING THE FRONT FOG




                                                                                                                                              IN AN
                                                                                            LIGHTS (where provided)
                                                                                            Contact Fiat Dealership to have the head-
                                                                                            lights properly adjusted.




                                                                                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                              TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                            INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                            91
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   ABS SYSTEM                                                      WARNING                      FAILURE INDICATIONS
                                                                                        The ABS exploits the tyre-
                                If you have never driven a car with ABS be-             road grip at the best, but it        ABS failure
                                fore, it is advisable to perform a few tests   cannot improve it; you should there-
                                on slippery ground, naturally in conditions                                                  ABS failure is indicated by the turning on
                                of safety and respecting the Highway Code
                                                                               fore take every care when driving on          of warning light > on the instrument pan-
                                                                               slippery surfaces without taking un-
   DEVICES




                                                                                                                             el together with the dedicated message on
   SAFETY




                                of the country where you are driving. Read     necessary risks.
                                the following information carefully.                                                         the multifunctional display (where pro-
                                                                                                                             vided), (see section “Warning lights and
                                The car is fitted with an ABS braking sys-                                                   messages”).
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                tem, which prevents the wheels from lock-
                                ing when braking, makes the most of road                                                     In the case, the braking system will work
                                                                               ABS SYSTEM INTERVENTION                       as normal without the extra potentials of-
                                grip and gives the best control when emer-
                                gency braking under difficulty road condi-     Intervention of the ABS is detected by a      fered by the ABS system. Drive carefully
                                tions.                                         slight pulsing of the brake pedal accompa-    to the nearest Fiat Dealership to have the
                                                                                                                             system checked.
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                               nied by noise: such an event indicates that
                                System is completed by EBD (Electronic         you need to adjust your speed to the type
                                Braking force Distribution), which dis-        of road on which you are travelling.
                                tributes the braking action between front
                                and rear wheels.
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                IMPORTANT Maximum efficiency of the
                                braking system is obtained after approxi-                      WARNING
                                mately 500 km (when the car is new or af-               When the ABS intervenes it
                                ter replacing the brake pads/discs): during             means that you are ap-
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                this time, avoid sudden, repeated and pro-     proaching the grip limit between tyres
                      CAR




                                longed braking.                                and road: slow down to exploit all the
                                                                               available grip.
     TECHNICAL
               INDEX




                 92
                                                                                            ESP SYSTEM




                                                                                                                                            AND CONTROLS
EBD failure                                   BRAKE ASSIST




                                                                                                                                             DASHBOARD
                                              (integrated ESP emergency
ABS failure is indicated by the turning on
                                              braking assistance)
                                                                                            (Electronic Stability
warning lights > and x on the instru-
ment panel together with the dedicated        (where provided)                              Program)
message on the multifunctional display        This system (which cannot be deactivat-       (where provided)
(where provided), (see section “Warning




                                                                                                                                            DEVICES
                                                                                                                                            SAFETY
                                              ed) recognises emergency braking condi-
lights and messages”).                        tions according to the speed of operation     The ESP system is an electronic system
In this case, the rear wheels may sudden-     of the brake pedal and provides an addi-      controlling the car stability in the event of
ly lock and the car may swerve. Drive         tional hydraulic braking pressure to sup-     tyre grip loss.




                                                                                                                                            CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                             OF THE CAR
carefully to the nearest Fiat Dealership to   port that provided by the driver. This al-    The ESP system is therefore particularly
have the system checked.                      lows faster and more power operation of       useful when grip conditions of the road sur-
                                              the braking system.                           faces changes.
                                              Brake Assist is deactivated on the versions   In addition to the ESP system, ASR system




                                                                                                                                            LIGHTS AND
                                              equipped with ESP, in the event of ESP sys-




                                                                                                                                             MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                             WARNING
                                                                                            and Hill Holder, (where provided) also the
                 WARNING                      tem failure (indicated by warning light á     MSR system (adjusting the engine braking
         If warning light x only lights       switching on together with the message        torque) and the HBA system (improving
         up on the instrument panel           on the multifunctional display, where pro-    the braking force during emergency brak-
(with a message on the multifunc-             vided).                                       ing) are provided.




                                                                                                                                            EMERGENCY
tional display, where provided), stop




                                                                                                                                              IN AN
the car immediate and go to the                                                             ABS SYSTEM INTERVENTION
nearest Fiat Dealership. Leakage of
hydraulic fluid from the braking sys-                          WARNING                      It is signalled by the blinking of the warn-




                                                                                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
tem will compromise functionality of                   When the ABS cuts in, and            ing light á on the instrument panel, to
the braking system, either of the con-                 you feel the brake pedal pul-        inform the driver that the car is in criti-




                                                                                                                                                               CAR
ventional type or with ABS.                   sating, do not remove your foot, but          cal stability and grip conditions.
                                              keep it pressed; in doing so you will
                                              stop in the shortest amount of space




                                                                                                                                              TECHNICAL
                                              possible under the current road con-
                                              ditions.




                                                                                                                                            INDEX
                                                                                                                                            93
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   ESP SYSTEM ACTIVATION                           HILL HOLDER SYSTEM                               Failure indications
                                The ESP system is automatically activat-        This system is an integral part of the ESP       Warning light è on the instrument pan-
                                ed when the car is started and cannot be        system and it is provided to facilitate start-   el will light up in the event of a failure (see
                                de-activated.                                   ing on slopes.                                   “Warning lights and messages”).
                                                                                It will activate automatically with the fol-     IMPORTANT The Hill Holder system is
   DEVICES




                                FAILURE INDICATIONS
   SAFETY




                                                                                lowing conditions:                               not a parking brake therefore, never leave
                                In the event of a failure, the In ESP will be                                                    the car without having engaged the hand-
                                                                                ❒ uphill: car at a standstill on a road with     brake, turned the engine off and engaged
                                automatically switched off and warning            a gradient higher than 5%, engine run-
                                light á will appear on the instrument pan-                                                       the first speed.
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                  ning, clutch and brake pedal pressed,
    OF THE CAR




                                el along with a message on the multifunc-         gearbox to neutral or engaged gear oth-
                                tional display (where provided) (see              er than reverse.
                                “Warning lights and messages”). The LED
                                on the ASR OFF button will light up. Con-       ❒ downhill: car at a standstill on a road                        WARNING
                                tact Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.         with a gradient higher than 5%, engine
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES




                                                                                                                                          For correct operation of the
 WARNING




                                                                                  running, clutch and brake pedal pressed                 ESP and ASR systems, the
                                                                                  and reverse gear engaged.                      tyres must absolutely be of the same
                                                                                At pickup the ESP system control unit will       brand and type on all wheels, in per-
                                                   WARNING                      keep brake force on wheels until reaching        fect conditions and, above all, of
   EMERGENCY




                                          Do not take unnecessary               the torque suitable for starting, or in any      type, brand and size specified.
     IN AN




                                          risks, even if your cars fits an      case for max. 2 seconds in order to pass
                                ESP system. Your driving style must             easily from the brake pedal to the accel-
                                always be suited to the conditions of           erator pedal.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                the road, visibility and traffic. The dri-
                                ver is always and only responsible for          After 2 seconds without starting, the sys-
                      CAR




                                road safety.                                    tem will deactivate automatically by re-
                                                                                leasing gradually the brake force.
                                                                                At releasing, the typical brake disengage-
     TECHNICAL




                                                                                ment noise indicating that the car is go-
                                                                                ing to move will be heard.
               INDEX




                 94
                                                                                                                                              AND CONTROLS
ASR SYSTEM (Antislip Regulator)                               WARNING                                             A




                                                                                                                                               DASHBOARD
The ASR function controls car drive and                For correct operation of the
cuts in automatically every time one or                ESP and ASR systems, the
both driving wheels slip.                     tyres must absolutely be of the same
According to slipping conditions, two dif-    brand and type on all wheels, in per-
                                              fect conditions and, above all, of




                                                                                                                                              DEVICES
                                                                                                                   ASR




                                                                                                                                              SAFETY
ferent control systems are activated:                                                                              OFF
                                              type, brand and size specified.
❒ if slipping involves both driving wheels,
  the ASR function intervenes reducing
  the power transmitted by the engine;




                                                                                                                                              CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                               OF THE CAR
                                                                                                                                   F0R0218m
                                                                                              fig. 100
❒ if the slipping involves only one driving   MSR system
  wheel, the ASR system cuts in auto-         (engine braking torque control)                 When the ASR is switched off this is
  matically braking the wheel that is slip-                                                   shown by the lighting up of the led on the
  ping.                                       It is an integral part of the ASR system that
                                                                                              button and by relevant message on the




                                                                                                                                              LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                               MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                               WARNING
                                              in case of sudden gear shifting, cuts in pro-
The action of the ASR is particularly help-   viding torque to the engine thus prevent-       multifunction display, where provided.
ful in the following circumstances:           ing excessive driving wheel drive that, spe-    If the ASR is switched off when travelling,
                                              cially in poor grip conditions, can lead to     it will turn on again automatically the next
❒ slipping of the inner wheel due to the                                                      time the engine is started.
                                              loss of stability.




                                                                                                                                              EMERGENCY
  effect of dynamic load changes or ex-




                                                                                                                                                IN AN
  cessive acceleration;                                                                       It may be useful to switch the ASR when
                                              Switching the system on/off fig. 100            driving on snow-covered roads with snow
❒ too much power transmitted to the                                                           chains fitted: in these conditions, slipping
  wheels also in relation to the conditions   The ASR system switches on automatically
                                              each time the engine is started.                of the wheels during pick-up provides bet-




                                                                                                                                              SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
  of the road surface;                                                                        ter traction.




                                                                                                                                                                 CAR
                                              When travelling, the ASR can be switched
❒ acceleration on slippery, snowy or          off and on again pres100.
  frozen surfaces;
❒ in the case of loss of grip on a wet sur-




                                                                                                                                                TECHNICAL
  face (aquaplaning).




                                                                                                                                              INDEX
                                                                                                                                              95
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                      WARNING                      EOBD SYSTEM                                    IMPORTANT After eliminating the in-
                                                                                                                               convenience, to check the system com-
                                          Do not take unnecessary               (where provided)                               pletely, Fiat Dealerships are obliged to run
                                          risks, even if your cars fits                                                        a bench test and, if necessary, road tests
                                such a system. Your driving style must          The EOBD system (European On Board             which may also call for a long journey.
                                always be suited to the conditions of           Diagnosis) allows continuous diagnosis of
                                the road, visibility and traffic. The dri-
   DEVICES




                                                                                the components of the car correlated with
   SAFETY




                                ver is always and only responsible for          emissions.
                                road safety.
                                                                                It also alerts the driver, by turning on the             Go to a Fiat Dealership as
                                                                                warning light U on the instrument pan-                   soon as possible if warning
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                el (together with relevant message on the                light U either does not light
                                                                                multifunctional display, where provided)                 up when the key is turned to
                                For correct operation of the ASR system,        (see section “Warning lights and mes-          MAR to if while travelling the warning
                                the tyres must absolutely be of the same        sages”), when these conditions are no          lights comes on either steady or blink-
                                brand and type on all wheels, in perfect        longer in peak conditions.                     ing (along with a message on the mul-
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                conditions and, above all, of type, brand                                                      tifunctional display, where provided).
                                and size specified.                             The objective is:                              The operation of warning light U may
                                                                                ❒ to monitor system efficiency;                be checked by the traffic police using
                                FAILURE INDICATIONS                                                                            specific devices. Follow the laws in
                                                                                ❒ warn when a fault causes emissions lev-
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                                                               force in the country where you are dri-
                                In the event of a failure, the In ASR will be
     IN AN




                                                                                  els to increase;                             ving.
                                automatically switched off and warning
                                light á will appear on the instrument           ❒ to warn of the need to replace deteri-
                                panel along with a message on the multi-          orated components.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                functional display (where provided) (see        The system also has a diagnostic connec-
                      CAR




                                “Warning lights and messages”). In this         tor that can be interfaced with appropri-
                                case, contact Fiat Dealership as soon as        ate tools, which makes it possible to read
                                possible.                                       the error codes stored in the control unit,
                                                                                together with a series of specific parame-
     TECHNICAL




                                                                                ters for engine operation and diagnosis.
                                                                                This check can also be carried out by the
                                                                                traffic police.
               INDEX




                 96
PARKING SENSORS




                                                                                                                                           AND CONTROLS
                                                                                            Detection distances




                                                                                                                                            DASHBOARD
(where provided)                                                                            Central action radius         150 cm
                                                                                            Side action radius            60 cm
Parking sensors are located in the rear
bumper fig. 101 and their function is to                                                    If several obstacles are detected, the con-




                                                                                                                                           DEVICES
inform the driver, through an intermittent                                                  trol unit indicates the nearest one.




                                                                                                                                           SAFETY
buzzer, about the presence of obstacles
behind the car.                                                                             FAILURE INDICATIONS
                                                                                            Parking sensor failures, if any, will be in-




                                                                                                                                           CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                            OF THE CAR
                                                                                 F0R0084m
ACTIVATION                                   fig. 101
                                                                                            dicated when engaging reverse by the
The sensors are automatically activated                                                     turning on of the instrument panel warn-
when the reverse gear is engaged.            BUZZER WARNINGS                                ing light t together with the message on
                                             When the reverse gear is engaged an in-        the multifunction display, where provided
As the distance from the obstacle behind




                                                                                                                                           LIGHTS AND
                                                                                            (see section “Warning lights and mes-




                                                                                                                                            MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                            WARNING
the car decreases, the acoustic alarm be-    termittent acoustic signal is automatically
                                             activated.                                     sages”).
comes more frequent.
                                             The acoustic signal:
                                             ❒ becomes louder as the reduction of dis-




                                                                                                                                           EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                             IN AN
                                               tance between the car and the obstacle
                                               decreases;
                                             ❒ becomes continuous when the distance




                                                                                                                                           SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                               between the car and the obstacle is less
                                               that 30 cm and stops immediately if the




                                                                                                                                                              CAR
                                               distance increases;
                                             ❒ is constant if the distance is unvaried;
                                               if this situation concerns the side sen-




                                                                                                                                             TECHNICAL
                                               sors, the buzzer will stop after about
                                               3 seconds to avoid, for example, warn-
                                               ing indications in the event of manoeu-
                                               vres along walls.




                                                                                                                                           INDEX
                                                                                                                                           97
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   OPERATION WITH TRAILER                                            WARNING                   GENERAL WARNINGS
                                Parking sensor operation is deactivated au-              The driver is always and on-       ❒ When parking, take the utmost care to
                                tomatically when the trailer electric cable              ly responsible for parking           obstacles that may be set above or un-
                                plug is fitted into the car tow hook socket.   and other dangerous manoeuvres.                der the sensors.
                                Sensors are reactivated when removing          Make sure that no-one is standing in         ❒ Objects set close to the car, under cer-
                                                                               the area, especially children or ani-
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                the trailer cable plug.                                                                       tain circumstances are not detected and
                                                                               mals. Parking sensors are designed to          could therefore cause damages to the
                                In washing stations, clean sensors quickly     assist drivers: in all cases, you must al-     car or be damaged.
                                keeping the vapour jet/high pressure           ways pay the utmost attention during
                                                                                                                            ❒ Indications sent by the sensors can be
   CORRECT USE




                                washing nozzles at 10 cm at least from the     potentially dangerous manoeuvres.
    OF THE CAR




                                sensors.                                                                                      altered by dirt, snow or ice deposited
                                                                                                                              on the sensors or by ultrasound sys-
                                                                                                                              tems (e.g.: truck pneumatic brakes or
                                                                                                                              pneumatic hammers) set nearby the
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                                                              car.
                                         The sensor must be clean
                                         from mud, dirt, snow or ice in
                                         order for the system to work.
   EMERGENCY




                                         Be careful not to scratch or
     IN AN




                                damage the sensor while cleaning
                                them. Avoid using dry, rough or hard
                                cloths. Clean the sensors with clean
                                water with the addition of car sham-
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                poo if necessary.
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




                 98
SOUND SYSTEM




                                                                                                                                    AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                           WARNING




                                                                                                                                     DASHBOARD
(where provided)                                                                                   For connection to existing car
                                                                                                   presetting system, contact
For the operation of the radio with                                                       Fiat Dealership to prevent any trouble
CD/MP3 CD (where provided), read the                                                      that could impair car safety.




                                                                                                                                    DEVICES
instructions for use given in the Supple-




                                                                                                                                    SAFETY
ment attached to the Owner Handbook.

SOUND SYSTEM PRESETTING




                                                                                                                                    CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                     OF THE CAR
                                                                               F0R0085m
(where provided)                            fig. 102
The system consists of:
❒ sound system power wires                  Sound system installation
❒ front and rear speaker connecting         The sound system shall be installed in the




                                                                                                                                    LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                     MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                     WARNING
  wires                                     proper space occupied by the central
❒ aerial power wire                         oddment compartment, here you will find
                                            the preset cables.
❒ 2 tweeters on front doors (30W max
  power each);                              Lower the fasteners shown in fig. 102 to




                                                                                                                                    EMERGENCY
❒ 2 mid-woofers on front doors (165         remove the box.




                                                                                                                                      IN AN
  mm diameter, 40W max power
  each);
❒ 4/6 full-range speakers on rear doors




                                                                                                                                    SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
  and rear valance panels (130 mm




                                                                                                                                                       CAR
  diameter, 40W max power each);
❒ radio aerial wire.




                                                                                                                                      TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                    INDEX
                                                                                                                                    99
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   ACCESSORIES                                       ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC                           TRANSCEIVERS
                                                                                  DEVICE INSTALLATION                             AND MOBILE PHONES
                                PURCHASED BY THE
                                OWNER                                             Electrical and electronic devices installed     Radio transceiver equipment (e.g.: e-tacs
                                                                                  after buying the car by after-market ser-       mobile phones, HAM radio systems and
                                                                                  vice must carry the following label:            the like) shall not be used inside the car
                                If after buying the car, you decide to install                                                    unless a separate aerial is mounted on the
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                electrical accessories that require a per-                                                        roof.
                                manent electric supply (alarm, satellite an-
                                titheft system, etc.) or accessories that in                                                      IMPORTANT The use of similar devices
                                any case burden the electric supply, con-                                                         inside the passenger compartment (with-
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                tact Fiat Dealership, whose qualified per-                                                        out separated aerial) produces radio-fre-
                                sonnel, besides suggesting the most suit-                                                         quency electromagnetic fields which, am-
                                able devices belonging to Lineaccessori Fi-       Fiat Auto S.p.A. authorises the installation    plified by the resonance effects inside the
                                at, will also evaluate the overall electric ab-   of transceiving devices provided that they      passenger compartment, may cause elec-
                                sorption, checking whether the car’s elec-                                                        trical systems equipping the car to mal-
LIGHTS AND




                                                                                  are installed according to rules of good en-
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                tric system is able to withstand the load         gineering practice respecting the manu-         function. This could compromise safety in
                                required, or whether it needs to be inte-         facturer’s indications by a specialised cen-    addition to constituting a potential hazard
                                grated with a more powerful battery.              tre.                                            for the passengers.
                                                                                                                                  In addition, transmission and reception of
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                  IMPORTANT Traffic police may not allow
                                                                                                                                  these devices may be affected by the
     IN AN




                                                                                  the car on the road in the event of as-
                                                                                  sembly of devices which imply modifica-         shielding effect of the car body.
                                                  WARNING
                                                                                  tions to the features of the car. This may      As concerns EC-approved mobile phones
                                          Be very careful when fitting            also cause lapse of warranty in relation to     (GSM, GPRS, UMTS), strictly comply with
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                          non-standard additional                 faults caused by the change or either di-       the instructions for use provided by the
                      CAR




                                 spoilers, light alloy wheels or wheel            rectly or indirectly related to it.             mobile phone’s manufacturer.
                                 cups: they could reduce brake venti-
                                 lation and consequently brake effi-              Fiat Auto S.p.A. shall not be liable for dam-
                                 ciency in the case of repeated, violent          age caused by the installation of acces-
                                                                                  sories either not supplied or recom-
     TECHNICAL




                                 braking or on long downhill roads.
                                 Make sure that nothing obstructs the             mended by Fiat Auto S.p.A. and/or in-
                                 pedal stroke (mats, etc.)                        stalled in compliance with the provided in-
                                                                                  structions.
               INDEX




            100
AT THE FILLING




                                                                                                                                              AND CONTROLS
                                               DIESEL ENGINES




                                                                                                                                               DASHBOARD
                                                                                                          For diesel engines, use diesel
STATION                                        If the outside temperature is very low, the                fuel for motor vehicles com-
                                               diesel thickens due to the formation of                    pliant with EN590 European
                                               paraffin clots and could clog the diesel fu-               specifications only. The use of
PETROL ENGINES                                 el filter.                                       other products or mixtures may dam-
                                                                                                age the engine beyond repair and con-




                                                                                                                                              DEVICES
                                                                                                                                              SAFETY
Use only unleaded petrol.                      In order to avoid these problems, differ-        sequently cause lapse of warranty in
To avoid mistakes, the diameter of the fu-     ent types of diesel are distributed ac-          relation to the damage caused. If you
el filler is too small to introduce the beak   cording to the season: summer type, win-         accidentally introduce other types of
                                               ter type and arctic type (cold, mountain         fuel in the tank, do not start the engine




                                                                                                                                              CORRECT USE
of a leaded petrol pump. The petrol oc-




                                                                                                                                               OF THE CAR
tane rating (RON) must not be lower            areas).                                          and empty the tank. If the engine has
than 95.                                       If refuelling with diesel fuel whose features    run also for a very short time, you will
                                               are not suitable to the temperature of use,      need to have the entire fuel feed sys-
IMPORTANT An inefficient catalyst leads                                                         tem emptied in addition to the tank.
to harmful exhaust emissions, thus con-        it is advisable to mix TUTELA DIESEL ART




                                                                                                                                              LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                               MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                               WARNING
tributing to air pollution.                    additive in the proportions shown on the
                                               container with the fuel. Pour the additive
IMPORTANT Never use leaded petrol,             into the tank before the fuel.
even in small amount or in an emergency,                                                        Filling the tank
as this would damage the catalyst beyond       When using or parking the car for a long




                                                                                                                                              EMERGENCY
                                               time in the mountains or cold areas, it is       To fill the tank completely, top-up twice
repair.




                                                                                                                                                IN AN
                                               advisable to refuel using locally available      after the pump switches off. Further top-
                                               fuel.                                            ups could cause faults in the fuel feeding
                                                                                                system.
                                               In this case, it is also advisable to keep the




                                                                                                                                              SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                               tank over 50% full.




                                                                                                                                                TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                              INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                             101
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                                                                                                   PROTECTING THE
                                                                                                                                ENVIRONMENT
                                                                                                                                The devices for curtailing petrol engine
                                                                                                                                emissions are the following:
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                                                                                ❒ three-way catalytic converter;
                                                                                                                                ❒ lambda sensors;
                                                                                                                                ❒ fuel evaporation system.
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                      F0M0203m                                       F0R0210m
                                fig. 103                                         fig. 104
                                                                                                                                In addition, do not let the engine run, even
                                FUEL FILLER CAP fig. 103                         When refuelling, position the cap on the       for a test, with one or more spark plugs
                                                                                 device inside the lid as shown in fig. 103.    disconnected.
                                To carry out fuelling, if your car fits a cen-
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES




                                                                                                                                The devices for curtailing diesel fuel en-
 WARNING




                                tralised door locking system, unlock the
                                doors, open lid A and unscrew cap B; the                                                        gine emissions are the following:
                                cap is fitted with a special device C which                                                     ❒ oxidising catalytic converter;
                                fastens it to the lid so it cannot be mislaid.                       WARNING
                                                                                            Do not approach naked               ❒ exhaust gas recirculation system
   EMERGENCY




                                If your car does not fit a centralised lock-                flames or lit sigarettes to the       (E.G.R.).
     IN AN




                                ing system, operate lever A-fig. 104 to           fuel filler: fire risk. Keep your face
                                release the flap.                                 away from the fuel filler to prevent
                                In some versions, cap B may be provided           breathing in harmful vapours.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                with a lock and key; use the ignition key                                                                        WARNING
                      CAR




                                to access the flap A-fig. 103, turn it an-                                                               The catalytic converter de-
                                ticlockwise and loosen the cap itself.                                                                   velops high temperature dur-
                                The airtight closing may determine a slight                                                     ing operation. Do not park on grass,
                                increase of pressure in the tank. A suction                                                     dry leaves, pine needles or other flam-
     TECHNICAL




                                noise when you release the cap is there-                                                        mable material: fire risk.
                                fore entirely normal.
               INDEX




            102
SAFETY DEVICES




                                                                                                        AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                         DASHBOARD
        SEAT BELTS ...........................................................................   104
        S.B.R. SYSTEM .......................................................................    105




                                                                                                        DEVICES
                                                                                                        SAFETY
        PRETENSIONERS..................................................................          106
        CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY......................................                           109
        “UNIVERSAL ISOFIX” CHILD




                                                                                                        CORRECT USE
                                                                                                         OF THE CAR
        RESTRAINT SYSTEM ASSEMBLY SETUP........................                                  114
        FRONT AIRBAGS.................................................................           115
        SIDE AIRBAGS ......................................................................      118




                                                                                                        LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                         MESSAGES
                                                                                                         WARNING
                                                                                                        EMERGENCY
                                                                                                          IN AN
                                                                                                        SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                          TECHNICAL
                                                                                                        INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                       103
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   SEAT BELTS                                                                                                           B
                                                                                                                                                      A
                                USING THE SEAT BELTS fig. 1
                                The belt should be worn keeping the chest
                                straight and rested against the seat back.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                To fasten the seat belts, take hold the
                                tongue A and insert it into the buckle B,
                                until hearing the locking click.
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                 F0R0150m                                     F0R0151m
                                                                               fig. 1                                       fig. 3
                                At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for a
                                short stretch, then pull it out again with-
                                out jerking.                                                                                ADJUSTING THE FRONT SEAT
                                                                                                                            BELT HEIGHT
                                Press button C to release the belt. Ac-
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                company the belt while it is being re-                                                      Always adjust the seat belt height to the
                                wound to prevent twisting.                                                                  passenger’s body: this precaution may
                                                                                                                            considerably reduce the risk of injury in
                                Through the reel, the belt automatically                                                    the event of a collision.
                                adapts to the body of the passenger wear-
   EMERGENCY




                                ing it, allowing freedom of movement.                                                       Correct regulation is obtained when the
     IN AN




                                                                                                                            belt passes approximately half way be-
                                The reel may lock when the car is parked                                                    tween the shoulder and the neck.
                                                                                                                 F0R0088m
                                on a steep slope: this is perfectly normal.    fig. 2
                                Furthermore, the reel mechanism locks                                                       To adjust, move the grip A-fig. 3 of the
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                the belt if it is pulled and in the event of                                                locking mechanism either up or down and
                                                                                                WARNING
                      CAR




                                sudden braking, collisions and on high                                                      at the same time move the ring B-fig. 3
                                speed bends.                                             Never press button C-fig. 1        to the most suitable of the allowed posi-
                                                                                         when travelling.                   tions.
                                The rear seat is fitted with inertial seat
     TECHNICAL




                                belts with three anchor points and reel.
                                                                               The rear seat belts must be used as shown
                                                                               in the diagram in fig. 2.
               IINDEX




            104
IMPORTANT Make sure the backrest is                                                    S.B.R. SYSTEM




                                                                                                                                      AND CONTROLS
                                                              WARNING




                                                                                                                                       DASHBOARD
correctly fastened when returning it to the
position of normal use after folding it.               Remember that in the event
                                                       of a violent collision, back    The car is fitted with the S.B.R. system
                                              seat passengers not wearing seat belts   (Seat Belt Reminder), consisting of a
                                              also represent a serious danger for      buzzer which, together with the turning
                                              the front seat passengers.               on of warning light < on the instrument




                                                                                                                                      DEVICES
                                                                                                                                      SAFETY
                                                                                       panel, warns the driver to fasten the seat
                                                                                       belt.
                                                                                       The buzzer can be deactivated (until the




                                                                                                                                      CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                       OF THE CAR
                                                                                       next engine stop) as follows:
                                                              WARNING
                                                        Make sure the backrest is      ❒ fasten the driver’s and passenger’s seat
                                                        properly secured at both         belt;
                                              sides to prevent it moves forward in     ❒ turn the ignition key to MAR;




                                                                                                                                      LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                       MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                       WARNING
                                              the event of sharp braking causing in-
                                              juries to passengers.                    ❒ wait for over 20 seconds and then re-
                                                                                         lease one of the seat belts.
                                                                                       For permanent deactivation, contact Fiat




                                                                                                                                      EMERGENCY
                                                                                       Dealership.




                                                                                                                                        IN AN
                                                                                       With digital display, the S.B.R. system can
                                                                                       only be reset at Fiat Dealership.




                                                                                                                                      SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                        TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                      INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                     105
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   PRETENSIONERS                                                    WARNING                    LOAD LIMITERS
                                                                                          The pretensioner can only         To increase passenger’s safety, the front
                                To increase the efficiency of the seat belts,             be used once. Go to a Fiat        seat belt reels contain a load limiter which
                                the car is fitted with pretensioners. These     Dealership to have it replaced after        allows controlled sag in such a way as to
                                devices, in the event of a violent crash,       is has been deployed. The expiration        dose the force acting on the chest and
                                rewind the seat belts a few centimetres.        date is shown on the label in the odd-      shoulders during the belt restraining ac-
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                In this way they ensure that the seat belt      ment compartment: go to a Fiat              tion in case of front crash.
                                adheres perfectly to the wearer before the      Dealership to have the device re-
                                restraining action begins.                      placed when the expiration date ap-
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                proaches.
    OF THE CAR




                                The seat belt locks to indicate that the de-
                                vice has intervened; the seat belt cannot
                                be drawn back up even when guiding it
                                manually.
LIGHTS AND




                                IMPORTANT To obtain the highest de-
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                          Operations which lead to
                                gree of protection from the action of the                 knocks, vibrations or localised
                                pretensioner, wear the seat belt keeping                  heating (over 100°C for a
                                it firmly close to the chest and pelvis.                  maximum of 6 hours) in the
                                A slight amount of smoke may be detect-         area around the pretensioners may
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                cause damage or trigger them. These
     IN AN




                                ed during operation of the pretensioners.
                                This smoke is not harmful and does not          devices are not affected by vibrations
                                indicate a fire.                                caused by irregularities of the road sur-
                                                                                face or low obstacles such as kerbs, etc.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                The pretensioner does not require any           Contact a Fiat Dealership for any as-
                                maintenance or greasing.                        sistance.
                      CAR




                                Anything that modifies its original condi-
                                tions invalidates its efficiency.
     TECHNICAL




                                If due to unusual natural events (floods,
                                seas storm, etc.) the device has been af-
                                fected by water and mud, it must neces-
                                sarily be replaced.
               IINDEX




            106
                                                                                                                                           AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                            DASHBOARD
                                                                                                                                           DEVICES
                                                                                                                                           SAFETY
                                                                                                                                           CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                            OF THE CAR
                                    F0R0089m                                     F0R0090m                                      F0R0091m
fig. 4                                         fig. 5                                       fig. 6

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR                       Seat belts must also be used by pregnant     Of course they must position the lower
USING THE SEAT BELTS                           women: risk will be significantly reduced    part of the belt very low down so that it
                                               for both the expectant mother and the        passes under the abdomen, see fig. 4.




                                                                                                                                           LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                            MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                            WARNING
The driver is responsible for respecting       child in the event of an accident.
and ensuring that all the other occupants
of the car also respect the local laws in
force in relation to the use of seat belts.
Always fasten the seat belts before start-                                                                     WARNING




                                                                                                                                           EMERGENCY
                                                                                                      The belt must not be twist-




                                                                                                                                             IN AN
ing off.
                                                                                                      ed. The upper part must
                                                                                             cross the shoulder and the chest di-
                                                                                             agonally. The lower part must adhere




                                                                                                                                           SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                             to the hips fig. 4 not to the abdomen.




                                                                                                                                                              CAR
                                                                                             Do not use devices (clips, etc.) to hold
                                                                                             the seat belt away from your body.




                                                                                                                                             TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                           INDEX
                                                                                                                                          107
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                    WARNING                                    WARNING                                    WARNING
                                          For maximum safety, keep                 If the belt has been subject-               Each seat belt may only be
                                          the back of your seat up-                ed to heavy stress, for ex-                 used by one person at a
                                right, lean back into it and make sure    ample after and accident, it should be      time: do not carry children on your
                                the seat belt fits closely across your    changed completely together with            lap with one seat belt protecting
                                chest and hips. Always fasten the seat    the anchors, anchor fastening screws        both. In general, do not place any ob-
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                belts on both the front and the rear      and the pretensioners. In fact, even if     jects between the person and belt.
                                seats. Travelling without seat belts      the belt has no visible defects, it could
                                will increase the risk of severe injury   have lost its resilience.
   CORRECT USE




                                and even death in the event of an ac-
    OF THE CAR




                                cident.
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                WARNING
                                         Never disassemble or tamper
                                         with the seat belt or preten-
                                sioner components. All interventions
   EMERGENCY




                                must be performed by qualified and
     IN AN




                                authorised personnel only. Always go
                                to a Fiat Dealership
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               IINDEX




            108
HOW TO KEEP THE SEAT                          CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY




                                                                                                                                           AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                            DASHBOARD
BELTS ALWAYS IN EFFICIENT
CONDITIONS
                                              For optimal protection in the event of a       Group 0         0-10 kg in weight
Observe the following:                        crash, all passengers must be seated and
                                                                                             Group 0+        0-13 kg in weight
❒ always use the belt with the tap taut and   wearing adequate restraint systems.




                                                                                                                                           DEVICES
                                                                                                                                           SAFETY
  never twisted; make sure that it is free    This is even more important for children.      Group 1         9-18 kg in weight
  to run without impediments;                                                                Group 2         15-25 kg in weight
                                              This prescription is compulsory in all EC
❒ replace the belt after an accident of a     countries according to EC Directive            Group 3         22-36 kg in weight




                                                                                                                                           CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                            OF THE CAR
  certain severity even if it does not ap-    2003/20/EC.
  pear damaged. Always replace the belt                                                      As it may be noted, the groups overlap
  if the pretensioners where deployed.        A child’s head is larger and heavier in pro-   partly and in fact, in commerce it is pos-
                                              portion to its body and the child’s muscu-     sible to find devices that cover more than
❒ to clean the belt, wash by hand with wa-    lar and bone structures are not fully de-      one weight group.




                                                                                                                                           LIGHTS AND
  ter and mild soap, rinse and leave to dry




                                                                                                                                            MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                            WARNING
                                              veloped. For this reason, they require re-
  in the shade. Do not use strong deter-      straint systems which are different from       All restraint devices must bear the certi-
  gents, bleach, paints or any other sub-     those used by adults to protect them in the    fication data, together with the control
  stance which could damage the belt fi-      event of an accident. The research results     brand, on a solidly fixed label which must
  bres;                                       in relation to the best protection for chil-   absolutely never be removed.




                                                                                                                                           EMERGENCY
❒ keep the reels dry: correct operation       dren is illustrated in European Regulation




                                                                                                                                             IN AN
  may only be ensured if the reels are dry;   EEC-R44 which divides the restraint sys-
                                              tems into five groups in addition to mak-
❒ replace the seat belt when showing sig-     ing their use compulsory:




                                                                                                                                           SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
  nificant wear or cut signs.




                                                                                                                                             TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                           INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                          109
                                Over 1.50 m in height, from the point of
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                                                                   WARNING                                 WARNING
                                view of restraint systems, children are
                                considered as adults and wear the seat                 Do not place a cradle seat                SEVERE DANGER If you
                                belts normally.                                        facing backwards on the                   need to carry a baby on the
                                                                              front seat if the passenger side airbag            front passenger seat in a
                                Lineaccessori Fiat includes child restraint   is on. Deployment of the airbag in an              cradle restraint system fac-
                                systems for each weight group. These de-      accident could cause fatal injuries to             ing backwards, the passen-
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                vices are recommended having been             the baby regardless of the severity of             ger side airbags (front and
                                specifically designed for Fiat cars.          the collision. It is advisable to carry   side bags, where provided) must be
                                                                              children in an appropriate restraint      deactivated using the setup menu.
                                                                                                                        Check the warning light F on the in-
   CORRECT USE




                                                                              system on the rear seat which is the
    OF THE CAR




                                                                              most protected position in the event      strument panel. Move the passenger’s
                                                                              of an accident.                           seat as far back as possible to avoid
                                                                                                                        contact between the cradle and the
                                                                                                                        dashboard.
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING

   EMERGENCY
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               IINDEX




            110
                                                                                                                                                   AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                                    DASHBOARD
                                                                                                                                                   DEVICES
                                                                                                                                                   SAFETY
                                                                                                                                                   CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                                    OF THE CAR
                                      F0R0092m                                        F0R0093m                                         F0R0094m
fig. 7                                           fig. 8                                          fig. 9

GROUP 0 and 0+                                   GROUP 1                                         GROUP 2
Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing        Starting from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight, chil-    Children from 15 to 25 kg may use the car




                                                                                                                                                   LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                                    MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                                    WARNING
backwards on a cradle seat, which, sup-          dren may be carried facing forwards, with       seat belts directly fig. 9. The child seat is
porting the head, does not induce stress         seat fitted with front cushion, through         only needed to position the child correctly
on the neck in the event of sharp decel-         which the car seat belt restrains both child    with respect to the belts so that the di-
eration.                                         and seat fig. 8.                                agonal section crosses the child’s chest
                                                                                                 and never the neck and is snug on the hips




                                                                                                                                                   EMERGENCY
The cradle is restrained by the car seat
                                                                                                 not the abdomen.




                                                                                                                                                     IN AN
belts fig. 7 and in turn it must restrain the
child with its own belts.




                                                                                                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                   WARNING




                                                                                                                                                                      CAR
                                        WARNING                                                            The figure is indicative for
           The figures are indicative for assembly purposes only. Refer to the in-                         assembly purposes only. Re-
           structions supplied with the child restraint.                                          fer to the instructions supplied with
                                                                                                  the child restraint.




                                                                                                                                                     TECHNICAL
                                         WARNING
          Some child restraint systems for weight group 0 and 1 have a rear at-
          tachment to the car seat belts and its own seat belts for securing the child.
 Due to their weight, they may be dangerous if incorrectly mounted (e.g. if fastened




                                                                                                                                                   INDEX
 to the car seat belts with a cushion in between). Follow the assembly instructions
 carefully.

                                                                                                                                                  111
                                                                              PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’S
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                                                              SEAT USE
                                                                              The car complies with the new European Directive 2000/3/EC which governs the
                                                                              arrangement possibilities for child restraints on the various seats of the car as shown
                                                                              in the following table:
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                                                   Weight           Passenger         Passenger        Passenger
                                                                              Group                group              front             rear             rear
                                                                                                                                                        central
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                   F0R0095m
                                fig. 10
                                                                              Group 0, 0+         up to 13 kg          U (▼)               U                 *
                                GROUP 3
                                For children from 22 kg to 36 kg the size     Group 1               9-18 kg            U (▼)               U                 *
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                of the child’s chest no longer requires a
                                support to space the child’s back from the    Group 2              15-25 kg            U (▼)               U                 *
                                seat back.
                                                                              Group 3              22-36 kg            U (▼)               U                 *
                                Fig. 10 shows proper child seat posi-
   EMERGENCY




                                tioning on the rear seat.                     Key:
     IN AN




                                Children taller than 1.50 m can wear seat     U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to Eu-
                                belts like adults.                            ropean Standard EEC-R44 for the specified “Groups”.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                              (▼) on cars not fitted with passenger’s seat adjustable in height, the seat back shall be
                      CAR




                                                                              positioned perfectly upright.
                                                  WARNING
                                                                              * Never mount child restraint systems on the rear central seat.
                                          The figure is indicative for
                                          assembly purposes only. Re-
     TECHNICAL




                                 fer to the instructions supplied with
                                 the child restraint.
               IINDEX




            112
Below is a summary of the rules of              4) Always check the seat belt is well fas-




                                                                                                                                        AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                               WARNING




                                                                                                                                         DASHBOARD
safety to be followed for carrying              tened by pulling the webbing.
                                                                                                      Do not place a cradle seat
children:                                       5) Only one child is to be strapped to                facing backwards on the
1) The recommended position for in-             each retaining system.                       front seat if the passenger side airbag
stalling child’s seat is on the rear seat, as   6) Always check the seat belts do not fit    is on. Deployment of the airbag in an
                                                                                             accident could cause fatal injuries to




                                                                                                                                        DEVICES
it is the most protected in the case of a




                                                                                                                                        SAFETY
                                                around the child’s throat.
crash.                                                                                       the baby regardless of the severity of
                                                7) While travelling, do not let the child    the collision. It is advisable to carry
2) If the passenger’s air bag is deactivat-     sit incorrectly or release the belts.        children in an appropriate restraint
ed always check the amber warning light




                                                                                                                                        CORRECT USE
                                                                                             system on the rear seat which is the




                                                                                                                                         OF THE CAR
on the cluster to make sure that it has ac-     8) Never carry children on your lap, even    most protected position in the event
tually been deactivated.                        newborns. No-one, however strong, can        of an accident.
                                                hold a child in the case of an accident.
3) Carefully follow the instructions sup-
plied with the child restraint system which     9) In case of an accident, replace the




                                                                                                                                        LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                         MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                         WARNING
are mandatory by law. Keep the instruc-         child’s seat with a new one.
tions in the car along with the other pa-
pers and this handbook. Do not use child
seats without instructions.




                                                                                                                                        EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                          IN AN
                                                                                                                                        SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                          TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                        INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                       113
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   “UNIVERSAL ISOFIX”
                                 CHILD RESTRAINT
                                 ASSEMBLY SETUP
                                This car is preset for mounting the Uni-
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                versal Isofix child restraint system, a new
                                European standardised system for carry-
                                ing children safely.
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                An example of child seat is shown as an                                                          fig. 12                           F0R0097m

                                example in fig. 11.
                                The Universal Isofix child’s seat covers
                                weight group: 1.
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                Due to its different anchoring system, the
                                Universal Isofix child’s seat shall be an-
                                chored to the proper lower metal rings
                                A-fig. 12, set between rear seat back and
                                cushion. The upper belt (provided with
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                the child’s seat) shall be then secured to
                                ring B-fig. 13 set in the boot at child’s seat
                                level.                                           fig. 11                              F0R0096m
                                                                                                                                 fig. 13                           F0R0098m
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                It is possible to mount at the same time
                                both the traditional restraint system and
                      CAR




                                the “Universal Isofix” one.                      Universal Isofix “Duo Plus” child seat is                         WARNING
                                                                                 available from Lineaccessori Fiat.                        Fit the child seat when the
                                Remember that in case of Universal Isofix
                                child’s seat, you can only use all those         For any further installation/use detail, re-              car is stationary. The child
     TECHNICAL




                                seats approved with the marking EEC              fer to the “Instructions Manual” that must       seat is correctly anchored to the
                                R44/03 “Universal Isofix”.                       be provided by the child restraint system        brackets when you hear the click. Fol-
                                                                                 Manufacturer.                                    low the instructions for assembly, dis-
                                                                                                                                  assembly and positioning that the
                                                                                                                                  manufacturer must supply with the
               IINDEX




                                                                                                                                  child seat.



            114
PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON                                                     FRONT AIRBAGS




                                                                                                                                                   AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                                    DASHBOARD
UNIVERSAL ISOFIX CHILD’S SEAT USE
The table below, according to EKE 16 European Directive, shows the different instal-              The car is provided with front airbags for
lation possibilities of Isofix restraint systems on seats fitted with Universal Isofix fas-       the driver and the passenger.
teners.                                                                                           The front driver / passenger air bags have




                                                                                                                                                   DEVICES
                                                                                                                                                   SAFETY
Weight group                     Orientation             Class            Isofix position         been designed to protect the occupants in
                                  child seat           Isofix size           rear side            the event of head-on crashes of medium-
                                                                                                  high severity, by placing the cushion be-
Group 0        0 to 10 kg      Facing backwards              E                   IL               tween the occupant and the steering




                                                                                                                                                   CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                                    OF THE CAR
                                                                                                  wheel or dashboard.
                               Facing backwards              E                   IL               Front air bags are designed to protect
                                                                                                  car’s occupants in front crashes and there-
Group 0+      0 to 13 kg       Facing backwards             D                    IL               fore non-activation in other types of col-




                                                                                                                                                   LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                  lisions (side collisions, rear shunts, roll-




                                                                                                                                                    MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                                    WARNING
                               Facing backwards             C                    IL               overs, etc.) is not a system malfunction.
                               Facing backwards             D                    IL               An electronic control unit will make the
                                                                                                  bag inflate in the event of a frontal crash.
                                                                                                  The bag will inflate instantaneously placing




                                                                                                                                                   EMERGENCY
                               Facing backwards             C                    IL




                                                                                                                                                     IN AN
                                                                                                  itself between the front occupant’s body
Group 1                                                                                           and the structures which could cause in-
                                Facing forwards              B                  IUF
to 9 up to 18 kg                                                                                  jury. It will deflate immediately afterwards.
                                Facing forwards             B1                  IUF




                                                                                                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                  Driver and passenger front airbags are not
                                                                                                  a replacement of but complementary to




                                                                                                                                                                      CAR
                                Facing forwards              A                  IUF
                                                                                                  the belts, which you are recommended to
                                                                                                  always wear, as specified by law in Europe
                                                                                                  and most non-European countries.
IUF: suitable for Isofix child restraint systems to be set facing forwards, universal class




                                                                                                                                                     TECHNICAL
     (fitted with third upper fastener), approved for the weight group.                           The volume of front air bags at max. in-
                                                                                                  flation fills most of the space between the
IL: suitable for special child restraint systems. Isofix type suitable and tested for this type   steering wheel and the driver and between
    of car. The seat may be installed by moving the front seat forward.                           the dashboard and the passenger.




                                                                                                                                                   INDEX
                                                                                                                                                  115
                                In the event of a collision, a person not
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                                                                   WARNING
                                wearing a seat belt may be thrown for-
                                ward and con into contact with the bag                  Do not apply stickers or oth-
                                before it has fully opened. The protection              er objects on the steering
                                offered by the cushion is reduced in such      wheel, passenger side airbag cover or
                                a case.                                        side upholstery on roof. Do not place
                                                                               objects on the passenger side dash-
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                Front air bag may not be activated in the      board because these could interfere
                                following situations:                          with the correct opening of the airbag
                                ❒ in collisions against highly deformable      (e.g. mobile phones) and cause severe
   CORRECT USE




                                                                               injury to occupants.
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                                                                   F0R0099m
                                  objects not affecting the car front sur-                                                     fig. 14
                                  face (e.g. bumper collision against guard
                                  rail, etc.);
                                ❒ jamming of the car underneath other          The airbags are not deployed in the event
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                  vehicles or protective barriers (e.g. un-    of collisions of low severity (for which the
                                  derneath a truck or a guard rail); in this   withholding action of the seat belts is suf-
                                  case, the bags would offer no addition-      ficient). For this reason, the seat belt must
                                  al protection with respect to the seat       be worn at all times. In the case of side
                                  belt and their deployment is unneces-
   EMERGENCY




                                                                               collisions, the seat belts hold occupants in
                                  sary. No deployment in such cases is
     IN AN




                                                                               the correct position and prevent being
                                  consequently not the sign of a fault.        thrown out of the car by a very violent
                                                                               collision.                                      fig. 15                             F0R0100m
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                               DRIVER’S FRONT AIR BAG fig. 14                  PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG
                      CAR




                                                                               It consists of an instant-inflating cushion     fig. 15
                                                                               contained in a special recess in the cen-       It consists of an instant-inflating cushion
                                                                               tre of the steering wheel.                      contained into a special recess in the
     TECHNICAL




                                                                                                                               dashboard, this cushion has a volume big-
                                                                                                                               ger than that of the driver.
               IINDEX




            116
                                           MANUAL DEACTIVATION OF




                                                                                                                                   AND CONTROLS
                  WARNING                                                                                  WARNING




                                                                                                                                    DASHBOARD
                                           PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG
          SEVERE DANGER: Do not                                                                    To deactivate the passen-
          arranged cradle child re-        AND SIDE BAG (where provided)                           ger’s front air bag and the
           straints facing backwards if    Should it be absolutely necessary to car-       Side Bag (where provided), refer to
           the passenger’s airbag is on.   ry a child on the front seat, the passenger’s   paragraphs “Digital display” and
           Deployment of the airbag in                                                     “Multifunctional display” in section




                                                                                                                                   DEVICES
                                           front air bag and the Side Bag (where pro-




                                                                                                                                   SAFETY
           an accident could cause fa-     vided) can be deactivated.                      “Dashboard and controls”.
tal injuries to the baby. Always deac-
tivate the passenger’s airbag when         The instrument panel warning light F
                                           will stay on glowing steadily until reacti-




                                                                                                                                   CORRECT USE
placing a child seat on the front seat.




                                                                                                                                    OF THE CAR
Move the passenger’s seat as far back      vating the passenger’s front air bag and the
as possible to avoid contact between       Side Bag (where provided).
the cradle and the dashboard. Al-
though this is not mandatory by law,




                                                                                                                                   LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                    MESSAGES
the airbag should be immediately re-




                                                                                                                                    WARNING
activated when children are no longer
carried to ensure better protection to
adults.




                                                                                                                                   EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                     IN AN
                                                                                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                     TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                   INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                  117
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   SIDE AIRBAGS
                                The car is fitted with front side bags for
                                driver and passenger (where provided) for
                                protecting the chest and window bags
                                (where provided) for protecting front and
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                rear passengers’ head.
                                Side bags (where provided) protect car
                                occupants from side crashes of medium-
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                high severity, by placing the cushion be-       fig. 16                             F0R0153m
                                                                                                                               fig. 17                               F0R0102m

                                tween the occupant and the internal parts
                                of the side structure of the car.               FRONT SIDE BAGS - CHEST                        SIDE WINDOW BAGS - HEAD
                                Non-activation of side bags in other types      AND PELVIS ZONE                                PROTECTION fig. 17
LIGHTS AND




                                of collisions (front collisions, rear shunts,   PROTECTION fig. 16                             (where provided)
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                roll-overs, etc...) is not a system malfunc-    (where provided)
                                tion.                                                                                          They consist of two “drop-down” cush-
                                                                                Front side bags are housed in the seat back    ions, one on the right and the other on the
                                In case of side crash, an electronic control    rests, they consist of an instant inflation    left side of the car, located behind the side
                                unit, when required triggers the inflation
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                cushion designed to increase protection        coverings of the roof and covered by
     IN AN




                                of the cushion. The cushion immediately         of the occupants’ chest and pelvis zone in     proper finishing.
                                inflates, placing itself as a protection, be-   the event of a side crash of medium-high
                                tween the occupant’s body and the struc-                                                       Window bags have been designed for pro-
                                                                                severity.                                      tecting the head of front and rear occu-
                                ture that could cause injuries. Immediate-
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                ly after, the cushion deflates.                                                                pants in the event of side crash, thanks to
                                                                                                                               the wide cushion inflation surface.
                      CAR




                                Side bags (where provided) are not a re-
                                placement of but complementary to the                                                          IMPORTANT In the event of side crash,
                                belts, which you are recommended to al-                                                        you can obtain the best protection by the
                                ways wear, as specified by law in Europe                                                       system keeping a correct position on the
     TECHNICAL




                                and most non-European countries.                                                               seat, allowing thus a correct window bag
                                                                                                                               unfolding.
               IINDEX




            118
IMPORTANT The front air bags and/or            If you are having the car scrapped, have      GENERAL WARNINGS




                                                                                                                                        AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                         DASHBOARD
side bags may be deployed if the car is sub-   the air bag system deactivated at a Fiat
ject to heavy knocks or accidents involv-      Dealership first. If the car changes own-                      WARNING
ing the underbody area, such as for ex-        ership, the new owner must be informed
ample violent shocks, against steps, kerbs     of the method of use of air bags and the               If when turning the key to
or low obstacles, falling of the car in big    above warnings and also be given this                  MAR the warning light ¬
                                                                                             does not turn on or if it stays on when




                                                                                                                                        DEVICES
                                                                                                                                        SAFETY
holes or sags in the road.                     “Owner’s Handbook”.
                                                                                             travelling (together with the message
IMPORTANT A small amount of dust will          IMPORTANT Pretensioners, front airbags        on the multifunctional display, where
be released when the airbags are de-           and front side bags are deployed accord-      provided) there could be a failure in
ployed. The dust is not harmful and does       ing to different logics on the basic of the




                                                                                                                                        CORRECT USE
                                                                                             safety systems; in this event air bags




                                                                                                                                         OF THE CAR
not indicate the beginning of a fire. Fur-     type of collision. Non deployment of one      or pretensioners could not trigger in
thermore, the surface of the deployed bag      of the devices does not therefore indicate    case of impact or, in a minor number
and the interior of the car may be covered     a system fault.                               of cases, they could trigger acciden-
in a dusty residue: this dust may irritate                                                   tally. Contact Fiat Dealership imme-




                                                                                                                                        LIGHTS AND
the skin and the eyes. Wash with mild




                                                                                                                                         MESSAGES
                                                                                             diately to have the system checked.




                                                                                                                                         WARNING
soap and water in the event of exposure.
The expiration date of the explosive                           WARNING
charge and the clock wire are shown on a                Never rest head, arms and




                                                                                                                                        EMERGENCY
specific label contained in the oddment                 elbows on the door, on the
                                                                                                             WARNING




                                                                                                                                          IN AN
compartment. Go to a Fiat Dealership           windows and in the window bag area
to have the devices replaced when the ex-      to prevent possible injuries during in-                Do not cover the backrest of
piration date approaches.                      flation phase.                                         front and rear seats with
                                                                                             trims or covers that are not suitable




                                                                                                                                        SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IMPORTANT Should an accident occur in                                                        to be used with side bags.
which any of the safety devices is activat-




                                                                                                                                                           CAR
ed, take the car to a Fiat Dealership to
have the devices activated replaced and to                      WARNING
have the system checked.
                                                         Never lean head, arms and




                                                                                                                                          TECHNICAL
All inspection, repair and replacement op-                                                                   WARNING
                                                         elbows out of window.
erations concerning the air bags must on-                                                             Never travel with objects on
ly be carried out c/o Fiat Dealership.                                                                your lap, in front of your
                                                                                             chest or with a pipe, pencil, etc. be-
                                                                                             tween your lips; injury may result in




                                                                                                                                        INDEX
                                                                                             the event of the air bag being trig-
                                                                                             gered.

                                                                                                                                       119
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                    WARNING                                    WARNING                                    WARNING
                                          Always drive holding your                 Have the airbag system                      The airbag deployment
                                          hands on the steering wheel               checked by a Fiat Dealership                threshold is higher than that
                                rim so that the airbag can inflate         if the car was stolen, if theft was at-   of the pretensioners. For collisions in
                                freely in the case of need. Do not dri-    tempted, or if the car was subjected      the range between the two thresh-
                                ve with your body bent forward. Keep       to vandalism or flooding.                 olds, it is normal for only the preten-
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                your back straight against the back                                                  sioners to be activated.
                                rest.
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                            WARNING
                                                                                     When the key is turned to                      WARNING
                                                  WARNING                            MAR warning light F (with               Do not hook rigid objects to
                                          Airbags may be deployed if       passenger front airbag activate) will             the coat hooks and to the
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES




                                          another vehicle crashes if the
 WARNING




                                                                           blink for a few seconds to remind you     support handles.
                                key is inserted and at MAR also if the     that the airbag will be deployed in the
                                engine is not running and the car is       event of a collision after which it
                                stationary. For this reason, children      should go out.
                                must never sit on the front seat, even
   EMERGENCY




                                if the car is not moving. On the oth-                                                                 WARNING
     IN AN




                                er hand, if the key is inserted and at                                                        Airbags do not replace seat
                                STOP, none of the safety devices                                                              belts but increase their effi-
                                (airbag or pretensioners) will be de-                      WARNING                   ciency. Furthermore, since front
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                ployed in a collision. Non deployment               Do not wash the seats with       airbags are not deployed in low speed
                                of the devices in this case does not in-
                      CAR




                                                                                    pressurised water or steam       collisions, side collisions, rear-end
                                dicate a system fault.                     (by hand or in automatic seat wash-       shunts or roll-overs, the occupants are
                                                                           ing stations).                            only protected by the seat belts which
                                                                                                                     must be fastened at all times.
     TECHNICAL
               IINDEX




            120
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR




                                                                                                           AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                            DASHBOARD
            ENGINE STARTING ........................................................... 122
            PARKING................................................................................ 125




                                                                                                           DEVICES
                                                                                                           SAFETY
            USING THE MANUAL GEARBOX ................................. 126
            CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS................................. 127
            SNOW TYRES ....................................................................... 131




                                                                                                           CORRECT USE
                                                                                                            OF THE CAR
            SNOW CHAINS ................................................................... 131
            CAR INACTIVITY ............................................................... 132




                                                                                                           LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                            MESSAGES
                                                                                                            WARNING
                                                                                                           EMERGENCY
                                                                                                             IN AN
                                                                                                           SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                             TECHNICAL
                                                                                                           INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                          121
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   ENGINE STARTING                                           Do not leave the key in the ig-
                                                                                                                            STARTING PROCEDURE FOR
                                                                                          nition switch with the engine     PETROL VERSIONS
                                The car is provided with an electronic en-                off to avoid unnecessary con-     Proceed as follows:
                                gine lock device: refer to “The Fiat CODE                 sumption of electricity which
                                system” paragraph in “Dashboard and              could drain the battery. It is dangerous   ❒ ensure that the handbrake is up;
                                controls” if you cannot start the engine.        to run the engine in closed environ-       ❒ put the gear lever into neutral;
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                The engine may be noisier during the first       ments.
                                                                                                                            ❒ press the clutch pedal down to the
                                seconds of operation, particularly after a                                                    floor without touching the accelerator;
                                long period of inactivity. This is charac-
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                                                            ❒ turn the ignition key to AVV and let
    OF THE CAR




                                teristic of hydraulic tappets, the timing sys-
                                tem chosen to reduce the number of ser-                           WARNING                     it go the moment the engine starts.
                                vicing interventions and does effects nei-                Running the engine in con-
                                ther functionality nor reliability.                                                         If the engine does not start at the first at-
                                                                                          fined areas is extremely dan-     tempt, return the ignition key to STOP
                                                                                 gerous. The engine consumes oxygen
LIGHTS AND




                                                                                                                            before repeating starting.
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                 and produces carbon monoxide
                                                                                 which is a highly toxic and lethal gas.
                                         It is advisable not to demand
                                         maximum performance from
   EMERGENCY




                                         your car (e.g. excessive accel-
     IN AN




                                         erations, long distances at top
                                rpm, excessive intense braking, etc.) as                         WARNING
                                soon as the engine is started.                           Remember that the brake
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                         booster and power steering
                                                                                 are not operational until the engine
                      CAR




                                                                                 has been started, therefore much ef-
                                                                                 fort than usual is required on the
                                                                                 brake pedal and steering wheel.
     TECHNICAL
               INDEX




            122
If, when the ignition key is at MAR, the in-   STARTING PROCEDURE FOR                      If the engine does not start at the first at-




                                                                                                                                            AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                             DASHBOARD
strument panel warning light Y remains         DIESEL VERSIONS                             tempt, return the ignition key to STOP
lit together with warning light U turn the                                                 before repeating starting.
key to STOP and then back to MAR; re-          Proceed as follows:
main on, try with the other keys provid-                                                   If, when the ignition key is at MAR , the
                                               ❒ ensure that the handbrake is up;          instrument panel warning light Y re-
ed with the car.
                                               ❒ put the gear lever into neutral;          mains lit together with warning light m




                                                                                                                                            DEVICES
                                                                                                                                            SAFETY
IMPORTANT if Y on the instrument                                                           turn the key to STOP and then back to
panel remains on and steady, go to a Fiat      ❒ turn the ignition key to MAR; instru-     MAR; if the warning lights remain on, try
Dealership immediately.                          ment panel warning lights m and Y         with the other keys provided with the car.
                                                 will light up;




                                                                                                                                            CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                             OF THE CAR
IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition key                                                     IMPORTANT If the instrument panel
to MAR when the engine is off.                 ❒ wait for the warning light Y e mto        warning light Y stays on glowing
                                                 turn off. The hotter the engine is, the   steadily, contact immediately Fiat Deal-
                                                 quicker this will happen;                 ership.
                                               ❒ press the clutch pedal down to the




                                                                                                                                            LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                             MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                             WARNING
                                                                                           IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition key
                                                 floor without touching the accelerator;   to MAR when the engine is off.
                                               ❒ turn the ignition key to AVV as soon
                                                 as warning light m goes out. Waiting




                                                                                                                                            EMERGENCY
                                                 too long will waste the work done by




                                                                                                                                              IN AN
                                                 the glow plugs. Release the key as soon             Warning light m will blink
                                                 as the engine starts.                               for 60 seconds after starting
                                                                                                     or during prolonged cranking
                                                                                                     to indicate a fault to the glow




                                                                                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                           plug heating system. Use the car nor-




                                                                                                                                                               CAR
                                                                                           mally if the engine starts and go to a
                                                                                           Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.




                                                                                                                                              TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                            INDEX
                                                                                                                                           123
                                HOW TO WARM UP THE                                                                      STOPPING THE ENGINE
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                                                                       Never jump start the engine
                                ENGINE AFTER IT HAS JUST                               by pushing, towing or driving    Turn the ignition to STOP while the en-
                                STARTED                                                downhill. This could cause a     gine is idling.
                                (petrol and diesel engines)                            flow of fuel into the catalyt-
                                                                              ic converter and damage it beyond re-     IMPORTANT After a taxing drive, you
                                Proceed as follows:                                                                     should allow the engine to “catch its
                                                                              pair.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                ❒ drive off slowly, letting the engine turn                                             breath” before turning it off by letting it
                                  at medium revs. Do not accelerate                                                     idle to allow the temperature in the en-
                                  abruptly;                                                                             gine compartment to fall.
   CORRECT USE




                                ❒ do not demand to performance for the
    OF THE CAR




                                  first few kilometres. Wait until the en-
                                  gine coolant gauge starts moving.
                                                                                                                                  A quick burst on the acceler-
                                                                                                                                  ator before turning off the en-
LIGHTS AND




                                                                                                                                  gine serves absolutely no
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                                                                  practical purpose, it wastes
                                         Remember that the brake                                                        fuel and is damaging especially to tur-
                                         booster and power steering                                                     bocharged engines.
                                         are not operational until the
   EMERGENCY




                                         engine has been started,
     IN AN




                                therefore much effort than usual is re-
                                quired on the brake pedal and steering
                                wheel.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




            124
PARKING THE CAR                                                                                 Proceed as followed to release the hand-




                                                                                                                                               AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                                DASHBOARD
                                                                                                brake:
Proceed as follows:                                                                             ❒ slightly lift the handbrake and press re-
❒ stop the engine and engage the hand-                                                            lease button A;
  brake;                                                                                        ❒ hold button A pressed and lower the




                                                                                                                                               DEVICES
                                                                                                                                               SAFETY
❒ engage a gear (on a slope, engage first                                                         lever. Warning light x on the instru-
  gear if the car is faced uphill or reverse                                                      ment panel will go out.
  if it is faced downhill) and leave the                                                        Press the brake pedal when carrying out
  wheels steered.




                                                                                                                                               CORRECT USE
                                                                                                this operation to prevent the car from




                                                                                                                                                OF THE CAR
                                                                                     F0R0103m
                                               fig. 1
If the car is parked on a steep slope, it is                                                    moving accidentally.
further advisable to block the wheels with     HANDBRAKE fig. 1
a wedge or stone. Do not leave the key in
the ignition switch to prevent draining the    The handbrake lever is located between




                                                                                                                                               LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                                MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                                WARNING
battery. Always remove the key when you        the two front seats.
leave the car.                                 Pull the lever upwards to operate the
                                               handbrake. Four or five notches are nor-
                                               mally sufficient to lock the car on flat ter-




                                                                                                                                               EMERGENCY
                                               rain, while nine or ten may be necessary




                                                                                                                                                 IN AN
                WARNING                        on a steep slope with the car loaded.
         Never leave children unat-
         tended in the car. Always re-         IMPORTANT If this is not the case, con-
move the ignition key when leaving             tact Fiat Dealership to have the handbrake




                                                                                                                                               SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
the car and take it out with you.              adjusted.




                                                                                                                                                                  CAR
                                               When the handbrake lever is pulled up
                                               and the ignition key is at MAR, the in-
                                               strument panel warning light x will turn
                                               on.




                                                                                                                                                 TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                               INDEX
                                                                                                                                              125
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   USING THE MANUAL
                                GEARBOX
                                To engage the gears, press the clutch ped-
                                al fully and shift the gear lever into one of
   DEVICES




                                the required positions (the diagram is
   SAFETY




                                shown on the knob fig. 2-3).
                                IMPORTANT Reverse may only be en-
                                gaged when the car is at a standstill. With
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                   F0R0154m                                    F0R0105m
                                the engine running, wait for at least 2 sec-    fig. 2 - 1.4 version                          fig. 3 - 1.3 Multijet version
                                onds with the clutch pedal fully pressed
                                before engaging reverse to prevent dam-         IMPORTANT The clutch pedal must be                              WARNING
                                age to the gears and grating.                   used for gear shift only. Never drive with
                                                                                the foot resting, even if slightly, on the               Press the clutch pedal fully
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                Version 1.4: to engage reverse R from neu-      clutch pedal. For versions / markets where               to change gears correctly.
                                tral position, lift the sliding ring A under    applicable, the clutch pedal control elec-     For this reason, there must be no ob-
                                the knob and shift the lever rightwards and     tronics can intervene interpreting the         stacles on the floor under the pedals:
                                then back fig. 2.                               wrong drive style as a fault.                  make sure that mat are always flat
                                                                                                                               and do not interfere with the pedals.
   EMERGENCY




                                Version 1.3 Multijet: to engage reverse R
     IN AN




                                from neutral position, shift the lever right-
                                wards and then back fig. 2.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                                                      Do not drive with your hand
                      CAR




                                                                                                                                      resting on the gear lever as
                                                                                                                                      the force exerted, even if
                                                                                                                                      slight, could lead over time to
                                                                                                                              premature wear on the gearbox inter-
     TECHNICAL




                                                                                                                              nal components.
               INDEX




            126
CONTAINING                                   Roof rack/ski rack                           DRIVING STYLE




                                                                                                                                             AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                              DASHBOARD
RUNNING COSTS                                Remove the roof rack or the ski rack from
                                                                                          Starting
                                             the roof after use. These accessories de-
Here are some suggestions which may          crease aerodynamic penetration of the car    Do not warm the engine up with the car
help you to keep the running costs of your   and have a negative effect on consumption.   standing: the engine warms up very slow-
                                             It is better to use a trailer to transport




                                                                                                                                             DEVICES
car down and lower the amount of toxic                                                    ly in these conditions, increasing con-




                                                                                                                                             SAFETY
emissions released into the atmosphere.      particularly bulky objects.                  sumption and emissions. It is advisable to
                                                                                          start off immediately and slowly keeping
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS                       Electric devices                             the engine speed down: the engine will




                                                                                                                                             CORRECT USE
                                                                                          warm up much faster this way.




                                                                                                                                              OF THE CAR
                                             Use electric devices only for the amount
Car maintenance                              of time needed. Rear heated window, ad-
                                             ditional headlights, windscreen wipers and   Unnecessary actions
Have checks and adjustments carried out
in accordance with the “Service schedule”.   heater fan need a considerable amount of     Avoid revving up when starting at traffic
                                             energy, therefore increasing the require-




                                                                                                                                             LIGHTS AND
                                                                                          lights or before stopping the engine. The




                                                                                                                                              MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                              WARNING
                                             ment of current increases fuel consump-      latter action, like doubling the clutch, is un-
Tyres                                        tion (up to +25% in the urban cycle).        necessary and causes increase of con-
Check tyre pressure regularly at least                                                    sumption and pollution.
once every four weeks: excessively low       Climate control




                                                                                                                                             EMERGENCY
pressure will increase consumption be-                                                    Gear selection




                                                                                                                                               IN AN
cause rolling resistance will be higher.     The climate control system requires high-
                                             er fuel consumption (up to +20% in av-       Use a higher gear as soon as traffic and
                                             erage): use the air vents when the exter-    road conditions allow. Using a low gear
Unnecessary loads                            nal temperature allows to.                   for faster acceleration will increase con-




                                                                                                                                             SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
Do not travel with too much luggage                                                       sumption.




                                                                                                                                                                CAR
stowed in the boot. The weight of the car    Spoilers
(especially when driving in town) and its                                                 In the same way improper use of a high
trim greatly affects consumption and sta-    The use of non-certified aerodynamic         gear increases consumption, emissions an
bility.                                      items may adversely affect air drag and      engine wear.




                                                                                                                                               TECHNICAL
                                             consumption levels.




                                                                                                                                             INDEX
                                                                                                                                            127
                                Top speed                                   CONDITIONS OF USE                              TOWING TRAILERS
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                Fuel consumption considerably increases
                                as speed increases. Keep your speed as      Cold starting                                  IMPORTANT NOTES
                                even as possible, avoiding unnecessary      Short distances and frequent cold start-ups    The car must be provided with a type-ap-
                                braking and acceleration which cause ex-    will prevent the engine from reaching op-      proved tow hitch and adequate electrical
                                cessive fuel consumption and increase
   DEVICES




                                                                                                                           system to tow caravans or trailers. Instal-
   SAFETY




                                                                            timal running temperature. Consequently,
                                emissions.                                  both consumption (from +15 to +30% on          lation must be performed by specialised
                                                                            urban cycle ) and emissions will increase.     personnel who will issue the required pa-
                                Acceleration                                                                               pers for travelling on roads.
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                Sudden acceleration has a very negative     Traffic and                                    Install any specific and/or additional rear-
                                effect on consumptions and emissions: ac-   road conditions                                view mirrors as specified by law.
                                celerate gradually and do not go over the   Rather high consumption is caused by
                                maximum torque ratio.                                                                      Remember that when towing a trailer,
                                                                            heavy traffic, for instance when travelling    steep hills are harder to climb, the brak-
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                            in a queue with frequent use of low gears      ing spaces increase and overtaking takes
                                                                            or in cities with many traffic lights. Moun-   longer depending on the overall weight.
                                                                            tain and rough roads also have a negative
                                                                            effect on consumption.                         Engage a low gear when driving downhill,
                                                                                                                           rather than constantly using the brake.
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                                            Traffic hold-ups                               The weight of the trailer on the car’s tow
                                                                            During prolonged hold-ups (level crossings)    hitch will reduce the loading capacity of
                                                                            the engine should be switched off.             the car by the same amount. Consider the
                                                                                                                           weight of the car at full load, including ac-
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                                           cessories and luggage to make sure you do
                      CAR




                                                                                                                           not exceed the maximum towable weight
                                                                                                                           (shown on the log book).
     TECHNICAL
               INDEX




            128
Respect the speed limits specific for each       INSTALLING THE TOW                             An electric brake should be supplied di-




                                                                                                                                                 AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                                  DASHBOARD
country for vehicles towing trailers. In all     HOOK                                           rectly by the battery through a cable with
cases, the top speed must not exceed 100                                                        a cross section of no less than 2.5 mm2.
km/h.                                            The towing device should be fastened to
                                                 the body by specialised personnel accord-      IMPORTANT Electric brake or other de-
Fit a suitable towing stabilizer to the trail-   ing to any additional and/or integrative in-   vice shall be used with running engine.
er to be towed.                                  formation supplied by the Manufacturer of




                                                                                                                                                 DEVICES
                                                                                                                                                 SAFETY
                                                                                                In addition to the electrical branches, the
                                                 the device.                                    car’s electric system can only be con-
                                                 The towing device must meet current reg-       nected to the supply cable for an electric
                                                 ulations with reference to 94/20/EEC           brake and to the cable for an internal light,




                                                                                                                                                 CORRECT USE
                  WARNING




                                                                                                                                                  OF THE CAR
                                                 Directive and subsequent amendments.           though not above 15W.
          The ABS with which the car
          may be equipped will not               For any version the towing device used         For connections use the preset control
control the braking system of the                must match the towable weight of the car       unit with battery cable no less than 2.5
trailer. Particular caution is required          on which it is to be installed.                mm2.




                                                                                                                                                 LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                                  MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                                  WARNING
on slippery roads.                               For the electric connection a unified con-
                                                 nector should be used which is generally
                                                 placed on a special bracket normally fas-
                                                 tened to the towing device, and a special




                                                                                                                                                 EMERGENCY
                                                 ECU for external trailer light control shall




                                                                                                                                                   IN AN
                 WARNING                         be installed on the car.
         Never modify the braking
         system of the car to control            For the electrical connection, 7 or 13 pin
the trailer brake. The trailer braking           12VDC connection is to be used (CU-




                                                                                                                                                 SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
system must be fully independent                 NA/UNI and ISO/DIN Standards). Follow




                                                                                                                                                                    CAR
from the hydraulic system of the car.            the instructions provided by the car man-
                                                 ufacturer and/or the tow hitch manufac-
                                                 turer.




                                                                                                                                                   TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                                 INDEX
                                                                                                                                                129
                                                                                                                                Assembly diagram fig. 3
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                                                                                                                The tow hook structure must be fastened
                                                                                                                                in the points shown by the symbol Ø us-
                                                                                                                                ing a total of 6 M8 screws and 2 M10
                                                                                                                                screws.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                                                                                The internal back plates are to be at least
                                                                                                                                6 mm thick.




                                                                                                           To load
                                                                                                                                The hook should be fastened to the body
                                     Existing screw
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                                                                avoiding any type of drilling and trimming
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                                of the rear bumpers that remains visible
                                                            Existing screw                                                      when the hook is removed.
                                                                                                                                IMPORTANT It is compulsory to fasten a
                                                                                                                                label (plainly visible) of suitable size and
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                                                                material with the following wording:
                                                                                                                                MAX LOAD ON BALL 70 kg
                                                                               Existing hole
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                                                                                                                 WARNING
                                           Existing screw




                                                                                               Type-approved ball
                                                                                                                                        After fitting, screw holes
                                                                                                                                        shall be sealed to prevent ex-
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                                                haust gas inlet.
                      CAR




                                                                              Existing hole
     TECHNICAL




                                         Existing screw




                                                             Existing screw
               INDEX




                                                                                                                     F0R0190m
                                fig. 3
            130
SNOW TYRES                                      IMPORTANT When snow tyres are used             SNOW CHAINS




                                                                                                                                              AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                               DASHBOARD
                                                with a max speed index below the one
Use snow tyres of the same size as the          that can be reached by the car (increased      Use of snow chains should be in compli-
normal tyres provided with the car.             by 5%), place a notice in the passenger’s      ance with local regulations.
                                                compartment, plainly in the driver’s view
Fiat Dealership will be happy to provide        which states the max permissible speed of      The snow chains may be applied only on-




                                                                                                                                              DEVICES
                                                                                                                                              SAFETY
advice concerning the most suitable type        the snow tyres (as per EC Directive).          to the front wheel tyres (drive wheels).
of tyre for the customer’s requirements.                                                       Use of Lineaccessori Fiat snow chains is
                                                All four tyres should be the same (brand       recommended.
For the type of tyre to be used, inflation      and track) to ensure greater safety when
pressures and the specifications of snow                                                       Check the tension of the chains after the




                                                                                                                                              CORRECT USE
                                                driving and braking and better driveability.




                                                                                                                                               OF THE CAR
tyres, follow the instructions given in para-                                                  first few metres have been driven.
graph “Wheels” in section “Technical            Remember that it is inappropriate to
specifications”.                                change the direction of rotation of tyres.     IMPORTANT With snow chains, use the
                                                                                               accelerator with extreme care to prevent
The performance of these tyres is con-                                                         or to limit as much as possible slipping of




                                                                                                                                              LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                               MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                               WARNING
siderably reduced when the tread depth                                                         the driving wheels that could cause chain
is less than 4 mm. Replace them in this                          WARNING                       breaking resulting in damages to the car
case.                                                                                          body or mechanical components.
                                                          The max speed for snow
Due to their specific features, the perfor-               tyres with “Q” marking is            IMPORTANT Use low-clearance 9 mm




                                                                                                                                              EMERGENCY
mance of snow tyres is much lower than          160 km/h; 190 km/h for tyres with “T”          snow chains.




                                                                                                                                                IN AN
that of normal types in normal conditions       marking and 210 km/h for tyres with
or long motorway stretches. Limit per-          H marking. The Road Traffic Code
formance according the use for which they       speed limits must however be always




                                                                                                                                              SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
were approved.                                  strictly observed.




                                                                                                                                                TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                              INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                             131
                                                                        CAR INACTIVITY                                 ❒ cover the car with a fabric or perfo-
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                  WARNING
                                                                                                                         rated plastic terrapin. Do not use com-
                                        Chains cannot be applied to                                                      pact plastic sheets which do not allow
                                        tyre 205/45 R17 88V.            If the car is to be left inactive for longer
                                                                        than a month, the following precautions          humidity to evaporate from the surface
                                                                        should be noted:                                 of the car;
                                                                        ❒ park the car in covered, dry and if pos-     ❒ inflate tyres to +0.5 bar above the nor-
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                          sible well-ventilated premises;                mal specified pressure and check it at
                                               WARNING                                                                   intervals;
                                                                        ❒ engage a gear;
                                        Keep your speed down when                                                      ❒ if you don’t disconnect the battery from
   CORRECT USE




                                                                        ❒ check that the handbrake is not en-
    OF THE CAR




                                         snow chains are fitted. Do                                                      the electric system, check its charge
                                         not exceed 50 km/h. Avoid        gaged;                                         every month (see paragraph “Charge
                                         potholes, steps and pave-                                                       level check” in chapter “Maintenance
                                         ments and avoid also to dri-   ❒ disconnect the negative battery termi-
                                                                          nal and check battery charge (see para-        and care”);
                                         ve for long distances on
LIGHTS AND




                                                                          graph “Charge level check” in chapter        ❒ recharge the battery if necessary (see
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                roads not covered with snow to pre-
                                vent damaging the car and the             “Maintenance and care”). Repeat this           paragraph “If the battery is flat” in chap-
                                roadbed.                                  check once every three months dur-             ter “In an emergency”);
                                                                          ing storage. Recharge the battery if nec-
                                                                          essary (see paragraph “If the battery is     ❒ do not drain the engine cooling system.
   EMERGENCY




                                                                          flat” in chapter “In an emergency”);         IMPORTANT Where relevant, switch off
     IN AN




                                                                        ❒ clean and protect the painted parts us-      the car alarm with the remote control.
                                                                          ing protective wax;
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                        ❒ clean and protect the shiny metal parts
                                                                          using special compounds readily avail-
                      CAR




                                                                          able;
                                                                        ❒ sprinkle talcum powder on the rubber
                                                                          windscreen and rear window wiper
     TECHNICAL




                                                                          blades and lift them off the glass;
                                                                        ❒ slightly open the windows;
               INDEX




            132
                           WA R N I N G L I G H T S A N D M E S S A G E S




                                                                                                                                                                                          AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                                                                           DASHBOARD
GENERAL WARNINGS .....................................................                134   FIAT CODE PROTECTION
                                                                                            SYSTEM FAILURE..................................................................       140
LOW BRAKE FLUID ............................................................          134




                                                                                                                                                                                          DEVICES
                                                                                                                                                                                          SAFETY
                                                                                            EXTERNAL LIGHTS FAILURE...........................................                     141
HANDBRAKE ON................................................................          134
AIR BAG FAILURE................................................................       135   REAR FOG LIGHTS..............................................................          141




                                                                                                                                                                                          CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                                                                           OF THE CAR
HOT                                                                                         GENERIC FAILURE INDICATION .................................                           141
ENGINE COOLANT ...........................................................            135
                                                                                            ESP SYSTEM FAILURE ........................................................            142
LOW BATTERY CHARGE .................................................                  136
                                                                                            BRAKE PAD WEAR ............................................................            142




                                                                                                                                                                                          LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                                                                           MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                                                                           WARNING
LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE..........................................                     136
                                                                                            PARKING SENSOR FAILURE ............................................                    143
INCOMPLETE DOOR LOCKING....................................                           137
                                                                                            SIDELIGHTS AND LOW BEAMS .....................................                         143
SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED..........................................                     137




                                                                                                                                                                                          EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                                                                            IN AN
EBD SYSTEM FAILURE ........................................................           137   FOLLOW ME HOME ...........................................................             143

INJECTION SYSTEM FAILURE                                                                    FRONT FOG LIGHTS ........................................................              143
(DIESEL VERSIONS) ............................................................        138




                                                                                                                                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                            LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR........................                                  143




                                                                                                                                                                                                             CAR
EOBD SYSTEM FAILURE (PETROL VERSIONS) .........                                       138
                                                                                            RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR....................                                     143
FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG DEACTIVATED...........                                         139
                                                                                            CRUISE CONTROL ............................................................            143




                                                                                                                                                                                            TECHNICAL
ABS SYSTEM FAILURE.........................................................           139
                                                                                            MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS ...............................................                   143
FUEL RESERVE.......................................................................   139
GLOW PLUG WARMING ................................................                    140   POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE ON THE ROAD ...........                                       144




                                                                                                                                                                                          INDEX
GLOW PLUG WARMING FAILURE ...............................                             140   LIMITED RANGE .................................................................        144

WATER IN DIESEL FUEL FILTER .....................................                     140   ASR SYSTEM .........................................................................   144
                                                                                                                                                                                         133
   AND CONTROLS
                                WARNING LIGHTS                                             LOW BRAKE FLUID                     Handbrake on
                                                                                 x
    DASHBOARD
                                                                                           LEVEL (red)
                                AND MESSAGES                                                                                   The warning light turns on when the hand-
                                                                                           HANDBRAKE ON (red)                  brake is on.
                                GENERAL WARNINGS                                                                               On certain versions, if the car is moving
                                                                                Turning the ignition key to MAR the            the buzzer will also sound.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                Lighting of a warning light is associated to    warning light turns on, but it should go off
                                a specific message and/or buzzer when ap-       after few seconds.                             IMPORTANT If the warning light turns on
                                plicable. These indications are brief and                                                      when travelling, check that the handbrake
                                precautionary and as such must non be                                                          is not engaged.
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                considered as exhaustive and/or alterna-        Low brake fluid level
                                tive to the information contained in the
                                Owner’s Handbook, which you are rec-            The warning light turns on when the lev-
                                ommended to read carefully in all cases.        el of the brake fluid in the reservoir falls
                                Refer to the information in this chap-          below the minimum level, due to possi-
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                ter in the event of a failure indication.       ble leak in the circuit.
                                IMPORTANT Failure indications on the            On certain versions the dedicated message
                                display fall into either of two categories:     is displayed.
                                serious faults and less serious faults.
   EMERGENCY




                                Very serious failures are indicated by a
     IN AN




                                repeated and prolonged warning “cycle”.
                                                                                                 WARNING
                                Less serious failures are indicated by a lim-
                                ited warning “cycle”.                                    If the warning light x turns
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                         on when travelling (on cer-
                                Press MENU ESC to stop the warning              tain versions together with the mes-
                      CAR




                                cycle in both cases. The warning light on       sage on the display) stop the car im-
                                the instrument panel will stay on until the     mediately and contact Fiat Dealer-
                                cause of the fault is eliminated.               ship.
     TECHNICAL
               INDEX




            134
           AIR BAG FAILURE                                                                         HOT ENGINE




                                                                                                                                      AND CONTROLS
                                                              WARNING
 ¬




                                                                                                                                       DASHBOARD
           (red)
                                                      If when turning the key to           ç       COOLANT (red)
                                                      MAR the warning light ¬
         Turning the ignition key to         does not turn on or if it stays on when             Turning the ignition key to
MAR the warning light turns on, but it       travelling (together with the message      MAR the warning light turns on, but it
should go off after few seconds.             on the multifunctional display, where      should go off after few seconds.




                                                                                                                                      DEVICES
                                                                                                                                      SAFETY
The warning light stays on steady if there   provided) there could be a failure in      The warning light turns on when the en-
is a failure in the airbag system.           safety systems; in this event air bags     gine is overheated.
                                             or pretensioners may not be deployed
On certain versions the dedicated message                                               If the warning light comes on, proceed as




                                                                                                                                      CORRECT USE
                                             in case of impact or, in a minor num-




                                                                                                                                       OF THE CAR
is displayed.                                ber of cases, they be deployed acci-       follows:
                                             dentally. Contact Fiat Dealership im-      ❒ during normal travel: stop the car,
                                             mediately to have the system checked.        stop the engine and check that the wa-
                                                                                          ter level in the vessel is not under the




                                                                                                                                      LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                       MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                       WARNING
                                                                                          MIN line. In this case, wait for a few
                                                                                          minutes for the engine to cool down
                                                                                          when slowly and carefully open the
                                                              WARNING                     cap, top-up with coolant and check
                                                      Failure of warning light ¬          that the level is between the MIN and




                                                                                                                                      EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                        IN AN
                                                      (warning light off) is indicat-     MAX references on the vessel itself.
                                             ed by warning light F which will             Also check for leakages. Go to a Fiat
                                             blink for longer than the normal 4           Dealership if the warning should come
                                             seconds indicating that the front pas-       on when the engine is started again.




                                                                                                                                      SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                             senger airbag is off.




                                                                                                                                        TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                      INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                     135
                                ❒ In the case of demanding use (e.g.                      LOW BATTERY                                   LOW ENGINE OIL
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                  towing trailers uphill or car at full
                                  load): slow down and stop the car if         w          CHARGE (red)                         v        PRESSURE (red)
                                  the warning light stays on. Stand for                 Turning the ignition key to                    Turning the ignition key to
                                  2 or 3 minutes with the engine running      MAR the warning light turns on, but it          MAR the warning light turns on, but it
                                  and slightly accelerated to promote a       should go out as soon as the engine is          should go out as soon as the engine is
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                  better circulation of coolant. Then         started (with the engine running at idle        started.
                                  stop the engine. Check correct liquid       speed a brief delay in going out is allowed).
                                  level as described above.                                                                   On certain versions the dedicated message
                                                                              Go to a Fiat Dealership immediately if the      is displayed.
                                IMPORTANT Under severe use of the
   CORRECT USE




                                                                              warning light stays on either steady or
    OF THE CAR




                                car, keep the engine on and slightly accel-   blinking.
                                erated for few minutes before switching it
                                off.                                                                                                           WARNING
                                On certain versions the dedicated message                                                              If the warning light v
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                is displayed.                                                                                          turns on when the car is trav-
                                                                                                                              elling (on certain versions together
                                                                                                                              with the message on the display) stop
                                                                                                                              the engine immediately and contact
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                                                              a Fiat Dealership.
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




            136
          INCOMPLETE DOOR                               SEAT BELTS NOT                                            EBD FAILURE




                                                                                                                                            AND CONTROLS
  ´                                           <




                                                                                                                                             DASHBOARD
          LOCKING (red)                                 FASTENED (red)
                                                                                              x >                 (red) (amber)

           On certain versions the warn-                The warning light on the display
ing light turns on when one or more         will light up when the car is moving and the     Warning lights x and > lit at the same
doors or the tailgate are not properly      driver’s seat belt is not correctly fastened.    time with the engine running indicates an




                                                                                                                                            DEVICES
                                                                                                                                            SAFETY
shut.                                       The warning light will blink and a buzzer will   EBD system failure or that the system is
                                            sound if the front seat belts are not cor-       not available. Early locking of the rear
On certain versions the dedicated message   rectly fastened. The buzzer of the S.B.R.
is displayed.                                                                                wheels may occur in the event of violent
                                            (Seat Belt Reminder) system may only be          braking causing the car to swerve. Drive




                                                                                                                                            CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                             OF THE CAR
A buzzer will sound when doors/tailgate     switched off by a Fiat Dealership. On some       very carefully to a Fiat Dealership to have
are open and the car is moving.             versions the system may be reactivated           the system inspected.
                                            from the setup menu.
                                                                                             On certain versions the dedicated message
                                                                                             is displayed.




                                                                                                                                            LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                             MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                             WARNING
                                                                                                                                            EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                              IN AN
                                                                                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                              TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                            INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                           137
                                           INJECTION SYSTEM                   EOBD ENGINE CONTROL                              If the light flashes, release the accelerator
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD

                                 U         FAILURE
                                           (Multijet versions -
                                                                              SYSTEM FAILURE
                                                                              Under normal conditions, turning the ig-
                                                                                                                               pedal to lower the speed of the engine un-
                                                                                                                               til the warning light stops flashing; contin-
                                           amber)                                                                              ue the journey at moderate speed, trying
                                                                              nition key to MAR, the warning light turns       to avoid driving conditions that may cause
                                           EOBD SYSTEM                        on but it should go off after engine starting.   further flashing and contact Fiat Dealer-
                                                                              This indicates that the warning light is
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                           FAILURE (petrol                                                                     ship as soon as possible.
                                                                              working correctly. If the warning light ei-
                                           versions - amber)                  ther stays on or comes on while travelling:
                                Injection system failure                      ❒ steady light: a fault in the supply/ignition
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                Under normal conditions, turning the ig-        system which could cause high emis-                      Go to a Fiat Dealership as
                                nition key to MAR, the warning light turns      sions at the exhaust, possible lack of                   soon as possible if warning
                                on but it should go off after engine start-     performance, poor handling and high                      light U either does not light
                                ing.                                            consumption levels.                                      up when the key is turned to
                                                                                                                               MAR to if while travelling the warning
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                If the warning light stays on or turns on     On certain versions the dedicated mes-           lights comes on either steady or blink-
                                when travelling, means a fault in the sup-    sage is displayed.                               ing (along with a message on the dis-
                                ply/ignition system which could cause high    In these conditions, you may continue            play). The operation of warning light
                                emissions at the exhaust, possible lack of    travelling at moderate speed without de-         U may be checked by the traffic po-
                                performance, poor handling and high con-
   EMERGENCY




                                                                              manding excessive effort from the engine.        lice using specific devices. Follow the
     IN AN




                                sumption levels.                              Prolonged use of the car with the warn-          laws in force in the country where you
                                On certain versions the dedicated message     ing light on may cause damage. Go to a           are driving.
                                is displayed.                                 Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. If
                                                                              warning light will go out after the fault
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                In these conditions, you may continue         goes away but it will be stored in the sys-
                      CAR




                                travelling at moderate speed without de-      tem.
                                manding excessive effort from the engine.
                                Go to a Fiat Dealership as soon as possi-     ❒ blinking: indicates the possibility of
                                ble.                                            damage to the catalyser (see “EOBD
     TECHNICAL




                                                                                system” in section “Dashboard and
                                                                                controls”).
               INDEX




            138
          FRONT PASSENGER                              ABS SYSTEM FAILURE                           FUEL RESERVE (amber)




                                                                                                                                       AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                        DASHBOARD
 F        AIRBAG
          DEACTIVATED                        >         (amber)
                                                                                           K
          (amber)                                     Turning the ignition key to                  Turning the ignition key to
                                            MAR the warning light turns on, but it       MAR the warning light turns on, but it
Warning light F comes on when front         should go off after few seconds.             should go off after few seconds.




                                                                                                                                       DEVICES
                                                                                                                                       SAFETY
passenger’s airbag is deactivated.
                                            The warning light will light up when the     The warning light turns on when about 7
With front passenger’s airbag on, turning   system is either not working or not avail-   litres fuel are left in the tank.
the ignition key to MAR, warning light      able. In the case, the braking system will
F comes on steadily for about 4 sec-                                                     IMPORTANT The warning light will blink




                                                                                                                                       CORRECT USE
                                            work as normal without the extra poten-




                                                                                                                                        OF THE CAR
onds, it flashes for other 4 seconds and    tials offered by the ABS system. Drive       to indicate a system failure. Go to a Fiat
then it shall go off.                       carefully and go to a Fiat Dealership as     Dealership to have the system checked.
                                            soon as possible.
                                            On certain versions the dedicated message




                                                                                                                                       LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                        MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                        WARNING
                 WARNING                    is displayed.
         Warning light F indicates
         failure of warning light ¬.
This condition is indicated by inter-




                                                                                                                                       EMERGENCY
mittent blinking of warning light F




                                                                                                                                         IN AN
for longer than 4 seconds. In this case,
warning light ¬ may not indicate
fault to the system. Contact Fiat




                                                                                                                                       SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
Dealership immediately to have the




                                                                                                                                                          CAR
system checked before driving off.




                                                                                                                                         TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                       INDEX
                                                                                                                                      139
                                           GLOW PLUG                                      WATER IN DIESEL                                CAR PROTECTION
   AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                               Y
    DASHBOARD
                                 m         WARMING
                                           (Multijet versions - amber)           c        FUEL FILTER
                                                                                          (Multijet versions - amber)
                                                                                                                                         SYSTEM FAILURE -
                                                                                                                                         FIAT CODE (amber)
                                           GLOW PLUG                           Turning the ignition key to MAR the            Turning the key to MAR the warning light
                                           WARMING FAILURE                     warning light turns on, but it should go off   shall flash only once and then go off.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                           (Multijet versions - amber)         after few seconds.
                                                                                                                              If with the ignition key at MAR, the warn-
                                Glow plug warming                              The warning light turns on when there is       ing light stays on, this indicates a possible
                                The warning light will go on when the key      water in the diesel fuel filter.               failure (see “Fiat Code system” in section
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                is turned to MAR. It will go out as soon                                                      “Dashboard and controls”).
                                                                               On certain versions the dedicated message
                                as the glow plugs have reached a prede-        is displayed.                                  IMPORTANT Warning lights U and Y
                                termined temperature. Start the engine as                                                     will come on at the same time to indicate
                                soon as the warning light goes out.                                                           a Fiat CODE system failure.
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                IMPORTANT With hot ambient temper-                                                            If with the engine running the warning light
                                ature, warning light stays on for very short            The presence of water in the          Y flashes, this means that the car is not
                                time.                                                   feeding circuit may cause se-         protected by the engine inhibitor device
                                                                                        vere damage to the injection          (see “Fiat Code system” in section “Dash-
                                Glow plug warming failure                               system and irregular engine
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                                                              board and controls”).
                                                                               operation. If warning light c lights up
     IN AN




                                The warning light will blink in the event
                                of a failure to the glow plug heating sys-     (on some versions with the message on          Contact Fiat Dealership to have all the key
                                tem. Go to a Fiat Dealership as soon as        the display), go to a Fiat Dealership as       stored.
                                possible.                                      soon as possible to have the system
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                               bled. Water may have been introduced
                                On certain versions the dedicated message      in the tank if this appears immediate-
                      CAR




                                is displayed.                                  ly after refuelling: in this case, stop
                                                                               the engine immediately and contact a
                                                                               Fiat Dealership.
     TECHNICAL
               INDEX




            140
                                               è
            EXTERNAL LIGHT                               GENERIC FAILURE                   Rain sensor failure




                                                                                                                                            AND CONTROLS
 W




                                                                                                                                             DASHBOARD
            FAILURE (amber)                              INDICATION                        (where provided)
           The warning light will come on                (amber)                           The warning light comes on when a rain
        (some versions only) when a fault                                                  sensor failure is detected. Go to a Fiat
to one of the following lights is detected:   The warning light turns on in the follow-    Dealership.
                                              ing circumstances.




                                                                                                                                            DEVICES
                                                                                                                                            SAFETY
– side/taillights                                                                          The display will show the dedicated mes-
                                              Engine oil pressure sensor failure           sage.
– brake lights
                                              The warning light turns on when failure is   Parking sensor failure
– rear fog lights




                                                                                                                                            CORRECT USE
                                              detected in parking sensors. Go to a Fiat




                                                                                                                                             OF THE CAR
                                              Dealership to have the fault fixed as soon   (where provided)
– direction indicators
                                              as possible.                                 See description of warning light t.
– number plate lights.
The fault may be caused by: one or more       External light fault                         Speed limit exceeded




                                                                                                                                            LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                             MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                             WARNING
burnt lamps, a blow protection fuse or in-    (where provided)                             (where provided)
terruption of the electrical connection.
                                              See description of warning light 6.          The display will show the dedicated mes-
On certain versions warning light è                                                        sage when the car exceeds the set speed
comes on instead.                             Fuel cut-off switch tripped                  limit (see “Multifunctional Display” in sec-




                                                                                                                                            EMERGENCY
                                                                                           tion “Dashboard and controls”).




                                                                                                                                              IN AN
On certain versions the dedicated message     The warning light comes on when the fu-
is displayed.                                 el cut-off switch trips.
                                                                                           Diesel filter failure
                                              The display will show the dedicated mes-     (where provided)




                                                                                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                              sage.
                                                                                           The warning light will come on when a




                                                                                                                                                               CAR
            REAR FOG LIGHTS                                                                diesel filter system failure is detected. The
  4         (amber)                                                                        display will show the dedicated message
                                                                                           (where provided).
         The warning light comes on




                                                                                                                                              TECHNICAL
when the rear fog lights are turned on.




                                                                                                                                            INDEX
                                                                                                                                           141
                                Diesel particulate filter clogged                         ESP SYSTEM FAILURE                              BRAKE PAD WEAR
   AND CONTROLS
                                                                                 á
    DASHBOARD
                                (Multijet versions)
                                The warning light turns on when the
                                                                                          (amber)
                                                                                           HILL HOLDER FAILURE
                                                                                                                                d         (amber) (red)

                                diesel particulate filter is clogged and the                                                             The warning light on the dial
                                                                                           (amber)                             turns on if the front brake pads are worn;
                                driving conditions do not enable to acti-
                                vate automatically the regeneration pro-                                                       in this case have them changed as soon
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                               ESP system failure                              as possible.
                                cedure.
                                                                               Turning the ignition key to MAR the             On certain versions the dedicated mes-
                                To allow the regeneration procedure,           warning light turns on, but it should go off
                                keep the car running until the warning light                                                   sage is displayed.
   CORRECT USE




                                                                               after few seconds.
    OF THE CAR




                                turns off.
                                                                               If the warning light does not go off or stays
                                The display will show the dedicated mes-       on when travelling together with the but-
                                sage.                                          ton led ASR OFF, contact Fiat Dealer-
                                                                               ship.
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                               On certain versions the dedicated mes-
                                                                               sage is displayed.
                                                                               Note Warning light flashing when driving
   EMERGENCY




                                                                               indicates that the ESP system is active.
     IN AN




                                                                               Hill Holder failure
                                                                               Turning the ignition key to MAR the
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                               warning light turns on, but it should go off
                      CAR




                                                                               after few seconds.
                                                                               The warning light will come on when a Hill
                                                                               Holder system failure is detected.
     TECHNICAL




                                                                               On certain versions the dedicated mes-
                                                                               sage is displayed.
               INDEX




            142
          PARKING SENSOR                             SIDE/TAILLIGHTS                              RIGHT-HAND




                                                                                                                                     AND CONTROLS
                                                                                         D




                                                                                                                                      DASHBOARD
 t        FAILURE
          (where provided)
                                           3         AND LOW BEAMS
                                                     (green)
                                                                                                  DIRECTION
                                                                                                  INDICATOR
          (amber)                                                                                 (green - intermittent)
                                                     FOLLOW ME HOME
The warning light turns on when failure              (green)                           The warning light turns on when the di-




                                                                                                                                     DEVICES
                                                                                                                                     SAFETY
is detected in parking sensors.           Side/taillights and low beams                rection indicator control lever is moved
                                                                                       upwards or, together with the left indica-
On certain versions warning light è       The warning light turns on when side/tail-   tor, when the hazard warning light button
                                          lights or low beams are turned on.           is pressed.




                                                                                                                                     CORRECT USE
comes on instead.




                                                                                                                                      OF THE CAR
Contact Fiat Dealership.                  Follow me home
On certain versions the dedicated mes-    The warning light will turn when this de-
                                          vice is active (see “Follow me home” in                 CRUISE CONTROL
                                                                                        Ü
sage is displayed.
                                                                                                  (where provided) (green)




                                                                                                                                     LIGHTS AND
                                          section “Dashboard and controls”).




                                                                                                                                      MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                      WARNING
                                          The display will show the dedicated mes-              Turning the ignition key to
                                          sage.                                        MAR the warning light turns on, but it
                                                                                       should go off after few seconds.




                                                                                                                                     EMERGENCY
                                                     FRONT FOG LIGHTS




                                                                                                                                       IN AN
                                           5
                                                                                       The warning light turns on together with
                                                     (green) (where provided)          the message on the display when turning
                                                                                       the knurled ring of the Cruise Control to
                                                    The warning light turns on         ON.




                                                                                                                                     SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                          when the front fog lights are turned on.
                                                                                       On certain versions the dedicated mes-




                                                                                                                                                        CAR
                                                                                       sage is displayed.
                                                     LEFT-HAND
                                            F        DIRECTION




                                                                                                                                       TECHNICAL
                                                     INDICATOR                                    MAIN BEAMS (blue)
                                                     (green - intermittent)
                                                                                        1         The warning light turns on
                                          The warning light turns on when the di-                when the main beams are
                                          rection indicator control lever is moved           turned on.




                                                                                                                                     INDEX
                                          downwards or, together with the right in-
                                          dicator, when the hazard warning light
                                          button is pressed.
                                                                                                                                    143
                                POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE                    ASR SYSTEM                                   Press ASR OFF again: the LED on the
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                ON THE ROAD                                 (versions with multifunction display)        button will go out and a dedicated mes-
                                (versions with multifunction display)                                                    sage will appear on the display to inform
                                                                            The ASR system can be turned off by          uses that the system has been switched
                                This indication starts flashing when the    pressing the button ASR OFF.                 back on.
                                outside temperature reaches or falls be-    A dedicated message will appear on the
   DEVICES




                                low 3°C to warn the driver of the possi-
   SAFETY




                                                                            display to inform the driver that the sys-
                                ble presence of ice on the road.            tem has been switched off. The LED on
                                The display will show the dedicated mes-    the button will light up at the same time.
                                sage.
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                LIMITED RANGE
                                (versions with multifunction display)
                                The display will show the dedicated mes-
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                sage to warn the driver that the cruising
                                range is less than 50 km.
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




            144
IN AN EMERGENCY




                                                                                                 AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                  DASHBOARD
        STARTING THE ENGINE .................................................             146
        IF A TYRE IS PUNCTURED ...............................................            147




                                                                                                 DEVICES
                                                                                                 SAFETY
        QUICK TYRE REPAIR KIT
        FIX & GO automatic.............................................................   153
        WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULB ...................                                 158




                                                                                                 CORRECT USE
                                                                                                  OF THE CAR
        IF AN EXTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT..........................                          160
        IF AN INTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT ..........................                         165
        IF A FUSE BLOWS................................................................   168




                                                                                                 LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                  MESSAGES
                                                                                                  WARNING
        IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT ..................................................         174
        LIFTING THE CAR...............................................................    175
        TOWING THE CAR ...........................................................        175




                                                                                                 EMERGENCY
                                                                                                   IN AN
                                                                                                 SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                   TECHNICAL
                                                                                                 INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                145
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   STARTING THE                                                                                Proceed as follows to start the engine:
                                ENGINE                                                                                      ❒ connect positive terminals (+ near the
                                                                                                                              terminal) of the two batteries with a
                                EMERGENCY START-UP                                                                            jump lead;
                                Go to a Fiat Dealership immediately if in-                                                  ❒ with a second lead, connect the nega-
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                strument panel warning light Y comes                                                          tive terminal (–) of the auxiliary battery
                                on steady.                                                                                    to an earthing point E on the engine or
                                                                                                                              the gearbox of the car to be started;
                                JUMP STARTING fig. 1                                                                        ❒ start the engine;
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                 F0R0242m
                                                                              fig. 1
                                If the battery is flat, the engine may be                                                   ❒ when the engine has been started, re-
                                started using an auxiliary battery with the                                                   move the leads reversing the order
                                same capacity or a little higher than the                        WARNING
                                                                                                                              above.
                                flat one.                                                This procedure must be per-
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                         formed by expert personnel         If after a few attempts the engine does not
                                                                               because incorrect actions may cause          start, do not insist but contact the near-
                                                                               electrical discharge of considerable in-     est Fiat Dealership.
                                                                               tensity. Furthermore, battery fluid is
                                                                               poisonous and corrosive: avoid contact
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                                               with your skin and eyes. Keep naked
                                                                               flames away from the battery. No
                                                                               smoking. Do not cause sparks.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               IINDEX




            146
IMPORTANT Never connect the negative            BUMP STARTING                                  REPLACING A WHEEL




                                                                                                                                          AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                           DASHBOARD
terminals of the two batteries directly:
sparks could ignite explosive gas released      Never jump start the engine by pushing,
from the battery. If the auxiliary battery is   towing or driving downhill. This could         GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
installed on another car, prevent acciden-      cause a flow of fuel into the catalytic con-
tal contact between metallic parts of the       verter and damage it beyond repair.            Wheel changing and correct use of the
                                                                                               jack and spare wheel call for some pre-




                                                                                                                                          DEVICES
                                                                                                                                          SAFETY
two cars.                                       IMPORTANT Remember that the brake              cautions as listed below.
                                                booster and the power steering system
                                                are not operating until the engine is start-
                                                ed, a greater effort will therefore be re-




                                                                                                                                          CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                           OF THE CAR
                                                quired to press the brake pedal or turn
                                                the steering wheel.                                                WARNING
                                                                                                         Indicate that the car is sta-
                                                                                                         tionary according to the laws
                                                                                               in force: hazard lights, triangle, etc.




                                                                                                                                          LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                           MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                           WARNING
                                                                                               Passengers should leave the car, par-
                                                                                               ticularly if it is very loaded and wait
                                                                                               for the wheel to be changed away
                                                                                               from on-coming traffic. Apply the
                                                                                               handbrake.




                                                                                                                                          EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                            IN AN
                                                                                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                            TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                          INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                         147
                                                                                                                      Important notes:
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                    WARNING                                    WARNING
                                          The spare wheel is specific               The jack may only be used to      ❒ the jack weighs 1.76 kg;
                                          for your car. Do not use it on            replace wheels on the car         ❒ the jack requires no adjustment;
                                cars of different models. Do not use       which it equips or other cars of the
                                spare wheels of different models on        same model. Never use the jack for         ❒ the jack cannot be repaired: replace
                                your car. The wheel bolts are specif-      other purposes, such as lifting other
   DEVICES




                                                                                                                        with an original spare part if damaged;
   SAFETY




                                ic for your car. Do not use them on        car models. Never use the jack to car-
                                cares of different models. Do not use      ry out repairs under the car. Incorrect    ❒ no tool other than its handle may be fit-
                                bolts of different models on your car.     positioning of the jack may cause the        ted on the jack.
   CORRECT USE




                                                                           car to fall. Do not use the jack for
    OF THE CAR




                                                                           loads higher than those shown on the
                                                                           label.

                                               WARNING
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                        Repair and refit the standard
                                        wheel as soon as possible.                          WARNING
                                Do not apply grease to the bolt
                                threading before assembly: the bolts                Incorrect wheel cup assem-
                                                                                    bly may cause it to come off
   EMERGENCY




                                could come loose unexpectedly.
                                                                           when the car is travelling. Never tam-
     IN AN




                                                                           per with the inflation valve. Never in-
                                                                           troduce tools of any kind between rim
                                                                           and tyre. Check tyre and spare wheel
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                           pressure regularly referring to the val-
                                                                           ues shown in the “Technical Specifi-
                      CAR




                                                                           cations” chapter.
     TECHNICAL
               IINDEX




            148
To change a wheel proceed as                  ❒ wear the reflecting safety jacket (com-




                                                                                                                                          AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                           DASHBOARD
follows:                                        pulsory by law in certain countries) be-
                                                fore getting out of the car;
❒ stop the car in a position so that it is
  not a danger for on-coming traffic and      ❒ open the tailgate and lift the mat;
  where you can replace the wheel safe-
  ly. The ground must be flat and com-




                                                                                                                                          DEVICES
                                                                                                                                          SAFETY
  pact;
❒ stop the engine off and pull up the hand-
  brake;




                                                                                                                                          CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                           OF THE CAR
❒ engage first gear or reverse;




                                                                                                                                          LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                           MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                           WARNING
                                                                                                                                          EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                            IN AN
                                                                                                                              F0R0107m
                                                                                           fig. 2




                                                                                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                           ❒ loosen the fastener A-fig. 2;




                                                                                                                                                             CAR
                                                                                           ❒ take out the tool box C-fig. 2 and take
                                                                                             it near to the wheel to be changed;
                                                                                           ❒ take the spare wheel B-fig. 2;




                                                                                                                                            TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                          INDEX
                                                                                                                                         149
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
   DEVICES
   SAFETY
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                   F0R0108m
                                fig. 3

                                ❒ loosen the bolts of the wheel to be re-
                                  placed by about one turn with the
                                  wrench provided E-fig. 3; if the car is
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                  fitted with alloy rims, shake the car to    fig. 4                                                                           F0R0155m

                                  facilitate removing the rim from the
                                  wheel hub;                                  ❒ operate the device F-fig. 4 to extend       ❒ fit the handle L-fig. 4 to operate the
                                                                                the jack until the top of the jack G-fig.     jack and lift the car until the wheel to
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                4 fits correctly into catch H-fig. 4;         be changed is several centimetres off
     IN AN




                                                                                                                              the ground;
                                                                              ❒ warn anybody nearby that the car is
                                                                                about to be lifted. They must stay clear
                                                                                and not touch the car until it is back on
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                the ground;
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               IINDEX




            150
                                                                                                REFITTING THE




                                                                                                                                             AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                              DASHBOARD
                                                                                                STANDARD WHEEL
                                                                                                Following the procedure described previ-
                                                                                                ously, raise the car and remove the spare
                                                                                                wheel.




                                                                                                                                             DEVICES
                                                                                                                                             SAFETY
                                                                                                                                             CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                              OF THE CAR
                                     F0R0156m                                        F0R0157m
fig. 5                                          fig. 6

❒ for versions with wheel cap, remove the       ❒ fit the wheel cap making the crescent
  wheel cap after loosening the 3 fastening       hole coincide with the bolt you have fit-
  bolts and finally loosen the fourth bolt        ted using the wrench;




                                                                                                                                             LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                              MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                              WARNING
  L-fig. 5 and extract the wheel;               ❒ tighten the fastening bolts;
❒ make sure the contact surfaces be-
  tween spare wheel and hub are clean           ❒ turn the jack handle L-fig. 4 to lower
  so that the fastening bolts will not come       the car and remove the jack;




                                                                                                                                             EMERGENCY
  loose;                                        ❒ use the wrench provided to fasten the




                                                                                                                                               IN AN
❒ fit the spare wheel by inserting the first      bolts completely in a criss-cross fashion
  bolt for two threads into the hole clos-        as shown in fig. 6;
  est to the inflation valve;                   ❒ if replacing a wheel with alloy rim, stove




                                                                                                                                             SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                  it temporarily into the spare wheel




                                                                                                                                                                CAR
                                                  compartment with the cosmetic side
                                                  facing upwards.




                                                                                                                                               TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                             INDEX
                                                                                                                                            151
                                Versions with steel rims                      Versions with alloy rims                    When you have finished
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                Proceed as follows:                           Proceed as follows:                         ❒ stow the spare wheel in the space pro-
                                                                                                                            vided in the boot;
                                ❒ make sure the contact surfaces be-          ❒ insert the wheel on the hub and using
                                  tween spare wheel and hub are clean           the wrench provided tighten the bolts;    ❒ fit the jack partially open in its box
                                  so that the fastening bolts will not come                                                 C-fig. 2 forcing it lightly to prevent it
                                                                              ❒ lower the car and remove the jack;
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                  loose;                                                                                    from vibrating when travelling;
                                ❒ fit the standard wheel by inserting the     ❒ using the wrench provided, fully tight-   ❒ put the tools back into their places in
                                  first bolt for two threads into the hole      en the bolts in the sequence shown in       the container;
                                                                                the figure.
   CORRECT USE




                                  closest to the inflation valve;
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                          ❒ stow the container C-fig. 2, complete
                                ❒ fit the wheel cap making the lunette                                                      with tools in the spare wheel;
                                  hole coincide with the bolt you have fit-
                                  ted then, fit the other 3 bolts;                                                        ❒ tight the tool box fastener A-fig. 2;
                                                                                                                          ❒ reposition the mat in the boot.
LIGHTS AND




                                ❒ using the wrench provided, tighten the
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                  fastening bolts;
                                ❒ lower the car and remove the jack;
                                ❒ using the wrench provided, fully tight-
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                  en the bolts in the sequence shown
                                  previously in the figure.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               IINDEX




            152
QUICK TYRE REPAIR KIT




                                                                                                                                              AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                               DASHBOARD
FIX & GO automatic
The Fix & Go automatic quick tyre repair
kit is placed in the boot under the mat.




                                                                                                                                              DEVICES
                                                                                                                                              SAFETY
The kit fig. 7 includes:
❒ cylinder A containing sealant and fitted
  with:




                                                                                                                                              CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                               OF THE CAR
                                                                                   F0R0158m                                       F0R0159m
                                              fig. 7                                          fig. 8
   – filling pipe B;
   – an adhesive label C with the mes-        ❒ a pair of protection gloves located in        The quick repair kit also contains a screw-
     sage “max. 80 km/h” to be apply in         the side space of the compressor;             driver and a tow ring.
     a position clearly visible by the dri-




                                                                                                                                              LIGHTS AND
                                              ❒ adapters for inflating different elements.




                                                                                                                                               MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                               WARNING
     ver (on the dashboard) after repair-
     ing the tyre;
❒ instruction booklet (see fig. 8), to be                                                                      WARNING
  used for prompt and proper use of the                                                                Hand over the instruction




                                                                                                                                              EMERGENCY
  quick repair kit and to be then handed                                                               booklet to the personnel




                                                                                                                                                IN AN
  to the personnel charged with handling                                                       charged with treating the tyre re-
  the treated tyre;                                                                            paired with the kit.
❒ compressor D-fig. 7 including gauge




                                                                                                                                              SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
  and connections;




                                                                                                                                                TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                              INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                             153
                                                                                                                   IMPORTANT INFORMATION:
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                         In the event of a puncture                       WARNING
                                         caused by foreign bodies, the            The damage cannot be re-         The sealing fluid of the quick tyre repair
                                         kit may be used to repair                paired with the kit if the       kit is effective with external temperatures
                                         tyres showing damages on the    wheel rim is damaged (deformation         between -20 °C and +50 °C.
                                track or shoulder up to max 4 mm di-     of the channel causing leakage of air).
                                ameter.                                                                            The sealing fluid will expire.
                                                                         Do not remove the foreign body
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                         (screw or nail) from the tyre.

                                                                                                                                    WARNING
   CORRECT USE




                                                 WARNING
    OF THE CAR




                                         The kit cannot be used to re-                                                       Do not operate the com-
                                         pair damage to the tyre side-                                                       pressor for longer than 20
                                wall. Do not use the quick repair kit                                              consecutive minutes. Risk of over-
                                if the tyre was damaged by running                                                 heating. The quick repair kit is not
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                on a flat.                                                                         suitable for definitive repairs. The
                                                                                                                   tyres may only be repaired tem-
                                                                                                                   porarily.
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               IINDEX




            154
                                                                                                                                      AND CONTROLS
                  WARNING




                                                                                                                                       DASHBOARD
                                                    Replace the cylinder contain-
          The cylinder contains ethyl               ing the sealant after the ex-
          glycol. Contains latex: may               piration date. Dispose of the
cause an allergic reaction. Harmful if              cylinder and the sealant liq-
swallowed. Irritant for the eye. May       uid properly. Dispose according to the
cause sensitization by inhalation or       national and local laws in force.




                                                                                                                                      DEVICES
                                                                                                                                      SAFETY
contact. Avoid contact with your eyes,
skin and clothes. In the event of con-
tact, wash immediately with plenty of




                                                                                                                                      CORRECT USE
water. Do not induce vomit if swal-




                                                                                                                                       OF THE CAR
                                                                                                                          F0R0109m
                                                                                    fig. 9
lowed. Rinse your mouth and drink
plenty of water. Call a doctor imme-
diately. Keep away from children. The                                               INFLATION PROCEDURE
product must not be used by asth-




                                                                                                                                      LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                       MESSAGES
matics. Do not breath in the vapours




                                                                                                                                       WARNING
during insertion and suction. Call a                                                                  WARNING
doctor immediately if allergic reactions                                                      Put on the protection gloves
are noted. Store the cylinder in the                                                          provided together with quick
specific compartment, away from




                                                                                                                                      EMERGENCY
                                                                                     tyre repair kit.
sources of heat. The sealing fluid will




                                                                                                                                        IN AN
expire.

                                                                                    ❒ Apply the handbrake. Remove the




                                                                                                                                      SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                      tyre valve cap, extract the flexible filler




                                                                                                                                                         CAR
                                                                                      tube A-fig. 9 and fasten the ring B on-
                                                                                      to the tyre valve;




                                                                                                                                        TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                      INDEX
                                                                                                                                     155
                                                                                                                               ❒ if reaching the tyre pressure specified
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                                                                                                                 in paragraph “Inflation pressure” in sec-
                                                                                                                                 tion “Technical Specifications”, start
                                                                                                                                 driving immediately;
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                                                                                                WARNING
                                                                                                                                        Apply the adhesive label in a
                                                                                                                                        position clearly visible by the
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                   F0R0160m                                         F0R0110m
                                fig. 10                                       fig. 12
                                                                                                                               driver as a reminder that the tyre has
                                                                                                                               been treated with the quick repair kit.
                                                                                  For a more accurate reading, check           Drive carefully, particularly on bends.
                                                                                  pressure gauge F-fig. 10 with the            Do not exceed 80 km/h. Do not ac-
                                                                                  compressor off;
LIGHTS AND




                                                                                                                               celerate or brake suddenly.
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                              ❒ if after 5 minutes it is still impossible
                                                                                to reach at least 1.5 bar, disengage com-
                                                                                pressor from valve and current outlet,
                                                                                then move the car forth for approx. ten        ❒ after driving for about 10 minutes stop
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                metres in order to distribute the seal-
     IN AN




                                                                                                                                 and check again the tyre pressure; pull
                                                                                ing fluid inside the tyre evenly, then re-       up the handbrake;
                                fig. 11                            F0R0113m     peat the inflation operation;
                                                                              ❒ If after this operation it is still impossi-
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                ❒ make sure that switch D-fig. 10 of the        ble after 5 minutes to reach at least 1.8
                      CAR




                                  compressor is in position 0 (off), start      bar, do not start driving since the tyre                         WARNING
                                  the engine, plug into the nearest sock-       is excessively damaged and the quick                    Stop if the pressure has
                                  et E-fig. 11 and operate the compres-         tyre repair kit cannot guarantee suit-                  dropped to less than 1.8
                                  sor turning switch D-fig. 10 to position      able sealing, contact Fiat Dealership;         bars: the Fix & Go automatic quick
     TECHNICAL




                                  I (on). Inflate the tyre to the pressure                                                     repair kit cannot work properly be-
                                  specified in the “Inflation pressure”                                                        cause the tyre is excessively damaged.
                                  paragraph, “Technical Specifications”                                                        Go to a Fiat Dealership.
                                  chapter.
               IINDEX




            156
❒ if at least 1.8 bar pressure is read, re-




                                                                                                                                             AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                              DASHBOARD
  store proper pressure (with engine
  running and handbrake on) and restart;
❒ drive with the utmost care to the near-
  est Fiat Dealership.




                                                                                                                                             DEVICES
                                                                                                                                             SAFETY
                 WARNING




                                                                                                                                             CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                              OF THE CAR
                                                                                    F0R0111m                                     F0R0161m
          Remember to inform the              fig. 13                                          fig. 14
          workshop that the tyre has
 been treated with a quick repair kit.        FOR CHECKING AND                                 CYLINDER REPLACEMENT
 Give the instruction booklet to the          RESTORING PRESSURE ONLY                          PROCEDURE
 tyre repair workshop personnel.




                                                                                                                                             LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                              MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                              WARNING
                                              The compressor may also be used for              To replace the cylinder proceed as fol-
                                              restoring pressure only. Release coupling        lows:
                                              A-fig. 14 and connect directly to the tyre
                                              valve fig. 13. In this way, the cylinder will    ❒ release connection A-fig. 14;
                                              not be connected to the compressor and           ❒ turn anticlockwise the cylinder to re-




                                                                                                                                             EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                               IN AN
                                              no sealant will be injected.                       place and raise it;
                                                                                               ❒ fit the new cylinder and turn it clock-
                                                                                                 wise;




                                                                                                                                             SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                               ❒ connect connection A to the cylinder




                                                                                                                                                                CAR
                                                                                                 and fit the transparent tube B into the
                                                                                                 proper space.




                                                                                                                                               TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                             INDEX
                                                                                                                                            157
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   WHEN NEEDING TO                                               WARNING
                                CHANGE A BULB                                         Modifications or repairs to
                                                                                      the electrical system (elec-
                                                                             tronic control units) that are not car-
                                GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS                         ried out properly or do not take the
                                                                             technical specifications of the system
   DEVICES




                                ❒ When a bulb is not working, check that
   SAFETY




                                  the corresponding fuse is intact before    into account can cause malfunctions
                                  replacing it: refer to the “If a fuse      leading to the risk of fire.
                                  blows” paragraph in this chapter for
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                  fuse location.
                                ❒ before changing a bulb check the con-
                                  tacts for oxidation;                                       WARNING
                                ❒ burnt bulbs must be replaced by others             Halogen bulbs contain pres-
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                  of the same type and power;                        surised gas which, if broken,
                                                                             may cause small fragments of glass to
                                ❒ always check the height of the headlight   be projected outwards.
                                  beam after changing a bulb, for reasons
                                  of safety.
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                                             IMPORTANT A slight misting may appear                                                   F0R0112m
                                                                             on the internal surface of the headlight:        fig. 15
                                          Halogen lamps must be han-
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                          dled holding the metallic part     this does not indicate a fault and is caused
                                                                             by low temperature and the degree of hu-         A     All glass bulb: clipped into place. Pull
                      CAR




                                          only. Touching the transparent                                                            to extract.
                                          part of the bulb with your fin-    midity in the air. Misting will rapidly dis-
                                gers may reduce the intensity of the         appear when the headlights are switched          B     Bayonet bulbs: to remove this type
                                emitted light and even compromise du-        on. The presence of drop inside the head-              of bulb from its holder, press the
                                                                             lights indicates infiltration of water. Go to          bulb and turn it anticlockwise.
     TECHNICAL




                                ration of the lamp itself. In the case of
                                accidental contact, rub the lamp with a      a Fiat Dealership.
                                                                                                                              C     Cylindrical bulbs: release from the
                                cloth and spirit and leave to dry.                                                                  contacts to extract.
                                                                             TYPES OF BULBS                                   D-E Halogen bulbs: release the fastening
               IINDEX




                                                                             Various types of bulbs are fitted to your car:       clip from the corresponding seat to
                                                                                                                                  remove the lamp.


            158
Bulb                                         Ref. figure    Type      Power




                                                                               AND CONTROLS
                                                                                DASHBOARD
Main beam headlights                              D        H1U55W     55W
Dipped beam headlights                            D        H755W      55W
Front sidelights                                  A         W5W        5W




                                                                               DEVICES
                                                                               SAFETY
Front fog lights (where provided)                 –        H1U55W     55W
Front direction indicators                        B        PY21W      21W




                                                                               CORRECT USE
                                                                                OF THE CAR
Side direction indicators                         A        WY5W        5W
Rear direction indicators                         B         Y21W      21W
Side/taillights                                   B         R5W        5W




                                                                               LIGHTS AND
                                                                                MESSAGES
                                                                                WARNING
Brake lights                                      B         P21W      21W
Third brake light (additional brake light)        B          5W        5W
Reversing light                                   –         P21W




                                                                               EMERGENCY
                                                                      21W




                                                                                 IN AN
Rear fog lights                                   –         P21W      21W
Number plate light                                A         W5W        5W




                                                                               SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
Front ceiling light with spot lights              C        10W x 2    10W




                                                                                                  CAR
Rear ceiling light with movable lens              C         10W       10W
Boot light                                        A         W5W        5W




                                                                                 TECHNICAL
Puddle light                                      C         W5W        5W
Courtesy light                                    C        1.2W x 2   1.2W
Courtesy light                                    C         C5W        5W




                                                                               INDEX
Oddments compartment courtesy light               C         C5W        5W


                                                                              159
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   IF AN EXTERIOR LIGHT                                                 A
                                BURNS OUT
                                For the type of bulb and power rating, see
                                “When needing to change a bulb”.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                                C                    B              D
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                  F0R0220m                                     F0R0221m
                                                                             fig. 16                                         fig. 17

                                                                             FRONT LIGHT CLUSTERS                            SIDELIGHTS fig. 17
                                                                             fig. 16                                         To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                             The front light clusters contain sidelights,    ❒ remove the clipped-on cover;
                                                                             dipped beam, main beam and direction in-
                                                                             dicator bulbs.                                  ❒ press tabs B and remove the bulb
                                                                                                                               holder;
                                                                             The bulbs are arranged inside the light unit
   EMERGENCY




                                                                             as follows:                                     ❒ remove the bulb C and replace it;
     IN AN




                                                                             A main beam                                     ❒ refit the bulb holder and refit the cap
                                                                                                                               and check that it is locked properly.
                                                                             B side lights
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                             C dipped beam (two lights)
                      CAR




                                                                             D direction indicators.
     TECHNICAL
               IINDEX




            160
                                                                                                                                           AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                            DASHBOARD
                                                                                                                                           DEVICES
                                                                                                                                           SAFETY
                                                                                                                                           CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                            OF THE CAR
                                    F0R0222m                                       F0R0223m                                    F0R0224m
fig. 18                                        fig. 19                                        fig. 19/a

DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS                         MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS                           DIRECTION INDICATORS
fig. 18                                        fig. 19




                                                                                                                                           LIGHTS AND
                                                                                              Front fig. 19/a




                                                                                                                                            MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                            WARNING
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:        To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ remove the clipped-on cover;                 ❒ remove the clipped-on cover;                 To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ disconnect the central electric connec-      ❒ disconnect the central electric connec-      ❒ steer the right/left wheel outwards as
                                                                                                shown in the figure;




                                                                                                                                           EMERGENCY
  tor and release the bulb holder catch;         tor and release the bulb holder catch;




                                                                                                                                             IN AN
❒ remove the bulb B and replace it;            ❒ remove the bulb B and replace it;            ❒ turn the catch as shown by the arrow,
                                                                                                then use the lid;
❒ fit the new bulb, making the outlines of     ❒ refit the new bulb;
  the metallic part coincide with the                                                         ❒ remove the bulb holder cover by turn-




                                                                                                                                           SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
  grooves on the reflector;                    ❒ refit the bulb holder catch and reconnect      ing it anticlockwise;
                                                 the electrical connector;




                                                                                                                                                              CAR
❒ refit the bulb holder catch and reconnect
  the electrical connector;                    ❒ refit the protection and check that it
                                                 is correctly locked.
❒ refit the protection and check that it




                                                                                                                                             TECHNICAL
  is correctly locked.




                                                                                                                                           INDEX
                                                                                                                                          161
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                                                                                                             A       B           C
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                                                                                      E          D
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                    F0R0226m                                     F0R0114m                                         F0R0227m
                                fig. 20                                        fig. 21                                      fig. 22

                                ❒ extract the bulb D by pressing it slight-    FRONT FOG LIGHTS                             REAR LIGHT CLUSTERS
                                  ly and turning it anticlockwise (bayonet     (where provided)                             fig. 22-23
                                  locking) then replace it;
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES




                                                                                                                            Rear light cluster contain taillights, brake
 WARNING




                                                                               Contact Fiat Dealership to have front fog
                                ❒ refit the cover/bulb holder C by turning     lights A-fig. 21 replaced.                   light, direction indicators and rear fog light
                                  it clockwise and locking it properly;                                                     bulbs. The bulbs are arranged inside the
                                                                                                                            light unit as follows:
                                ❒ close the lid and turn the fastening de-
                                                                                                                            A brake lights (two lights)
   EMERGENCY




                                  vice.
     IN AN




                                                                                                                            B taillights
                                Side fig. 20                                                                                C rear fog lights
                                To change the bulb, proceed as follows:                                                     D direction indicators
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                                            E reversing light.
                                ❒ work on the lens A to compress the in-
                      CAR




                                  ternal catch B, then pull the unit out-
                                  wards;
                                ❒ turn the bulb holder C anticlockwise,
     TECHNICAL




                                  extract the clipped-on bulb D and re-
                                  place it;
                                ❒ refit the bulb holder C in the lens and
                                  turn it clockwise;
               IINDEX




                                ❒ refit the unit making sure that the in-
                                  ternal catch B clips into position.

            162
                                                                                                   AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                    DASHBOARD
                                                                                                   DEVICES
                                                                                                   SAFETY
                                                                                                   CORRECT USE
                                                                                                    OF THE CAR
                                                          F0R0229m                     F0R0230m
                       fig. 23/b                                       fig. 24

                       To change the bulb proceed as follows:
                       ❒ open the tailgate and loosen the two fastening screws G;




                                                                                                   LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                    MESSAGES
                                                                                                    WARNING
                       ❒ disconnect the central electric connector and pull the lens unit out-
                         wards;
                       ❒ release the clips F and extract the bulb holders;




                                                                                                   EMERGENCY
                       ❒ remove the bulb to replace A, B, C or D pushing it slightly and




                                                                                                     IN AN
                         turning it anticlockwise (bayonet-type bulb) and replace it;
                       ❒ refit the bulb holder and refasten the clips F;




                                                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                       ❒ to replace the rear fog light, release the clips H-fig. 24, remove
                         the protection and replace the bayonet bulb.




                                                                                                                      CAR
                       ❒ reconnect the electrical connector, reposition the cluster correct-
                         ly on the body and then tighten the fastening screws G.




                                                                                                     TECHNICAL
fig. 23/a   F0R0228m




                                                                                                   INDEX
                                                                                                  163
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
   DEVICES
   SAFETY
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                F0R0252m                                    F0R0253m                                       F0R0123m
                                fig. 25                                    fig. 26                                     fig. 27

                                THIRD BRAKE LIGHTS                         ❒ unscrew the two laterals pivots B-
                                                                             fig. 25;
                                The change the bulb’s group proceed as
LIGHTS AND




                                                                           ❒ extract the bulb hoder;
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                follows:
                                ❒ open the tailgate;                       ❒ remove and replace the bulbs fig. 26.
                                ❒ disconnect the electric connector
                                  A-fig. 25;
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                                                                                                                           F0R0124m
                                                                                                                       fig. 28
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                                       NUMBER PLATE LIGHT fig. 27-28
                      CAR




                                                                                                                       To change the bulb proceed as follows:
                                                                                                                       ❒ work in the point shown by the arrow
                                                                                                                         and remove lens A-fig. 27;
     TECHNICAL




                                                                                                                       ❒ change the bulb fig. 28 releasing it from
                                                                                                                         the side contacts and making sure the
                                                                                                                         new bulb is correctly fastened between
                                                                                                                         the contacts;
                                                                                                                       ❒ refit the snap-fitted lens unit.
               IINDEX




            164
IF AN INTERIOR LIGHT




                                                                                                                                             AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                              DASHBOARD
BURNS OUT
For the type of bulb and power rating, see
“When needing to change a bulb”.




                                                                                                                                             DEVICES
                                                                                                                                             SAFETY
FRONT CEILING LIGHT
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:




                                                                                                                                             CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                              OF THE CAR
❒ work in the points shown by the ar-
                                                                                  F0R0115m                                       F0R0116m
                                                fig. 29                                      fig. 31
  rows and remove light A-fig. 29;
❒ open the protection lid B-fig. 30;
❒ replace bulbs C releasing them from the




                                                                                                                                             LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                              MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                              WARNING
  side contacts; make sure that new bulbs
  are correctly clamped between contacts;
❒ re-close the lid B-fig. 30 and secure light
  A-fig. 29 into its housing locking it




                                                                                                                                             EMERGENCY
  properly.




                                                                                                                                               IN AN
                                                                                  F0R0117m                                       F0R0118m
                                                fig. 30                                      fig. 32




                                                                                                                                             SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                REAR CEILING LIGHT                           ❒ change the bulb F-fig. 32 releasing it




                                                                                                                                                                CAR
                                                (where provided)                               from the side contacts and making sure
                                                                                               the new bulb is correctly fastened be-
                                                To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:       tween the contacts;
                                                ❒ work in the points shown by the ar-




                                                                                                                                               TECHNICAL
                                                                                             ❒ re-close the protection lid E-fig. 32
                                                  rows and remove light D-fig. 31;             and secure light D-fig. 31 into its hous-
                                                ❒ open the protection lid E-fig. 32;           ing locking it properly.




                                                                                                                                             INDEX
                                                                                                                                            165
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
   DEVICES
   SAFETY
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                     F0R0233m                                        F0R0234m                                    F0R0120m
                                fig. 33                                         fig. 34                                         fig. 35

                                COURTESY LIGHT fig. 33                          BOOT LIGHT fig. 34                              PUDDLE LIGHTS
                                To change the bulb proceed as follows:          To change the bulb, proceed as follows:         (where provided) fig. 35-36
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                ❒ open the mirror cover A;                      ❒ open the tailgate;                            To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

                                ❒ extract lens B levering in the points         ❒ remove the light A levering in the point      ❒ remove the light by pressing clip A-
                                  shown by the arrow;                             shown by the arrow;                             fig. 35 with a screwdriver;
                                                                                ❒ open the protection B and replace the
   EMERGENCY




                                ❒ delicately lift the bulb holder C from its
     IN AN




                                                                                  snap-fitted bulb;
                                  seat, extract the clipped-on bulb and re-
                                  place it;                                     ❒ re-close the protective cover B on the
                                                                                  lens;
                                ❒ correctly reposition the bulb holder C
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                  in its seat;                                  ❒ refit the light A inserting it in its cor-
                                                                                  rect position firstly on one end and
                      CAR




                                ❒ refit the light B inserting it in its cor-      then on the other until it clicks into
                                  rect position firstly on one end and            place.
                                  then on the other until it clicks into
     TECHNICAL




                                  place.
               IINDEX




            166
                                                                                                                                            AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                             DASHBOARD
                                                                                                                                            DEVICES
                                                                                                                                            SAFETY
                                                                                                                                            CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                             OF THE CAR
                                      F0R0121m                                    F0R0303m                                      F0R0304m
fig. 36                                          fig. 37                                     fig. 38

❒ press the bulb protection cover sides          ODDMENTS COMPARTMENT                        ❒ replace the bulb B-fig. 38 releasing it
  B-fig. 36 on the two fastening pins and        COURTESY LIGHT                                from the side contacts and making sure
  turn it;                                                                                     the new bulb is correctly fastened be-




                                                                                                                                            LIGHTS AND
                                                 (where provided) figs. 37-38




                                                                                                                                             MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                             WARNING
                                                                                               tween the actual contacts;
❒ replace the snap-fitted bulb C-fig. 36;        To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
                                                                                             ❒ refit the courtesy light A-fig.37 in its
❒ refit bulb protection cover fitting the        ❒ work at the points shown by the ar-         housing making sure that it is secure.
  two fastening pins;                              rows and remove the courtesy light A-




                                                                                                                                            EMERGENCY
❒ refit the ceiling light inserting first end      fig. 37;




                                                                                                                                              IN AN
  D-fig. 35 and then pressing the other
  end until hearing the locking click of the
  clip.




                                                                                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                              TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                            INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                           167
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   IF A FUSE BLOWS                                                                                          WARNING
                                                                                                                                  Go to a Fiat Dealership if a
                                GENERAL                                                                                           general protection fuse
                                                                                                                           blows (MEGA-FUSE, MIDI-FUSE,
                                The fuse is a protective device for the                                                    MAXI-FUSE).
                                electric system: it comes into action (i.e.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                it cuts off) mainly due to a fault or im-
                                proper action on the system.
                                Check the efficiency of the corresponding
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                                                                            WARNING
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                F0R0122m
                                fuse when a device does not work: the           fig. 39
                                conducting element A-fig. 39 must not be                                                            Remove the key from the ig-
                                interrupted. If it is, replace the blown fuse                                                       nition switch and switch off
                                with another with the same amperage                       Never replace a blown fuse       all loads before replacing a fuse.
                                (same colour).                                            with metallic wires or other
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                          material.
                                B undamaged fuse
                                C fuse with damaged filament.
                                                                                               WARNING
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                                                         Never replace a fuse with
                                                    WARNING                              another of higher amperage:
                                                                                 FIRE RISK.
                                           If a fuse blows again, contact
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                           a Fiat Dealership.
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               IINDEX




            168
FUSE LOCATION




                                                                                                   AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                    DASHBOARD
The fuses are grouped in three units on
the dashboard, in the engine compartment
and on the positive battery terminal.




                                                                                                   DEVICES
Fuse box on the dashboard fig. 41




                                                                                                   SAFETY
To gain access to the fuses in the fuse box
on the dashboard, loosen the fastening
screws A-fig. 40 and remove the cover.




                                                                                                   CORRECT USE
                                                                                                    OF THE CAR
                                                                            F0R0125m
                                              fig. 40




                                                                                                   LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                    MESSAGES
                                                                                                    WARNING
                                                        F34   F48   F49   F35   F13




                                                                                                   EMERGENCY
                                                                                                     IN AN
                                                        F46   F33   F37   F42   F12




                                                        F45   F47   F32   F50   F51




                                                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                      CAR
                                                        F52   F41   F43   F40   F44




                                                        F36   F39   F38   F53   F31




                                                                                                     TECHNICAL
                                                                                                   INDEX
                                                                                       F0R0126m
                                              fig. 41

                                                                                                  169
                                Fuse box in engine compartment
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                fig. 43
                                To gain access to the fuses in the fuse box
                                next to the battery, remove the protec-
                                tion cover fig. 42.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                        F0R0127m
                                                                              fig. 42
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING

   EMERGENCY
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               IINDEX




                                                                                                   F0R0128m
                                                                              fig. 43

            170
FUSE TABLE




                                                                                                         AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                          DASHBOARD
Fuse box on dashboard fig. 41


LOADS                                                                                  FUSE   AMPERES




                                                                                                         DEVICES
                                                                                                         SAFETY
Right dipped beam headlight                                                            F12      7.5
Left dipped beam headlight, headlight corrector                                        F13      7.5




                                                                                                         CORRECT USE
                                                                                                          OF THE CAR
INT/A for relay coils (T08, T17) in engine compartment fuse box and body               F31      7.5
computer node
Heated Seats                                                                           F32      15




                                                                                                         LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                          MESSAGES
                                                                                                          WARNING
Power windows control unit (left rear window motor)                                    F33      20
Power windows control unit (right rear window motor)                                   F34      20




                                                                                                         EMERGENCY
+15 reversing lights, brake lights control NC, air mass meter, glow plug pre-heating   F35      7.5




                                                                                                           IN AN
unit, water in diesel fuel sensor, tachometer generator, level sensor 2
Power window unit (+30 for electronics)                                                F36      7.5




                                                                                                         SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
+15 instrument panel, NA brake lights control                                          F37      7.5




                                                                                                                            CAR
Body computer node                                                                     F38      20
Radio node, climate control node, node Blue&Me                                         F39      10




                                                                                                           TECHNICAL
Heated rear window                                                                     F40      30
Mirror defrosters                                                                      F41      7.5
+15 brake system                                                                       F42      7.5




                                                                                                         INDEX
Windscreen wiper control (two-way pump)                                                F43      20

                                                                                                        171
                                LOADS                                                                          FUSE   AMPERES
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD

                                Cigar lighter or socket                                                        F44      15
                                Boot lock actuator                                                             F45      10
                                Power window unit (driver’s side front window motor)                           F47      20
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                Power window unit (passenger’s side front window motor)                        F48      20
                                +15 control lighting: radio on steering wheel, control panel, power mirrors,   F49      7.5
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                power window unit, electrochromic mirror and rain sensor
                                +15 airbag node                                                                F50      7.5
                                +15 cruise control, radio setup, Blu&Me setup,                                 F51      7.5
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                parking sensors, climate control node
                                Power window unit, driver’s seat adjustment motor                              F52      15
                                Body computer and instrument panel node                                        F53      7.5
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               IINDEX




            172
Fuse box in engine compartment fig. 43




                                                                                    AND CONTROLS
                                                                                     DASHBOARD
LOADS                                                             FUSE   AMPERES
Horn                                                              F10      10




                                                                                    DEVICES
                                                                                    SAFETY
Engine control system secondary loads                             F11      10
Right main beam headlight                                         F14      7.5




                                                                                    CORRECT USE
Left beam headlight                                               F15      7.5




                                                                                     OF THE CAR
Engine control system primary loads                               F17      10
Engine control unit                                               F18      10




                                                                                    LIGHTS AND
                                                                                     MESSAGES
                                                                                     WARNING
Conditioner compressor                                            F19      7.5
Fuel pump                                                         F21      15
Engine control system primary loads (injectors, ignition coils)   F22      15




                                                                                    EMERGENCY
                                                                                      IN AN
Windscreen wiper motor                                            F23      20
Spare                                                             F24      10




                                                                                    SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
Fog lights                                                        F30      15




                                                                                      TECHNICAL
                                                                                    INDEX              CAR
                                                                                   173
                                IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT                       ❒ when you have finished, turn the charg-
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                                                                                                             WARNING
                                                                               er off before disconnecting the battery;
                                                                                                                                  Battery fluid is poisonous
                                IMPORTANT The battery recharging pro-        ❒ reconnect battery negative terminal.               and corrosive: avoid contact
                                cedure is provided as an example only.                                                    with your skin and eyes. The battery
                                You are recommended to go to a Fiat                                                       recharging operation must be per-
                                Dealership to have this operation per-                                                    formed in a ventilated placed away
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                formed.                                                                                   from naked flames o possible sources
                                Low amperage slow recharging for ap-                                                      of sparks to avoid the risk of explo-
                                proximately 24 hour is advised. Rapid bat-                                                sion and fire.
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                tery charging with high currents could
                                damage the battery.
                                Charge the battery as follows:
                                ❒ disconnect battery negative terminal;                                                                    WARNING
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                                                                    Never attempt to recharge
                                ❒ connect the charger cables to the bat-                                                            a frozen battery: defrost it
                                  tery terminals, observing the poles;                                                    first to prevent the risk of explosion.
                                ❒ turn on the charger;                                                                    If a battery was frozen, have it in-
                                                                                                                          spected by specialised personnel be-
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                                                                                          fore recharging to check that the in-
                                                                                                                          ternal elements are not damaged
                                                                                                                          and that the casing is not cracked
                                                                                                                          causing the risk of leakage of poiso-
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                                          nous, corrosive gas.
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               IINDEX




            174
LIFTING THE CAR                                                                                 TOWING THE CAR




                                                                                                                                            AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                             DASHBOARD
If the car is to be lifted, go to a Fiat Deal-                                                  The tow ring provided with the car is
ership which is equipped with the arm                                                           housed in the tool box under the boot
hoist or workshop lift.                                                                         mat.




                                                                                                                                            DEVICES
                                                                                                                                            SAFETY
                                                                                                                  WARNING
                                                                                                          The front and rear tow hooks




                                                                                                                                            CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                             OF THE CAR
                                                                                     F0R0129m
                                                 fig. 42
                                                                                                          should only be used on the
                                                                                                roads for emergency operations. Tow-
                                                 Lift the car exclusively by positioning the    ing is permitted for short journies us-
                                                 jack arms or the shop jack in the points       ing the special device that conforms to
                                                 shown in the figure.                           the highway code (rigid bar) to move




                                                                                                                                            LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                             MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                             WARNING
                                                                                                the vehicle onto the road in prepara-
                                                                                                tion for towing or transportation on
                                                                                                a special vehicle.
                                                                                                The hooks should NOT be used for re-




                                                                                                                                            EMERGENCY
                                                                                                covering the vehicle away from the




                                                                                                                                              IN AN
                                                                                                road or where there are obstacles
                                                                                                and/or for towing using cables or oth-
                                                                                                er non rigid devices. With regard to the
                                                                                                above conditions, towing should take




                                                                                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                place with the two vehicles (the one




                                                                                                                                                               CAR
                                                                                                towing and the one being towed)
                                                                                                aligned as closely as possible along the
                                                                                                same centre line axis.




                                                                                                                                              TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                            INDEX
                                                                                                                                           175
                                FASTENING THE TOW
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                                                                                                            WARNING
                                RING fig. 43-44
                                                                                                                                  Clean the threaded seat
                                Proceed as follows:                                                                               carefully before fastening
                                ❒ release the cap A;                                                                    the ring. Make sure that the ring is
                                                                                                                        fully fastened in the seat before tow-
                                ❒ take the tow hook B from the sup-                                                     ing the car.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                  port;
                                ❒ tighten the ring on the rear or front
                                  threaded pin.
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                             F0R0130m
                                                                            fig. 43
                                                                                                                                          WARNING
                                                                                                                                 Release the steering wheel
                                                   WARNING                                                                       lock before towing (see “Ig-
                                          The power brakes and pow-                                                     nition device” in “Dashboard and con-
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                          er steering will not work while                                               trols”).
                                the car is being towed. More effort on
                                the brake pedal and steering wheel will
                                therefore be required. Do not use wires
   EMERGENCY




                                for towing. Do not jerk. Make sure not
     IN AN




                                to damage parts in contact with the
                                car while towing. Respect the specific
                                rules of the Highway Code when tow-         fig. 44                          F0R0131m

                                ing the car specifically in relation to
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                the towing device and the behaviour
                                                                                             WARNING
                      CAR




                                to maintain on the road.
                                                                                      Do not start the engine while
                                                                                      towing the car.
     TECHNICAL
               IINDEX




            176
CAR MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                          AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                           DASHBOARD
        SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................................                       178
        SERVICE SCHEDULE




                                                                                                          DEVICES
                                                                                                          SAFETY
        PETROL VERSIONS .............................................................              179
        SERVICE SCHEDULE
        DIESEL VERSIONS ...............................................................            181




                                                                                                          CORRECT USE
                                                                                                           OF THE CAR
        REGULAR INSPECTIONS .................................................                      183
        DEMANDING USE OF THE CAR ...................................                               183
        CHECKING FLUID LEVELS................................................                      184




                                                                                                          LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                           MESSAGES
                                                                                                           WARNING
        AIR CLEANER ......................................................................         190
        POLLEN FILTER ...................................................................          190
        BATTERY ................................................................................   190




                                                                                                          EMERGENCY
                                                                                                            IN AN
        WHEELS AND TYRES .........................................................                 193
        RUBBER HOSES ....................................................................          194




                                                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
        WINDSCREEN WIPERS......................................................                    194




                                                                                                                             CAR
        BODYWORK ........................................................................          196
        INTERIORS ............................................................................     198




                                                                                                            TECHNICAL
                                                                                                          INDEX
                                                                                                         177
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   SCHEDULED SERVICING                             IMPORTANT Scheduled service coupons            IMPORTANT You are advised to contact
                                                                                are required by the manufacturer. Default      Fiat Dealership in the event of any minor
                                Correct maintenance is essential for en-        may cancel the warranty.                       operating faults, without waiting for the
                                suring long car life under the best condi-                                                     next service coupon.
                                                                                Scheduled Servicing is performed by all
                                tions.                                          Fiat Dealership, at pre-established times.     If your car is used frequently for towing,
                                                                                                                               the interval between one service coupon
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                This is why Fiat has planned a series of        If during each operation, in addition to the
                                checks and maintenance operations every                                                        and the other must be reduced.
                                                                                ones programmed, the need arises for fur-
                                30,000 km.                                      ther replacements or repairs, these may
                                Scheduled servicing will not however ful-       be carried out only with the explicit agree-
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                ly cover all of the need of your car: It is     ment of the Customer.
                                however important to remember that
                                scheduled servicing does not completely
                                cover all the car’s requirements: also in
LIGHTS AND




                                the initial period before 30,000 km service
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                coupon and later, between one coupon
                                and another, ordinary care is still required
                                such as for example routine check and
                                topping up the level of fluids, tyre pressure
   EMERGENCY




                                check, etc.
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




            178
SERVICE SCHEDULE PETROL VERSIONS




                                                                                                    AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                     DASHBOARD
Service coupons shall be performed every 30,000 km
                                     Thousands of kilometres      30   60   90   120   150   180




                                                                                                    DEVICES
                                                                                                    SAFETY
Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if
required                                                          ●    ●    ●    ●     ●     ●
Check light system operation (headlights, direction indicators,




                                                                                                    CORRECT USE
hazard lights, boot lights, passenger compartment lights,




                                                                                                     OF THE CAR
instrument panel warning lights, etc.)                            ●    ●    ●    ●     ●     ●
Check windscreen wiper/washer operation                           ●    ●    ●    ●     ●     ●
Check of conditions and wear of pads of front disk brakes         ●    ●    ●    ●     ●     ●




                                                                                                    LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                     MESSAGES
                                                                                                     WARNING
Check of conditions and wear of pads of rear disk brakes
(T-JET version)                                                   ●    ●    ●    ●     ●     ●
Check rear drum brake linings and wear                                 ●         ●           ●




                                                                                                    EMERGENCY
                                                                                                      IN AN
Visually inspect conditions and integrity: bodywork,
underbody protection, pipes and hoses
(exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubber parts
(boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.)                                    ●    ●    ●    ●     ●     ●




                                                                                                    SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                       CAR
Check cleanness of locks, bonnet and boot and lever
cleanness and lubrication                                         ●    ●    ●    ●     ●     ●

Check tension and adjust accessory drive belts
(1.4 with heater)                                                 ●                    ●




                                                                                                      TECHNICAL
Visually inspect accessory drive belt conditions                       ●                     ●
Replace accessory drive belt/s                                                   ●
                                                                  ●    ●    ●    ●     ●     ●




                                                                                                    INDEX
Check and adjust handbrake lever stroke, if required
Check and adjust tappet clearance, if required                         ●         ●           ●

                                                                                                   179
                                                                                Thousands of kilometres                     30            60           90           120     150   180
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD

                                Check exhaust emissions                                                                      ●            ●             ●            ●      ●     ●
                                Replace air cleaner cartridge                                                                             ●                          ●            ●
                                Change spark plugs                                                        (❍)        1
                                                                                                                             ●            ●             ●            ●      ●     ●
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                Top up fluids
                                (engine coolant, brakes, battery, windscreen washer, etc.)                                   ●            ●             ●            ●      ●     ●
                                                                                                                                          ●                                       ●
   CORRECT USE




                                Check timing belt conditions (1.4 and 1.4 T-JET versions)
    OF THE CAR




                                Check engine control system operation
                                (through diagnosis socket)                                                                   ●            ●             ●            ●      ●     ●
                                Replace timing belt (*)                                                                                                              ●
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                Change engine oil and oil filter (or every 24 months)                                        ●            ●             ●            ●      ●     ●
                                Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)                                              2                    ●                          ●            ●
   EMERGENCY




                                Change pollen filter (or every 24 months)                                                    ●            ●             ●            ●      ●     ●
     IN AN




                                 (*) Regardless of the km covered, the timing belt shall be replaced every 4 years for particularly demanding use
                                     (cold climates, driving in the city, idling for a long time) or in any case every 5 years
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                (❍)          1 For 1.4 T-JET version, in order to ensure correct operation and avoid significant damages to the engine, it is mandatory:
                      CAR




                                              - to use spark plugs specifically certified for the T-JET engine only, of the same type and brand (see paragraph “Engine”);
                                              - to replace the plugs as often as required by the Programmed Maintenance Plan;
                                              - we recommend to refer to the Fiat Dealership
     TECHNICAL




                                      2 If   the car is mainly used in cities or less than 10,000 km a year, change the engine oil and filter every 12 months.
               INDEX




            180
SERVICE SCHEDULE DIESEL VERSIONS




                                                                                                      AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                       DASHBOARD
Service coupons shall be performed every 30,000 km
                                     Thousands of kilometres        30   60   90   120   150   180




                                                                                                      DEVICES
Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if




                                                                                                      SAFETY
required                                                            ●    ●    ●    ●     ●     ●
Check light system operation (headlights, direction indicators,
hazard lights, boot lights, passenger compartment lights,




                                                                                                      CORRECT USE
                                                                                                       OF THE CAR
instrument panel warning lights, etc.)                              ●    ●    ●    ●     ●     ●
Check windscreen wiper/washer operation                             ●    ●    ●    ●     ●     ●
Check the position/wear of the windscreen/rearscreen wiper blades   ●    ●    ●    ●     ●     ●




                                                                                                      LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                       MESSAGES
                                                                                                       WARNING
Check front and rear (where provided) disk brake pad
conditions and wear                                                 ●    ●    ●    ●     ●     ●
Check rear drum brake linings and wear                                   ●         ●           ●




                                                                                                      EMERGENCY
                                                                                                        IN AN
Visually inspect conditions and integrity: bodywork,
underbody protection, pipes and hoses
(exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubber parts
(boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.)                                      ●    ●    ●    ●     ●     ●




                                                                                                      SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
Check cleanness of locks, bonnet and boot and lever




                                                                                                                         CAR
cleanness and lubrication                                           ●    ●    ●    ●     ●     ●
Visually inspect accessory drive belt conditions                         ●                     ●




                                                                                                        TECHNICAL
Replace accessory drive belt/s                                                     ●
Check and adjust handbrake lever stroke, if required                ●    ●    ●    ●     ●     ●




                                                                                                      INDEX
                                                                                                     181
                                                                             Thousands of kilometres                    30            60           90          120           150          180
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD

                                Check exhaust emissions/smoke                                                            ●            ●             ●            ●            ●             ●
                                Replace fuel filter                                                                                   ●                          ●                          ●
                                Replace air cleaner cartridge                                                                         ●                          ●                          ●
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                Top up fluids
                                (engine coolant, brakes, battery, windscreen washer, etc.)                               ●            ●             ●            ●            ●             ●
   CORRECT USE




                                Check engine control system operation
    OF THE CAR




                                (through diagnosis socket)                                                               ●            ●             ●            ●            ●             ●
                                Replace the distribution control toothed belt (*)
                                (1.6 Multijet versions)                                                                                                                       ●
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                Change engine oil and replace oil filter (or every 24 months)                            ●            ●             ●            ●            ●             ●
                                Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)                                                               ●                          ●                          ●
                                Change pollen filter (or every 24 months)                                                ●            ●             ●            ●            ●             ●
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                * Regardless of the mileage, the timing belt must be changed every 4 years for heavy-duty use (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling) or at least every 5
                                years.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




            182
REGULAR                                        DEMANDING USE                               ❒ check cleanness of locks, bonnet and




                                                                                                                                          AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                           DASHBOARD
                                                                                             boot and lever cleanness and lubrica-
INSPECTIONS                                    OF THE CAR                                    tion;
Every 1,000 km or before long journeys,        Should prevailing use of the car be under   ❒ visually inspect the conditions of: en-
check and top up if required:                  one of the following specially heavy con-     gine, gearbox, transmission, pipes and
                                                                                             hoses (exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubber




                                                                                                                                          DEVICES
                                               ditions:




                                                                                                                                          SAFETY
❒ engine coolant fluid level;                                                                parts (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.);
                                               ❒ trailer or caravan towing;
❒ brake fluid level;                                                                       ❒ check battery charge and liquid level
                                               ❒ dusty roads;                                (electrolyte) (see paragraph “Charge
❒ brake fluid level;




                                                                                                                                          CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                           OF THE CAR
                                               ❒ short distances (less than 7-8 km) re-      level check” in chapter “Maintenance
❒ tyre pressure and conditions.                  peated and with external temperatures       and care”);
❒ operation of lights (headlights, direction     below zero;                               ❒ visually inspect the accessory drive belt
  indicators, hazard lights, etc.);            ❒ frequently idling engines or long dis-      conditions;




                                                                                                                                          LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                           MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                           WARNING
❒ operation of the windscreen wiper/             tance low speed driving (e.g. taxis or    ❒ check pollen filter and replace, if re-
  washer system, position and wear of            door-to-door deliveries) or in case of      quired;
  the windscreen and rear window wiper           a long term inactivity;
  blades;                                                                                  ❒ check air cleaner and replace, if re-
                                               ❒ in cities;                                  quired.




                                                                                                                                          EMERGENCY
Every 3,000 km check the following and




                                                                                                                                            IN AN
                                               perform the following inspections more
top-up, if required:engine oil level.          frequently than shown on the Service
You are recommended to use FL                  Schedule:
Selenia products, designed and produced




                                                                                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                               ❒ check front disk brake pad conditions
specifically for Fiat cars (see table “Ca-       and wear;




                                                                                                                                                             CAR
pacities” in section “Technical specifica-
tions”).




                                                                                                                                            TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                          INDEX
                                                                                                                                         183
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   CHECKING FLUID

                                                  WARNING
                                          Never smoke while working
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                          in the engine compartment.
                                Flammable gases may be present.
                                Risk of fire.
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                        Be careful not to confuse the
                                        various types of fluids while
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                        topping up: they are all reci-
                                        procally incompatible and        fig. 1 - 1.4 version                         F0R0243m

                                may severely damage your car.
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                                                                6             4
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                                  2
                      CAR




                                                                                                      5

                                1.   Engine coolant
     TECHNICAL




                                2.   Battery
                                3.   Windscreen washer fluid
                                4.   Brake fluid                                                                  3
                                                                                                          1
                                5.   Engine oil
               INDEX




                                6.   Power steering fluid
                                                                                                                      F0R0244m
                                                                         fig. 2 - 1.4 T-JET version

            184
1.   Engine oil




                                                                                               AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                DASHBOARD
2.   Engine coolant                          6
3.   Windscreen washer fluid                                           4   5
4.   Brake fluid                                               1
5.   Battery




                                                                                               DEVICES
                                                                                               SAFETY
6.   Power steering fluid
                                              2




                                                                                               CORRECT USE
                                                                               3




                                                                                                OF THE CAR
                                                                   1




                                                                                               LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                MESSAGES
                                                                                                WARNING
                                                                                   F0R0235m
                               fig. 3 - 1.3 Multijet version




                                                                                               EMERGENCY
                                                                                                 IN AN
                                                                                               SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                 TECHNICAL
                                                                                               INDEX              CAR
                                                                                   F0R0301m
                               fig. 4 - 1.6 Multijet version

                                                                                              185
                                                                                                                             ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                                                                                                             The maximum engine oil consumption is
                                                                                                                             usually 400 grams every 1,000 km.
                                                                                                                             When the car is new, the engine needs
                                                                                                                             to run in, therefore the engine oil con-
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                                                                             sumption can only be considered stabilised
                                                                                                                             after the first 5,000 - 6,000 km.
                                                                                                                             IMPORTANT The oil consumption de-
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                                                             pends on driving style and the conditions
    OF THE CAR




                                                                    F0R0134m                                      F0R0135m
                                fig. 5 - 1.4 version                           fig. 7 - 1.3 Multijet version
                                                                                                                             under which the car is used.
                                                                                                                             IMPORTANT After adding or changing
                                                                                                                             the oil, let the engine turn over for a few
                                                                                                                             seconds and wait a few minutes after turn-
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                                                             ing it off before you check the level.
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                                                                               WARNING
     IN AN




                                                                                                                                       Proceed very carefully inside
                                                                    F0R0245m                                      F0R0302m             the engine compartment
                                fig. 6 - 1.4 T-JET version                     fig. 8 - 1.6 Multijet version                 when the engine is hot: risk of burns.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                                             Remember that the fan may start up
                                ENGINE OIL fig. 5-6-7-8                        If the oil level is near or even under the    if the engine is hot: risk of injury. Pay
                      CAR




                                                                               MIN line, add oil through the filler A to     attention to scarves, ties and other
                                Check the oil level a few minutes (about       reach the MAX line.
                                5) after the engine has stopped, with the                                                    loose fitting garments: they could get
                                car parked on level ground.                    Oil level shall never exceed the MAX line.    dragged by the moving parts.
     TECHNICAL




                                The oil level shall be included between the
                                MIN and MAX marks on the dipstick B.
                                The range between the MIN and MAX
                                levels corresponds to approximately
               INDEX




                                one litre of oil.


            186
                                              If the level is low, slowly pour a 50% mix-




                                                                                                                                          AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                           DASHBOARD
                                              ture of demineralised water and FL Sele-
                                              nia PARAFLU UP through filler A of the
                                              vessel until the level approaches the MAX
                                              line.
                                              The 50% concentration of PARAFLU UP




                                                                                                                                          DEVICES
                                                                                                                                          SAFETY
                                              demineralised water protects from freez-
                                              ing to a temperature of –35°C.
                                              For particularly hard climate conditions, we




                                                                                                                                          CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                           OF THE CAR
                                   F0R0136m
fig. 9                                        recommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UP              fig. 10                          F0R0137m

                                              and 40% demineralized water mixture.
                                                                                             WINDSCREEN WASHING
         Always top up using engine oil
         of the same types as that al-                                                       FLUID fig. 10




                                                                                                                                          LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                           MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                           WARNING
         ready in the engine.                                                                To top up, remove the cap A.
                                                         PARAFLU UP antifreeze is
                                                         used in the engine cooling sys-     Pour a mixture of water and TUTELA
                                                         tem. Use fluid of the same          PROFESSIONAL SC 35, in the fol-
                                                         type contained in the cooling       lowing concentrations:




                                                                                                                                          EMERGENCY
          Waste engine oil and oil filters    system for top-ups. PARAFLU UP may




                                                                                                                                            IN AN
          contains substances which are       not be mixed with other types of fluids.       30% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
          dangerous for the environ-          If this accidentally occurs, do not start      SC 35 and 70% water in summer.
          ment. It is advisable to have       the engine and contact a Fiat Dealer-          50% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
oil and filters changed by a Fiat Deal-       ship.




                                                                                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                             SC 35 and 50% water in winter.
ership where they will be disposed of




                                                                                                                                                             CAR
according to the law.                                                                        In case of temperatures below –20°C, use
                                                                                             undiluted TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
                                                                WARNING                      SC 35 fluid.




                                                                                                                                            TECHNICAL
ENGINE COOLANT fig. 9                                   The cooling system is pres-
                                                        surised. If required, replace
The coolant level must be checked when         the cap with an original spare part so
the engine is cold and must be between         as not to compromise system effi-
the MIN and MAX lines on the vessel.           ciency. Do not remove the cap from




                                                                                                                                          INDEX
                                               the vessel when the engine is hot: risk
                                               of burns.


                                                                                                                                         187
                                Check level through the reservoir.                                                      NOTE Carefully clean the cap of reservoir
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                                                                                                        A and the surrounding surface.
                                                                                                                        When opening the cap, make sure that no
                                               WARNING                                                                  dirt gets into the reservoir.
                                        Do not travel with the wind-                                                    For topping up always use a funnel with
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                        screen washing reservoir                                                        built in filter (mesh smaller than or equal
                                empty: the windscreen washer is fun-                                                    to 0.12 mm).
                                damental to improve visibility.
                                                                                                                        IMPORTANT Brake fluid absorbs mois-
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                                                        ture. For this reason, if the car is mainly
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                             F0R0138m
                                                                         fig. 11
                                                                                                                        used in areas with a high degree of at-
                                                                                                                        mospheric humidity, the fluid should be
                                                                         BRAKE FLUID fig. 11                            replaced at more frequent intervals than
                                                  WARNING
                                                                         Release cap A: check that the liquid con-      specified in the “Service schedule”.
LIGHTS AND




                                           Some commercial wind-
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                         tained in the tank is at the maximum level.
                                           screen washer additives are
                                flammable. The engine compartment        Fluid level in the reservoir must not ex-
                                contains hot parts which could start     ceed the MAX mark.
                                a fire if they come into contact.                                                               Prevent brake fluid which is
                                                                         Use the brake fluid shown in the “Fluids
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                                                                highly corrosive from coming
     IN AN




                                                                         and lubricants” table (see “Technical Spec-
                                                                         ifications”).                                          into contact with painted
                                                                                                                                parts. Wash with water im-
                                                                                                                        mediately if this should happen.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




            188
                                                                                                                                      AND CONTROLS
                 WARNING




                                                                                                                                       DASHBOARD
                                                                                                    Oil consumption is extremely
         Brake fluid is poisonous and                                                               low; if another top-up should
         highly corrosive. In the case                                                              be required after only a short
of accidental contact, wash the parts                                                      period of time, have the system checked
with water and mild soap and rinse                                                         for leakage at a Fiat Dealership.
with plenty of water. Call a doctor




                                                                                                                                      DEVICES
                                                                                                                                      SAFETY
immediately if swallowed.




                                                                                                                                      CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                       OF THE CAR
                                          fig. 12 - 1.4 T-JET version           F0R0139m




                                          POWER STEERING FLUID fig. 12                                    WARNING
                 WARNING                  Check that the oil level with the car on flat            Prevent power steering flu-




                                                                                                                                      LIGHTS AND
         Symbol π on the contain in-




                                                                                                                                       MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                       WARNING
                                          ground and the engine cold is between the                id from coming into contact
         dicates a synthetic brake flu-   MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir               with hot engine parts: the liquid is
id, which is different from a mineral     body. The level may go over the MAX              flammable.
fluid. Use of a mineral type fluid will   line when the oil is hot.
damage the special rubber seals of        If topping up is required, make sure the oil




                                                                                                                                      EMERGENCY
the braking system beyond repair.         you used has the same specifications as




                                                                                                                                        IN AN
                                          that already in the system.




                                                                                                                                      SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                        TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                      INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                     189
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   AIR CLEANER                                 BATTERY
                                Have the air cleaner replaced by a Fiat     The car fits a low-maintenance battery: no
                                Dealership.                                 top-ups with distilled water are needed in
                                                                            normal conditions of use.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                POLLEN FILTER                               CHECKING THE CHARGE fig. 13
                                Have the pollen filter replaced by a Fiat   Use the gauge A (where provided) on the
   CORRECT USE




                                Dealership.                                 battery lid positioned as shown in fig. 13
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                                                           F0R0140m
                                                                                                                         fig. 13
                                                                            and take action according to the colour it
                                                                            assumes.
                                                                                                                         IMPORTANT If the battery is not pro-
                                                                            Refer to the table below.                    vided with the visual indicator to verify
                                                                                                                         electrolyte charge and level, control op-
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                                                         erations and any top-up operation must
                                                                                                                         be carried out by specialised personnel
                                                                                                                         and by Fiat Dealership.
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                Brilliant white           Top-up                        Go to a Fiat Dealership
                      CAR




                                Dark without green        Low charge                    Recharge the battery
                                area in the middle                                      (go to a Fiat Dealership)
     TECHNICAL




                                Dark with green           Electrolyte and charge OK     No action needed
                                area in the middle
               INDEX




            190
CHANGING THE BATTERY




                                                                                                                                          AND CONTROLS
                                                                WARNING




                                                                                                                                           DASHBOARD
                                                                                                     Batteries contain very dan-
If required, replace the battery with a gen-             Battery liquid is poisonous                 gerous substances for the en-
uine spare part having the same specifi-                 and corrosive. Avoid contact                vironment. You are recom-
cations.                                        with the skin and eyes. Keep naked                   mended to go to a Fiat Deal-
If a battery with different specifications is   flames and sources of sparks away           ership to have the battery replaced
                                                from the battery: risk of fire and ex-      where the old battery will be disposed




                                                                                                                                          DEVICES
                                                                                                                                          SAFETY
fitted, the service intervals given in the
“Service schedule” in this section will no      plosion.                                    of respecting both the environment and
longer apply.                                                                               the laws in force.
Follow the battery manufacturer’s in-




                                                                                                                                          CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                           OF THE CAR
structions for maintenance.
IMPORTANT Check the battery charge                             WARNING                                       WARNING
once a year, preferably before the begin-               Running the battery with an                  If the car is left for long peri-
ning to winter, to prevent freezing of the              excessively low liquid level                 ods in very cold environ-




                                                                                                                                          LIGHTS AND
electrolyte. Perform this inspection more                                                   ments, remove the battery and store it




                                                                                                                                           MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                           WARNING
                                                will damage the battery beyond re-
frequently if the car is mainly used for        pair and even cause an explosion.           in a warm place to prevent freezing.
short distances or if electrical devices run-
ning with the key off are installed, partic-
ularly after-market.




                                                                                                                                          EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                            IN AN
                                                          Incorrect assembly of electric
                                                          and electronic devices may
                                                          cause severe damage to your




                                                                                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                          car. Go to a Fiat Dealership if
                                                you want to install accessories (alarms,




                                                                                                                                                             CAR
                                                mobile phone, etc.): they will suggest
                                                the most suitable devices and advise
                                                you if a higher capacity battery needs
                                                to be installed.




                                                                                                                                            TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                          INDEX
                                                                                                                                         191
                                                                               IMPORTANT A battery which is kept at           The total intake of these systems (facto-
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                    WARNING
                                                                               a charge of less than 50% (optical indica-     ry and after-market) must be less than 0.6
                                         Always wear the proper pro-           tor with dark colour without green area        mA x Ah (of the battery) as shown in the
                                         tective eyewear when work-            in the middle) for any length of time will     following table:
                                ing on the battery or near it.                 be damaged by sulphation leading to a re-
                                                                               duction in cranking power.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                               The battery will also be more at risk of             Battery             Maximum
                                                                               freezing (e.g. already at -10°C). Refer to                              permissible
                                USEFUL ADVICE FOR                              the paragraph “Car inactivity” in “Starting                               loadless
                                LENGTHENING THE LIFE OF                        and driving” if the car is left parked for a                           consumption
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                YOUR BATTERY                                   long time.
                                                                                                                                     40 Ah                24 mA
                                To avoid draining your battery and length-     If after buying the car, you want to install
                                en its life, observe the following indica-     electric accessories which require per-               50 Ah                30 mA
                                tions:                                         manent electric supply (alarm, etc.) con-
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                               tact Fiat Dealership whose qualified per-             60 Ah                36 mA
                                ❒ when you park the car, ensure the            sonnel, in addition to suggesting the most
                                  doors, tailgate and bonnet are closed        suitable devices, will evaluate the overall
                                  properly;                                    electric absorption, checking whether the
   EMERGENCY




                                ❒ switch off all lights inside the car: the    car’s electric system is capable of with-
     IN AN




                                  car is however equipped with a system        standing the load required, or whether it
                                  which switches all internal lights off au-   should be integrated with a more power-
                                  tomatically;                                 ful battery.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                ❒ do not keep accessories (e.g. sound sys-     Since these devices continue absorbing en-
                                                                               ergy even when the ignition key is off, they
                      CAR




                                  tem, hazard lights, etc.) switched on for
                                  a long time when the engine is not run-      gradually run down the battery.
                                  ning;
                                ❒ before performing any operation on the
     TECHNICAL




                                  electrical system, disconnect the bat-
                                  tery negative cable;
                                ❒ make sure that battery terminals are al-
                                  ways be perfectly tight.
               INDEX




            192
WHEELS AND TYRES                                                                              ❒ a tyre will age even if it is not used




                                                                                                                                             AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                              DASHBOARD
                                                                                                much. Cracks in the tread and on the
Check the pressure of each type, includ-                                                        sidewalls are a sign of ageing. Have the
ing the spare, approximately once every                                                         tyres checked by specialised personnel
two weeks and before starting a long jour-                                                      if they have been fitted for longer than
ney: this check must be performed with                                                          6 years. Remember to check the spare




                                                                                                                                             DEVICES
                                                                                                                                             SAFETY
the tyre rested and cold.                                                                       wheel very carefully;
It is normal for pressure to increase when                                                    ❒ In the case of replacement, always fit
the car is used. For the correct tyre in-                                                       new tyres, avoiding those of dubious
                                                                                                origin;




                                                                                                                                             CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                              OF THE CAR
flation pressure, see “Wheels” in “Tech-       fig. 14                             F0R0141m

nical specifications” section.                                                                ❒ If a tyre is changed, also change the in-
Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyre        IMPORTANT NOTES                                  flation valve;
wear fig. 14:                                  ❒ Avoid braking suddenly, burning starts       ❒ to allow even wear between the front




                                                                                                                                             LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                              MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                              WARNING
A normal pressure: evenly worn tread.            and violent knocks against the curb,           and rear tyres, it is advisable to change
                                                 potholes or other obstacles if possible.       them over every 10-15 thousand kilo-
B low pressure: tread particularly worn          Long distances on rough roads may              metres, keeping them on the same side
  on the edges.                                  damage the tyres;                              of the car so as not to reverse the di-
                                                                                                rection of rotation.




                                                                                                                                             EMERGENCY
C excessive pressure: tread particularly       ❒ check the tyres regularly for cuts on the




                                                                                                                                               IN AN
  worn in the middle.                            sides, swelling or irregular tread wear.
The tyres must be replaced when the              Go to a Fiat Dealership if required.
tread is less than 1.6 mm thick. In all cas-   ❒ do not over load your car: this may                          WARNING




                                                                                                                                             SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
es, follow the laws in force in the coun-        cause serious damage to wheels and                   Remember that the road
try where you are driving.




                                                                                                                                                                CAR
                                                 tyres;                                               holding qualities of your car
                                               ❒ if a tyre is punctured, stop immediate-      also depends on the correct inflation
                                                 ly and charge it to avoid damage to the      pressure of the tyres.
                                                 tyre, the rim, suspensions and steering




                                                                                                                                               TECHNICAL
                                                 system;




                                                                                                                                             INDEX
                                                                                                                                            193
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                  WARNING                   RUBBER HOSES                                  WINDSCREEN WIPER
                                        Excessively low pressure will
                                        cause overheating of the         Carefully follow the information contained
                                                                         in the “Service schedule” in this section     BLADES
                                tyre and may cause severe tyre dam-
                                age.                                     for maintenance of brake system and fuel      Periodically clean the rubber part using
                                                                         feed rubber hoses.                            special products; TUTELA PROFES-
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                         Ozone, high temperatures and prolonged        SIONAL SC 35 is recommended.
                                                                         lack of fluid in the system may cause hard-   Replace the blades if the rubber edge is
                                                                         ening and cracking of the hoses, with pos-    deformed or worn. In all cases, it is ad-
                                                WARNING
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                         sible leaks. Careful inspections are there-   visable to replace them approximately
                                         Do not exchange the tyres       fore necessary.                               once a year.
                                         from the left to the right of
                                the car and vice versa.                                                                A few simple precautions can reduce the
                                                                                                                       possibility of damage to the blades:
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                                                       ❒ make sure that the rubber part is not
                                                                                                                         stuck to the windscreen at sub-zero
                                                WARNING                                                                  temperatures. Use an antifreeze prod-
                                                                                                                         uct to release it if required.
                                        Do not repaint alloy wheel
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                                                       ❒ remove the snow from the window:
     IN AN




                                        rims at temperatures higher
                                than 150°C. The mechanical features                                                      this will avoid overstressing the elec-
                                of the wheels could be compromised.                                                      trical motor in addition to protecting
                                                                                                                         the blades;
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                                       ❒ do not operate the windscreen wipers
                      CAR




                                                                                                                         on dry glass.
     TECHNICAL




                                                                                                                                       WARNING
                                                                                                                               Driving with worn wiper
                                                                                                                               blades is a serious hazard,
                                                                                                                       because visibility is reduced in bad
                                                                                                                       weather.
               INDEX




            194
                                             How to insert the blade:




                                                                                                                                           AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                            DASHBOARD
                                             ❒ insert the blade fastening tabs in the
                                               hole on the end of the arm;
                                             ❒ refit the arm with the blade on the
                                               windscreen.




                                                                                                                                           DEVICES
                                                                                                                                           SAFETY
                                                                                                                                           CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                            OF THE CAR
                                  F0R0236m                                                                                     F0R0143m
fig. 15                                                                                 fig. 16

Replacing the windscreen wiper                                                          SPRAY NOZZLES
blades fig. 15




                                                                                                                                           LIGHTS AND
                                                                                        Windscreen washer fig. 16




                                                                                                                                            MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                            WARNING
How to remove the blade:
❒ raise the windscreen wiper arm A from                                                 If there is no jet of fluid, firstly check that
  the windscreen;                                                                       there is fluid in the reservoir: see “Check-
                                                                                        ing fluid levels” in this section).
❒ turn blade B 90° around pin C, locat-




                                                                                                                                           EMERGENCY
                                                                                        Then check that the nozzle holes are not




                                                                                                                                             IN AN
  ed at the end of the wiper arm;
                                                                                        clogged, if necessary using a needle.
❒ press the blade locking tabs;
                                                                                        The windscreen jets are directed by ad-
❒ remove the blade from pin C.                                                          justing the angle of the nozzles.




                                                                                                                                           SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                        Fluid jets shall be directed at about 1/3




                                                                                                                                                              CAR
                                                                                        height from the window upper edge.




                                                                                                                                             TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                           INDEX
                                                                                                                                          195
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   BODYWORK                                      These are the most important:                BODY AND UNDERBODY
                                                                              ❒ paint products and systems which give      WARRANTY
                                PROTECTION FROM                                 the car particular resistance to corro-    Your car is covered by warranty against
                                ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS                              sion and abrasion;                         perforation due to rust of any original el-
                                                                              ❒ use of galvanised (or pre-treated) steel   ement of the structure or body.
                                The main causes of corrosion are the fol-
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                lowing:                                         sheets, with high resistance to corro-     For the general terms of this warranty, re-
                                                                                sion;                                      fer to Fiat Warranty Booklet.
                                ❒ atmospheric pollution;
                                                                              ❒ spraying the underbody, engine com-
                                ❒ salty air and humidity (coastal areas, or
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                partment, wheelhouse internal parts
    OF THE CAR




                                  hot humid climates);                          and other parts with highly protective
                                                                                wax products;
                                ❒ seasonal environment conditions.
                                                                              ❒ spraying of plastic materials for pro-
                                Not to be underestimated is also the abra-      tective purposes in the most exposed
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                sive action of wind-borne atmospheric           points: under the doors, inside the
                                dust and sand and mud and gravel raised         mudguard, along the edges, etc.
                                by other cars.
                                                                              ❒ use of “open” boxed sections to pre-
                                On your car, Fiat implemented the best          vent condensation and pockets of mois-
   EMERGENCY




                                manufacturing technologies to effectively       ture from triggering rust inside.
     IN AN




                                protect the bodywork against corrosion.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




            196
ADVICE FOR PRESERVING                           To correctly wash the car:                       Do not wash the car after it has been




                                                                                                                                                 AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                                  DASHBOARD
THE BODYWORK                                                                                     parked in the sun or when the engine is
                                                ❒ remove the aerial from the roof to pre-        bonnet is hot: this could take the shine off
                                                  vent damage to it if the car is washed in      the paint.
Paint                                             an automatic system;
Paintwork does not only serve an aes-                                                            Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in
                                                ❒ wash the body using a low pressure jet         the same way as the rest of the car.




                                                                                                                                                 DEVICES
                                                                                                                                                 SAFETY
thetic purpose, but also protects the un-         of water;
derlying sheet metal.                                                                            Where possible, do not park under trees;
                                                ❒ wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy so-        the resinous substance many species re-
Touch up abrasions and scratches immedi-          lution over the bodywork, frequently
ately to prevent the formation of rust. On-                                                      lease give the paint a dull appearance and




                                                                                                                                                 CORRECT USE
                                                  rinsing with the sponge;




                                                                                                                                                  OF THE CAR
ly use genuine spare paint products for                                                          increase the possibility of triggering rust
touch-ups (see “Bodywork paint identifi-        ❒ rinse well with water and dry with a jet       processes.
cation plate” in the “Technical Specifica-        of air or a chamois leather.                   IMPORTANT Bird droppings must be
tions” section).                                Dry the parts less in sight particularly care-   washed off immediately and thoroughly as




                                                                                                                                                 LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                                  MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                                  WARNING
Normal maintenance of paintwork consists        fully, such as the door frames and the           the acid they contain is particularly ag-
in washing the car: the frequency depends       headlight frames, where water may stag-          gressive.
on the conditions and environment where         nate more easily. It is a good idea to leave
the car is used. For example, it is advisable   the car in the open for a while after wash-
                                                ing it to give time for the water to evap-




                                                                                                                                                 EMERGENCY
to wash the car more often in areas with
                                                orate.




                                                                                                                                                   IN AN
a high environmental pollution or on roads                                                                 Detergents cause water pollu-
sprinkled with salt.                                                                                       tion. The car should be washed
                                                                                                           in areas equipped for collect-
                                                                                                           ing and purifying the liquid




                                                                                                                                                 SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                 used in the washing process.




                                                                                                                                                   TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                                 INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                                197
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   Windows                                       Front headlights                                INTERIORS
                                Use specific window cleaner products.         IMPORTANT Never use aromatic sub-
                                                                              stances (e.g.: petrol) or ketenes (e.g.: ace-   Periodically check that water is not
                                Use also clean cloths to avoid scratching     tone) for cleaning front headlight plastic      trapped under the mats (due to water
                                the glass or damaging the transparency.       lens.                                           dripping off shoes, umbrellas, etc.) which
                                                                                                                              could cause oxidisation of the sheet
   DEVICES




                                IMPORTANT The inside of the rear win-
   SAFETY




                                dow should be wiped gently with a cloth                                                       metal.
                                in the direction of the filaments to avoid
                                damaging the heating device.
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                Engine compartment                                                                                              WARNING
                                                                                                                                        Never use flammable prod-
                                Wash the engine compartment carefully                                                                   ucts, such as petrol ether or
                                after the end of the winter. Be careful not                                                   rectified petrol to clean inside the car.
LIGHTS AND




                                to direct the jet of water onto electronic
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                                                              The electrostatic charges which are
                                control units. Adequately protect the up-                                                     generated by rubbing during the
                                per air vents to prevent damage to the                                                        cleaning operation may cause a fire.
                                windscreen wiper motor. Have this op-
                                eration performed at a specialised work-
   EMERGENCY




                                shop.
     IN AN




                                IMPORTANT Perform this operation on
                                a cold engine and with the key at STOP.
                                After the washing operation, make sure
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                that the various protections (e.g. rubber
                      CAR




                                caps and guards) have not removed or
                                damaged.
     TECHNICAL
               INDEX




            198
                                                                                        INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS




                                                                                                                                          AND CONTROLS
               WARNING




                                                                                                                                           DASHBOARD
                                                       The fabric upholstery of your
         Do not keep aerosol cans in                   car is designed to withstand     It is advisable to clean interior parts with a
         the car: risk of explosion.                   the normal wear and tear of      moist cloth and a solution of water and mild
Aerosol cans must not be exposed to                    your car for a long time. Some   soap. Use specific products for cleaning plas-
temperatures higher than 50°C. The           precautions are however needed. Avoid      tic, without solvents and specifically de-
temperature may raise well beyond            prolonged rubbing against clothing ac-     signed to prevent damage to the appearance




                                                                                                                                          DEVICES
                                                                                                                                          SAFETY
that figure when the car is left in the      cessories, such as metal buckles, Velcro   and colour of the treated parts to remove
sun.                                         strips and the like, which by applying a   grease and tough stains.
                                             high pressure on the fabric in a small
                                             area could cause the breakage of some      IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petro-




                                                                                                                                          CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                           OF THE CAR
                                             threads and damage the upholstery.         leum to clean the instrument panel.
CLEANING SEATS AND FABRIC
PARTS




                                                                                                                                          LIGHTS AND
Remove dust with a soft brush or a vacu-




                                                                                                                                           MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                           WARNING
um cleaner. It is advisable to use a moist
brush on velvet upholstery.
Rub the seats with a sponge moistened




                                                                                                                                          EMERGENCY
with a solution of water and neutral de-




                                                                                                                                            IN AN
tergent.




                                                                                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                            TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                          INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                         199
                                GENUINE LEATHER STEERING                       If window cleaner accidentally drips onto   IMPORTANT Be carefully when arranging
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                WHEEL/GEAR LEVER KNOB                          the steering wheel or gear lever knob,      a steering wheel lock device, where applic-
                                                                               wipe away immediately and then wash the     able, to prevent damaging the leather up-
                                These components must be cleaned with          concerned area with mild soap and water.    holstery by rubbing.
                                mild soap and water only.
                                Never use spirit and/or alcohol based
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                products.
                                Before using off-the-shelves products de-
                                signed for cleaning car interiors, make sure
   CORRECT USE




                                that they do not contain spirit and/or al-
    OF THE CAR




                                cohol based substances before using them.
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING

   EMERGENCY
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




            200
T E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N S




                                                                                                                            AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                             DASHBOARD
                        IDENTIFICATION DATA .................................................                        202
                        ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS...............                                              204




                                                                                                                            DEVICES
                                                                                                                            SAFETY
                        ENGINE ..................................................................................    205
                        FUEL FEED/IGNITION .......................................................                   206
                        TRANSMISSION ..................................................................              207




                                                                                                                            CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                             OF THE CAR
                        BRAKES ...................................................................................   207
                        SUSPENSIONS.......................................................................           208
                        STEERING...............................................................................      208




                                                                                                                            LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                             MESSAGES
                                                                                                                             WARNING
                        WHEELS ..................................................................................    209
                        DIMENSIONS.........................................................................          213
                        PERFORMANCE ...................................................................              214




                                                                                                                            EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                              IN AN
                        WEIGHTS ...............................................................................      215
                        CAPACITIES...........................................................................        216




                                                                                                                            SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                        FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS..............................................                          217




                                                                                                                                               CAR
                        FUEL CONSUMPTION .......................................................                     219
                        CO2 EMISSIONS ..................................................................             221




                                                                                                                              TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                            INDEX
                                                                                                                           201
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   IDENTIFICATION DATA                                                                           H Maximum vehicle weight on rear axle.
                                                                                                                              I   Engine type.
                                Take note of the identification codes. The
                                following identification codes are printed                                                    L Body version code.
                                and shown on the plates:                                                                      M Spare part code.
                                ❒ Model plate.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                                                                                              N Smoke opacity index (for diesel en-
                                ❒ Chassis marking.                                                                              gines).
                                ❒ Bodywork paint identification plate.
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                                   F0R0247m
                                                                             fig. 1
                                ❒ Engine marking.
                                                                             MODEL PLATE fig. 1
                                                                             This is applied to the right-hand side of the
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                             spare wheel shelf and shows the following
                                                                             data:
                                                                             B Homologation number.
                                                                             C Vehicle type code.
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                                                             D Chassis number.
                                                                             E Maximum vehicle weight fully loaded.
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                             F Maximum vehicle weight fully loaded
                                                                               with trailer.
                      CAR




                                                                             G Maximum vehicle weight on front axle.
     TECHNICAL
               INDEX




            202
                                                                                         ENGINE MARKING




                                                                                                                                      AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                       DASHBOARD
                                                                                         Engine marking is stamped on the cylinder
                                                                                         block and includes the model and the
                                                                                         chassis number.




                                                                                                                                      DEVICES
                                                                                                                                      SAFETY
                                                                                                                                      CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                       OF THE CAR
                                  F0R0145m                                    F0R0146m
fig. 2                                       fig. 3

BODYWORK PAINT                               CHASSIS MARKING fig. 3
IDENTIFICATION PLATE fig. 2                  This is printed on the passegner com-




                                                                                                                                      LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                       MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                       WARNING
This plate is applied to the tailgate and    partment floor bed near the front right
shows the following data:                    seat.
A Paint manufacturer.                        ❒ car model (ZFA 323000);
                                             ❒ chassis number.




                                                                                                                                      EMERGENCY
B Colour name.




                                                                                                                                        IN AN
C Fiat colour code.
D Respray and touch up code.




                                                                                                                                      SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                        TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                      INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                     203
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS


                                Versions                Engine type code   Bodywork version code
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                1.4                        350A1000            323AXA1A 00

                                1.4 T-JET                  198A4000            323AXC1A 03
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                1.3 Multijet               199A3000            323AXB1A 01

                                1.6 Multijet               198A3000            323AXF1A 06
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING

   EMERGENCY
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




            204
ENGINE




                                                                                                                                      AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                       DASHBOARD
GENERAL                                         1.4               1.4 T-JET              1.3 Multijet           1.6 Multijet
Engine code                                 350A1000               198A4000               199A3000               198A3000




                                                                                                                                      DEVICES
                                                                                                                                      SAFETY
Cycle                                          Otto                   Otto                  Diesel                  Diesel
Number and layout of cylinders               4 in line              4 in line              4 in line               4 in line




                                                                                                                                      CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                       OF THE CAR
Piston bore and stroke           mm           72 x 84              72,0 x 84,0             69.6 x 82             79.5 x 80.5
                                   3
Total displacement               cm            1368                   1368                   1248                   1598
Compression ratio                           11.1 ± 0.2                 9.8                17.6 ± 0.4             16.5 ± 0.4




                                                                                                                                      LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                       MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                       WARNING
Maximum power (EEC)              kW             57                     88                     66                     77
                                  HP            77                     120                    90                     105
corresponding ratio              rpm           6000                   5000                   4000                   4000
Maximum torque (EEC)             Nm             115                    206




                                                                                                                                      EMERGENCY
                                                                                              200                    290
                                 kgm           11.7




                                                                                                                                        IN AN
                                                                       21                    20.3                   29.6
corresponding ratio              rpm           3000                   1750                   1750                   1500
Spark plugs                                   NGK                     NGK
                                                                                               –                      –




                                                                                                                                      SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                            ZKR7A-10                 IKR9F8




                                                                                                                                                         CAR
Fuel                                     Unleaded petrol 95     Unleaded petrol 95 Diesel fuel for motor Diesel fuel for motor
                                               RON                    RON                  vehicles               vehicles
                                       (EN228 Specifications) (EN228 Specifications) (EN590 specifications) (EN590 specifications)




                                                                                                                                        TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                      INDEX
                                                                                                                                     205
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   FUEL FEED/IGNITION

                                                                1.4 - 1.6 - 1.8                      1.4 T-JET                1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                                        Multipoint electronic injection      Multipoint sequential phased       Multijet direct injection
                                Fuel feed                                                      electronic injection with           “Common Rail”
                                                                                          turbosupercharger and intercooler
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                             WARNING
                                            Modifications or repairs to the fuel feed system that are not carried out properly or do not take the system’s
                                            technical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




            206
TRANSMISSION




                                                                                                                                  AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                   DASHBOARD
                       1.4 - 1.4 T-JET - 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.3 Multijet                               1.6 Multijet
Gearbox                      Five forward gears plus reverse                           Six forward gears plus reverse
                          with synchronisers for forward gears                      with synchronisers for forward gears




                                                                                                                                  DEVICES
                                                                                                                                  SAFETY
Clutch                 Self-adjusting with pedal without idle stroke             Self-adjusting with pedal without idle stroke
Drive                                     Front                                                     Front




                                                                                                                                  CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                   OF THE CAR
BRAKES




                                                                                                                                  LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                   MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                   WARNING
                                                         1.4 - 1.4 T-JET - 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet
Service brakes:




                                                                                                                                  EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                    IN AN
   – front                                                                           disk
   – rear                                                        drum / disk (T-JET version and 1.6 Multijet)




                                                                                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
Parking brake                                                controlled by hand lever, operating on rear brakes




                                                                                                                                                     CAR
IMPORTANT Water, ice and salt sprinkled on the roads may deposit on the brake disks reducing braking efficiency
the first time the brakes are applied.




                                                                                                                                    TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                  INDEX
                                                                                                                                 207
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   SUSPENSIONS
                                                                     1.4 - 1.4 T-JET - 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet

                                Front                                             Mc Pherson independent wheels
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                Rear                                          twisting axle with interconnected wheels
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                STEERING
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                     1.4 - 1.4 T-JET - 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet
                                Type                                       rack and pinion with hydraulic power steering
   EMERGENCY




                                Steering circle (kerb to kerb)   m                        10.5 (❏) / 11 ( )
     IN AN




                                (❏) With 15” tyres
                                ( ) With 16” and 17” tyres
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




            208
WHEELS                                       SPARE WHEEL




                                                                                                                                         AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                          DASHBOARD
                                             Pressed steel rim Tubeless tyre.
RIMS AND TYRES
                                             WHEEL GEOMETRY
Pressed steel or alloy rims. Tubeless ra-
dial carcass tyres. All approved tyres are   Toe-in total front: 0.3 ± 1 mm




                                                                                                                                         DEVICES
                                                                                                                                         SAFETY
listed in the Log Book.                      Toe-in total rear: 1.7 ± 0.5 mm
IMPORTANT In the event of discrepan-         The values refer to the car in running or-
cies between the information provided on     der.




                                                                                                                                         CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                          OF THE CAR
                                                                                                                             F0R0147m
this “Owner’s handbook” and the “Log                                                      fig. 4
book”, consider the specifications shown
in the log book only.                                                                     READING TYRE
Respect the prescribed size to ensure                                                     MARKINGS fig. 4




                                                                                                                                         LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                          MESSAGES
safety of the car in movement. Fit tyres




                                                                                                                                          WARNING
                                                                                          Example: 185/65 R 15 88T
of the same make and type on all wheels.
                                                                                          185 = Nominal width (S, distance in mm
IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubes                                                                between sidewalls).
with Tubeless tyres.




                                                                                                                                         EMERGENCY
                                                                                          65 = Height/width ratio (H/S) in per-




                                                                                                                                           IN AN
                                                                                               centage.
                                                                                          R        = Radial tyre.
                                                                                          15 = Rim diameter in inches (Ø).




                                                                                                                                         SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                          88 = Load rate (capacity).




                                                                                                                                                            CAR
                                                                                          T        = Maximum speed rating.




                                                                                                                                           TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                         INDEX
                                                                                                                                        209
                                Maximum speed rating       Load rating (capacity)        READING RIM
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                Q = up to 160 km/h.        70 = 335 kg     81 = 462 kg   MARKINGS fig. 4

                                R = up to 170 km/h.        71 = 345 kg     82 = 475 kg   Example: 6J x 15 ET44

                                S = up to 180 km/h.        72 = 355 kg     83 = 487 kg   6    = rim width in inches 1.
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                T = up to 190 km/h.        73 = 365 kg     84 = 500 kg   J    = rim drop centre outline (side
                                                                                                projection where the tyre bead
                                ?U = up to 200 km/h.       74 = 375 kg     85 = 515 kg          rests) 2.
                                H = up to 210 km/h.        75 = 387 kg     86 = 530 kg   15   = rim nominal diameter in inches
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                (corresponds to diameter of the
                                V = up to 240 km/h.        76 = 400 kg     87 = 545 kg          tyre to be mounted) 3 = Ø.
                                Maximum speed rating       77 = 412 kg     88 = 560 kg   ET44 = wheel camber angle (distance be-
                                for snow tyres             78 = 425 kg     89 = 580 kg          tween the disc/rim supporting
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                                plane and the wheel rim centre
                                QM + S = up to 160 km/h.   79 = 437 kg     90 = 600 kg          line).
                                TM + S = up to 190 km/h.   80 = 450 kg     91 = 615 kg
                                HM + S = up to 210 km/h.
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




            210
Version                        Rims                             Tyres fitted          Spare wheel (where provided)




                                                                                                                               AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                DASHBOARD
                                                                                        Rim               Tyre
                          6J X 15” - ET 44                     185/65 R15 84T        6J X 15” - ET 44    185/65 R15 84T
                                                             195/60 R15 88H (❏)                          195/60 R15 88H
1.4




                                                                                                                               DEVICES
                                                                                                                               SAFETY
                          6J X 16” - ET 41                   195/55 R16 87H (❍)      6J X 15” - ET 44   185/65 R15 84T (**)

                          6J X 15” - ET 44                     185/65 R15 84T        6J X 15” - ET 44    185/65 R15 84T
                                                             195/60 R15 88H (❏)                          195/60 R15 88H




                                                                                                                               CORRECT USE
1.4 T-JET




                                                                                                                                OF THE CAR
1.3 Multijet
                          6J X 16” - ET 41                   195/55 R16 87H (❍)      6J X 15” - ET 44   185/65 R15 84T (**)
1.6 Multijet
                         6.5J X 17” - ET 41                 205/45 R17 88V (*) (▲)   6J X 15” - ET 44   185/65 R15 84T (**)




                                                                                                                               LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                WARNING
(❏) Alloy rim
(❍) Optional alloy rim for versions/markets where provided




                                                                                                                               EMERGENCY
(*) Not snow chains




                                                                                                                                 IN AN
(▲) Optional tyre for versions/markets where provided
(**) Using this spare wheel, vehicle max speed is 80 km/h




                                                                                                                               SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                 TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                               INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                              211
                                COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD

                                Tyre                                                          Medium load                                      Full load
                                                                                      Front                    Rear                  Front                 Rear
                                185/65 R15 84T                                          2.3                     2.1                    2.3                 2.3
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                195/60 R15 88H                                          2.3                     2.1                    2.3                 2.3
                                195/55 R16 87H                                          2.3                     2.1                    2.4                 2.4
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                205/45 R17 88V                                          2.4                     2.2                    2.5                 2.4
                                Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.
                                With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING

   EMERGENCY
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




            212
DIMENSIONS




                                                                                                                                               AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                                DASHBOARD
Dimensions are expressed in mm and re-
fer to the vehicle fitted with standard
tyres.




                                                                                                                                               DEVICES
                                                                                                                                               SAFETY
The height refers to the unladen vehicle.

Boot volume




                                                                                                                                               CORRECT USE
Unladen boot volume




                                                                                                                                                OF THE CAR
(V.D.A. standards) ...................... 500 dm3
Boot capacity with rear
seat folded..................................... 870 dm3




                                                                                                                                               LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                                MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                                WARNING
                                                                                                                                               EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                                 IN AN
                                                           fig. 5




                                                                                                                                               SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                   F0R0237m




                                                                                                                                                                  CAR
Versions                           A               B                 C      D          E               F            G             H

1.4 - 1.3 Multijet




                                                                                                                                                 TECHNICAL
                                 4560             928               2603   1029   1494/1487 (*)   1467/1471 (❏)   1946.21 1482.5/1483.5 (❏)
1.4 T-JET
1.6 Multijet

IMPORTANT Track measurements may vary according to rim/tyre size.




                                                                                                                                               INDEX
(*) With lower trim for versions/markets where provided
(❏) Full load

                                                                                                                                              213
                                                        WARNING
                TECHNICAL        CAR         IN AN     LIGHTS AND   CORRECT USE     SAFETY              DASHBOARD
      INDEX   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE   EMERGENCY    MESSAGES     OF THE CAR     DEVICES            AND CONTROLS




214
                                                                                        1.4

                                                                                  165
                                                                                                                                                              PERFORMANCE
                                                                                                          Top admitted speed after initial car use in km/h.




                                                                                  195
                                                                                        1.4 T-JET

                                                                                  170
                                                                                        1.3 Multijet

                                                                                  190
                                                                                        1.6 Multijet
WEIGHTS




                                                                                                                                        AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                         DASHBOARD
Weights (kg)                                         1.4               1.4 T-JET           1.3 Multijet          1.6 Multijet
Unladen weight




                                                                                                                                        DEVICES
(with all liquids, fuel tank filled to




                                                                                                                                        SAFETY
90 % and without optional equipment):               1160                  1200                  1185                  1290
Payload (*) including the driver:                   500                    500                   500                   500




                                                                                                                                        CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                         OF THE CAR
Maximum admitted loads (**)
– front axle:                                       1000                  1000                  1000                  1000
– rear axle:                                         900                  900                    900                   900
– total:                                            1660                  1670                  1685                  1790




                                                                                                                                        LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                         MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                         WARNING
Towable loads
– trailer with brakes:                              1200                  1200                  1200                  1200
– trailer without brakes:                            500                  500                    500                   500




                                                                                                                                        EMERGENCY
Maximum load on roof:




                                                                                                                                          IN AN
                                                     75                    75                    75                    75
Maximum load on tow hitch
(trailer with brakes):                               70                    70                    70                    70




                                                                                                                                        SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                                           CAR
(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads in the boot and/or on the roof so that they comply
     with these limits.




                                                                                                                                          TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                        INDEX
                                                                                                                                       215
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                   CAPACITIES
                                                                     1.4             1.4             1.3             1.6           Specified fuels and
                                                                                    T-JET           Multijet        Multijet       genuine lubricants
                                Fuel tank:              litres       45               45                –                          Unleaded petrol with no less than
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                including a reserve of: litres      5÷7              5÷7                –                          95 R.O.N.
                                                                                                                                   (EN 228 Specification)
                                Fuel tank:              litres        –                –               45              45          Diesel fuel for motor vehicles
   CORRECT USE
    OF THE CAR




                                including a reserve of: litres        –                –              5÷7             5÷7          (EN590 Specification)
                                Cooling system                                                                                     Mixture of 50% demineralised
                                engine:                 litres       5.8               6               7.1             6.3         water and 50% PARAFLU UP (❒)
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES




                                                                                                                        –          SELENIA K P.E.
 WARNING




                                Engine sump:            litres       2.4             2.75               –
                                Engine sump and filter: litres       2.6              2.9               –               –
                                Engine sump:            litres        –                –               3.0             4.3         SELENIA WR
                                Engine sump and filter: litres        –                –               3.2             4.6
   EMERGENCY
     IN AN




                                Gearbox/                                                                                           TUTELA CAR
                                differential casing:       kg      1.5 (▲)          1.7 (▲)          1,7 (▲)         2.0 (❍)       TECHNYX (▲)
                                                                                                                                   TUTELA CAR MATRYX (❍)
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                Power steering:            kg        0.9              0.9              0.9             0.9         TUTELA GI/A
                      CAR




                                Hydraulic brake circuit: kg      0.4 / 0.5 (*)   0.46 / 0.56 (*)   0.4 / 0.5 (*)   0.4 / 0.5 (*)   TUTELA TOP 4
                                Windscreen washer                                                                                  Mixture of water and
     TECHNICAL




                                reservoir:        litres              3                3                3               3          TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
                                                                                                                                   SC 35
                                (*) Versions with ABS
                                (❒) For particularly hard climate conditions, we recommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralized water mixture.
               INDEX




            216
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS




                                                                                                                                  AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                   DASHBOARD
RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS AND SPECIFICATIONS

Use                           Fluid and lubricant specifications                Genuine fluids and          Changing




                                                                                                                                  DEVICES
                                                                                                                                  SAFETY
                                  for correct car operation                        lubricants               frequency




                                                                                                                                  CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                   OF THE CAR
Lubricants for      SAE 5W-40 ACEA A3/B3 grade totally                         SELENIA K                 According to
petrol engines      synthetic lubricant.                                       Contractual Technical     Service Schedule
                    Qualification FIAT 9.55535-M2                              Reference N° F214.I05




                                                                                                                                  LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                   MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                   WARNING
Lubricants for      Synthetic base lubricants SAE 5W-40 grade.                 SELENIA WR                According to
diesel engines      Qualification FIAT 9.55535-N2                              Contractual Technical     Service Schedule
                                                                               Reference N° F515.D06




                                                                                                                                  EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                    IN AN
For diesel engines, in the event of emergencies when genuine products are not available, lubricants providing at least ACEA B4




                                                                                                                                  SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
performance are allowed; in that case, engine best performance is not guaranteed; we recommend to have it replaced as soon as




                                                                                                                                                     CAR
possible with the recommended lubricants by the Fiat Dealership.
The use of products with specifications below ACEA A3/B3 standards for petrol engines and ACEA B4 standards for diesel engines
could cause damage to the engine not covered under the warranty.




                                                                                                                                    TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                  INDEX
                                                                                                                                 217
                                Use                                 Fluid and lubricant specifications                      Original fluids and             Applications
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                                                        for correct car operation                               lubricants
                                                          LSynthetic-based oils, grade SAE 75W- 85.                        TUTELA CAR                  Mechanical gearbox and
                                                          Qualification FIAT 9.55550-MX3                                   MATRIX                      differential (1.3 Multijet
                                                                                                                           Contractual Technical       Dualogic and 1.6 Multijet
   DEVICES




                                                                                                                           Reference N° F108.F02
   SAFETY




                                                                                                                                                       versions)
                                                          Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 75W-85.                           TUTELA CAR                  Mechanical gearbox
                                                          Qualification FIAT 9.55550-MX3                                   TECHNYX                     and differential
                                                                                                                           Contractual Technical       (petrol and 1.3 Multijet
   CORRECT USE




                                                                                                                           Reference N° F010.B05
    OF THE CAR




                                Lubricants and                                                                                                         versions)
                                greases                  Lubricant for automatic transmissions.                            TUTELA GI/A                  Hydraulic power
                                for transmission         Qualification FIAT 9.55550-AG1.                                   Contractual Technical        steering
                                                         NLGI 1-2 consistency.                                             Reference N° F002.B92
                                                          Grease containing Molybdenum bisulphide for high                 TUTELA ALL STAR             CV joints
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                          temperature appliances. Qualification FIAT 9.55580               Contractual Technical       on wheel side
                                                          N.L.G.I. 1-2 consistency                                         Reference N° F702.G07
                                                          Specifc grease to be used for constant-velocity joints with      TUTELA STAR 700             CV joints on differential
                                                          low friction coefficient. Qualification FIAT 9.55580             Contractual Technical       side
   EMERGENCY




                                                          N.L.G.I. 0-1 consistency.                                        Reference N° F701.C07
     IN AN




                                                          Synthetic fluid FMVSS no. 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925                    TUTELA TOP 4                Brake and clutch
                                Brake fluids              SAE J1704, CUNA NC 956- 01.                                      Contractual Technical       hydraulic controls
                                                          Qualification FIAT 9.55597                                       Reference N° F001.A93
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                          Protective with antifreeze action, red colour                    PARAFLU UP                  Radiator antifreeze
                                Protective agent for      based on inhibited monoethylen glycol and organic formula,       Contractual Technical       proportion: 50% water and
                      CAR




                                radiators                 that passes CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications.          Reference N° F101.M01       50% PARAFLU UP
                                                          Qualification FIAT 9.55523
                                                          Additive for diesel fuels with protective action                 TUTELA DIESEL ART           To be mixed with diesel fuel
     TECHNICAL




                                Fuel additivel            for Diesel engines.                                              Contractual Technical       (25 cc per 10 litres)
                                                                                                                           Reference N°F601.L06
                                                          Mixture of alcohol, water and surfactants CUNA NC 956-II.        TUTELA PROFES-              To be used diluted or
                                Windscreen/ rear          Qualification FIAT 9.55522                                       SIONAL SC 35                undiluted in windscreen/
                                window washer fluid                                                                        Contractual Technical       rear window washer/
                                                                                                                           Reference N° F201.D02       wiper systems
               INDEX




                                (*) IMPORTANT Do not top up or mix with fluids having characteristics different from those specified.
                                When the vehicle is used under particularly harsh climate conditions, we recommend using a 60-40 mixture of PARAFLU UP and demineralised water.

            218
FUEL                                        ❒ extra-urban cycle: frequent accelerat-    IMPORTANT The type of route, traffic




                                                                                                                                       AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                        DASHBOARD
                                              ing in all gears, simulating extraurban   situations, weather conditions, driving
CONSUMPTION                                   use of the car: speed varies between 0    style, general conditions of the car, trim
                                              and 120 km/h;                             level/equipment/accessories, load, climate
The fuel consumption figures given in the                                               control system, roof rack, other situations
table below are determined on the basis     ❒ combined consumption: calculated          that affect air drag may lead to different
                                              weighing about 37% of urban cycle con-




                                                                                                                                       DEVICES
of the homologation tests set down by




                                                                                                                                       SAFETY
                                                                                        fuel consumption levels than those mea-
specific European Directives.                 sumption and about 63% of extraurban      sured.
                                              consumption.
The procedures below are followed for
measuring consumption:




                                                                                                                                       CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                                        OF THE CAR
❒ urban cycle: cold starting followed by
  driving that simulates urban use of the
  car;




                                                                                                                                       LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                                        MESSAGES
                                                                                                                                        WARNING
                                                                                                                                       EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                                         IN AN
                                                                                                                                       SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                         TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                       INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                                      219
                                Fuel consumption according to Directive 2004/3/EC (litres x 100 km)
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD

                                Versions                                   Urban                 Extra-urban   Combined
                                1.4                                          8.2                      5.1         6.3
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                1.4 T-JET                                    9.2                      5.2         6.7
                                1.3 Multijet                                 6.5                      4.0         4.9
   CORRECT USE




                                1.6 Multijet                                 6.4                      4.2         5.0
    OF THE CAR
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING

   EMERGENCY
     IN AN
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
     TECHNICAL        CAR
               INDEX




            220
CO2 EMISSIONS




                                                                                                                   AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                    DASHBOARD
The CO2 emission levels at the exhaust given in the following tables refer to combined consumption.


Versions                                                  CO2 emissions according to 2004/3/EC Directive (g/km)




                                                                                                                   DEVICES
                                                                                                                   SAFETY
1.4                                                                                         148
1.4 T-JET                                                                                   157




                                                                                                                   CORRECT USE
                                                                                                                    OF THE CAR
1.3 Multijet                                                                                129
1.6 Multijet                                                                                131




                                                                                                                   LIGHTS AND
                                                                                                                    MESSAGES
                                                                                                                    WARNING
                                                                                                                   EMERGENCY
                                                                                                                     IN AN
                                                                                                                   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                     TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                   INDEX              CAR
                                                                                                                  221
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD
                                                                                                                        INDEX
                                ABS system..........................................           92   Boot........................................................   86     – front ................................................     64
                                Accessories purchased                                                – extension ........................................          87     – puddle/door ..................................             74
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                 by the owner ....................................            100    – opening/closing the tailgate.........                       86     – rear .................................................     65
                                Additional heater .................................            56    – emergency opening.......................                    83    Central console oddment
                                Air bag                                                             Boot light...............................................      74     compartment .....................................             71
   CORRECT USE




                                 – front.................................................     115
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                    Brake assist ..........................................        92    Chassis (marking) ...............................             203
                                 – side ..................................................    118   Brakes                                                               Checking fluid .......................................        184
                                Air cleaner.............................................      190    – fluid level ........................................        188   Child lock ..............................................      83
                                Adjustable Air vents ...........................               50    – technical data ................................             207   Child restraint systems
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                Alarm......................................................    11   Bulb (replacement)                                                    – “Universal Isofix” .........................               114
                                Armrest .................................................      79    – general instructions .....................                  158    – Passenger’s seat compliance ......                         115
                                Ashtray...................................................     80    – types of bulbs ................................             158   Cigar lighter ..........................................       80
                                ASR system ...........................................         95
   EMERGENCY




                                                                                                                                                                         Clutch ...................................................    207
     IN AN




                                 – activation/deactivation .................                   95   Capacities ............................................ 106
                                At the filling station ............................           101                                                                        CO2 emissions......................................           221
                                                                                                    Car inactivity ....................................... 132
                                Automatic climate                                                   Car maintenance                                                      Code Card ...........................................           6
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                 control system ..................................            59     – periodical checks........................... 183                  Consumption
                      CAR




                                                                                                     – scheduled servicing ...................... 178                     – engine oil ........................................        186
                                Battery
                                                                                                     – service schedule ................... 179-181                       – fuel ...................................................   219
                                 – checking the charge .....................                  190
                                                                                                     – use of the car under                                              Controls ................................................      75
                                 – jump starting .................................            146
     TECHNICAL




                                 – recharging ......................................          185    heavy conditions................................ 183                Correct use of the car ......................                 127
                                 – replacing .........................................        191   Card box - CD box............................. 72                    Cruise Control.....................................            70
                                Bodywork                                                            Carrying children safely ..................... 109                   Courtesy lights .....................................          74
                                 – maintenance ..................................             196   Ceiling lights.......................................... 72           – bulb replacement ..........................                174
               INDEX




                                 – version codes ...............................              204    – boot light ....................................... 66              – control button ..............................               74
                                Bonnet ..................................................      88    – courtesy ......................................... 66             Current outlet......................................           73
            222
Dashboard ...........................................              EOBD system ...................................... 96             Handbrake .......................................... 125




                                                                                                                                                                                                          AND CONTROLS
                                                               5




                                                                                                                                                                                                           DASHBOARD
 – Left hand drive version ...............                     5   ESP system ............................................ 93        Hazard lights ........................................ 75
Dashboard and controls.....................                    4   External lights ...................................... 66         Head restraints
Dead lock device .................................            77                                                                      – front ................................................ 45
Digital display .......................................       18
                                                                   Fiat CODE system .............................                6




                                                                                                                                                                                                          DEVICES
                                                                                                                                                                                                          SAFETY
                                                                   Fix & Go automatic ............................             153    – rear................................................... 46
Dimensions ..........................................        213                                                                     Headlight washer
                                                                   Flashing the headlights .......................              66
Dipped beam headlights
                                                                   Fluid levels ............................................   184    – control ............................................ 61




                                                                                                                                                                                                          LIGHTS AND OF THE VEHICLE
 – control ............................................       66




                                                                                                                                                                                                           WARNING CORRECT USE
                                                                   Fluids and lubricants ...........................           217    – fluid level ........................................ 200
 – bulb replacement...........................               161
                                                                   Follow me home (device) .................                    67   Headlights.............................................. 91
Direction indicators
 – control ............................................       67   Front ceiling lights                                               – beam adjustment .......................... 89
 – front bulb replacement ...............                    161     – bulb replacement...........................             165    – headlight slant adjusting device . 89




                                                                                                                                                                                                           MESSAGES
 – rear bulb replacement .................                   162     – control ............................................     72   Heated rear window ..................... 52-57
 – side bulb replacement .................                   162   Front fog lights                                                  Heating and ventilation ...................... 49
Doors.....................................................    82     – bulb replacement ..........................             162
                                                                                                                                     Identification data




                                                                                                                                                                                                          EMERGENCY
                                                                     – control button ..............................            75                               ..............................   202




                                                                                                                                                                                                            IN AN
Electrical socket     ................................        73   Fuel                                                              Ignition device.......................................        13
Engine                                                               – consumption...................................          229   In an emergency ..................................           145
 – identification code ........................              202     – cut-off switch..................................         77   Instrument panel .................................            14




                                                                                                                                                                                                          SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                           VEHICLE
 – marking ...........................................       203     – level gauge.......................................       17   Instruments ..........................................        16
 – technical data ................................           205   Fuel cut-off switch ...............................          77   Interior fittings ....................................        78
Engine compartment                                                 Fuel filler cap .......................................     102   Interiors ................................................   198
 – washing ...........................................       197   Fuel level gauge ...................................         17




                                                                                                                                                                                                            TECHNICAL
                                                                                                                                     Isofix (child restraint system) ..........                   114
Engine coolant ......................................        187   Fuses (replacement) ...........................             168
Engine coolant temperature gauge ..                           17                                                                     Jack ........................................................ 148
Engine oil                                                         Gearbox                                                           Jacking the car ..................................... 175
 – consumption ..................................            186    – using manual gearbox .................. 126




                                                                                                                                                                                                          INDEX
 – level check.......................................        186   Glass holder - can holder................... 72                   Key with remote control ................                       8
 – specifications .................................          227   Glove box/oddment compartment.. 78                                Key without remote control ...........                         9
                                                                                                                                                                                                         223
                                Load limiters                                                        Pretensioners ......................................       106   Reconfigurable
   AND CONTROLS
    DASHBOARD                                           ...................................... 106
                                                                                                     Prolonged car inactivity......................             138    Multifunctional Display ...................                     32
                                Main beam headlights                                                 Protecting the environment .............                   102   Refuelling ...............................................      101
                                 – bulb replacement ..........................                161    Puddle lights..........................................     74   Rev. counter .........................................           16
                                 – control ............................................        66     – bulb replacement ..........................             174   Reversing light .....................................           162
   DEVICES
   SAFETY




                                 – flashing ............................................       66                                                                     Roof rack/ski rack ..............................                90
                                Manual climate control system ........                         53
                                                                                                     Radio transmitters and cellular                                  Rubber hoses .......................................            194
                                                                                                      telephones .........................................      100
   CORRECT USE




                                Multifunctional display ........................               23
    OF THE CAR




                                                                                                     Radionavigator presetting system ....                      104   Safety    ...................................................   103
                                Number plate light ............................               164    Rain sensor............................................     69   Seat adjustment ...................................              44
                                                                                                     Rear ceiling lights                                              Seat belts
                                Oddment compartments..................                         78     – bulb replacement...........................             165
LIGHTS AND
 MESSAGES
 WARNING




                                                                                                                                                                        – general instructions .....................                  107
                                                                                                      – control ............................................     72
                                Paint .....................................................   195                                                                       – load limiters ...................................           106
                                                                                                     Rear doors emergency
                                Parking ..................................................    125     lock device..........................................      79     – maintenance ..................................              109
                                                                                                                                                                        – using the seat belts........................                104
   EMERGENCY




                                Parking sensors ....................................           97    Rear fog lights
     IN AN




                                Performance ........................................          214     – bulb replacement ..........................             162   Seats
                                Plates                                                                – control button ..............................            75     – adjustment .....................................             44
                                  – bodywork paint                                                                                                                      – cleaning ...........................................        199
   SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE




                                                                                                     Rear window washer
                                                                                                                                                                        – tilting (rear seats) ..........................              87
                      CAR




                                  identification plate ...........................            203     – control ............................................     61
                                  – model plate ....................................          202     – fluid level ........................................    200   Side/taillights
                                Pollen filter ...........................................     190    Rear window wiper                                                  – control ............................................         57
     TECHNICAL




                                Power socket ......................................            73     – blades ..............................................   207     – front bulb replacement.................                     168
                                Power steering ....................................            96     – control ............................................     61     – rear bulb replacement ..................                    170
                                Power windows ..................................               79     – nozzles ............................................    208   Smart washing .....................................              60
                                Presetting for mounting the                                          Rearview mirrors                                                 Smoker’s kit .........................................           72
               INDEX




                                “Isofix Universal” child                                              – door mirrors .................................          47    Snow chains .........................................           131
                                  restraint system.................................           120     – driving mirror ................................         48    Sound system ......................................              99
            224
Spark plugs                                                         Towing trailers                                                    Windscreen/rear window




                                                                                                                                                                                                         AND CONTROLS
                                                                                                                                                                                                          DASHBOARD
 – type .................................................     205    – tow hook installation ...................             129        wiper blades ......................................       194
Speedometer .......................................            16   Transmission ........................................    207       Windscreen washer
Starting and driving ............................             121                                                                       – control ............................................     68
                                                                    Trip computer .....................................       42
                                                                                                                                        – fluid level ........................................    187




                                                                                                                                                                                                         DEVICES
Starting the engine




                                                                                                                                                                                                         SAFETY
                                                                    Tyres
                                                                                                                                       Windscreen wiper
 – bump starting ................................             147    – replacing a wheel ...........................         147
                                                                                                                                        – blades ..............................................   194
 – diesel engines ................................            123    – maintenance ..................................        193




                                                                                                                                                                                                         LIGHTS AND OF THE VEHICLE
                                                                                                                                        – control ............................................     68




                                                                                                                                                                                                          WARNING CORRECT USE
 – emergency start-up ......................                  146    – reading tyre markings ..................              209        – spray nozzles .................................         195
 – ignition switch ...............................             13    – standard tyres ................................       211
 – jump starting ..................................           146
                                                                     – cold tyre inflation pressure ........                 212
 – petrol engines ...............................             122




                                                                                                                                                                                                          MESSAGES
 – stopping the engine .......................                124   Using the manual gearbox                   .............. 126
 – warm up the engine after
 just started..........................................       124   Ventilation        .......................................... 49




                                                                                                                                                                                                         EMERGENCY
Steering ..................................................   208   Warning lights and messages .........




                                                                                                                                                                                                           IN AN
                                                                                                                               133
Steering column lock .........................                 13   Weights ................................................ 215
Steering wheel .....................................           47
                                                                    Wheel..................................................... 206




                                                                                                                                                                                                         SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
Sunroof ..................................................     74




                                                                                                                                                                                                                          VEHICLE
                                                                     – replacing a wheel .................. 147-155
Sun visors .............................................       81
                                                                     – spare wheel ................................... 211
Suspensions ..........................................        208
                                                                     – wheel geometry ............................ 209
Symbols .................................................       6




                                                                                                                                                                                                           TECHNICAL
                                                                    Wheel rims
Tailgate ................................................      86    – understanding rim marking ........ 210
Technical specifications .....................                201   Window washing ................................. 68
Third brake light .................................           164   Window winders ................................. 83




                                                                                                                                                                                                         INDEX
Top speeds ...........................................        214   Windscreen/rear window/
Towing the car ....................................           175    headlight washer fluid level ............ 200
                                                                                                                                                                                                        225
PROVISIONS FOR THE PROCESSING OF A VEHICLE
AT THE END OF ITS LIFE-CYCLE
For years now Fiat has been developing its global commitment towards the safeguarding and protection of the Environment through
the continuous improvement of its production processes and the making of increasingly more “eco friendly” products. With a view
to guaranteeing the best possible service to clients in full observance of environmental standards and in response to the obligations
imposed by European Directive 2000/53/EC on end-of-life vehicles, Fiat offers its clients the possibility to hand in their vehicle* at
the end of its life span without additional costs.
The European Directive, in fact, provides for the take-back of the vehicle without the last holder or owner of the same incurring
expenses due to the fact that the market value of the vehicle is zero or negative. In particular, in almost all of the countries of the
European Union, up until 1st January 2007, take-back of the vehicle free of charge only applies to vehicles registered from 1 July 2002
on, while, from 2007 on, take-back will be carried out free of charge, independently of the year of registration, provided that the
vehicle still contains all its essential component parts (especially engine and body) and is free from additional waste materials.
Our contracted network of authorised treatment facilities has been carefully selected in order to provide a quality service to our
customers by de-polluting and recycling “End of Life Vehicles” to approved environmental standards. To find out the location of your
nearest authorised treatment facility, offering free of charge take-back, simply contact one of our dealers or refer to the Fiat web
site or call the toll free number 00800 3428 0000.
* Passenger transportation vehicles to seat a max. of nine persons, having a total admissible weight of 3.5 t
NOTES
COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)

Tyre                                                                              Medium load                                                Full load
                                                                      Front                           Rear                        Front                        Rear

185/65 R15 84T                                                           2.3                           2.1                          2.3                         2.3

195/60 R15 88H                                                           2.3                           2.1                          2.3                         2.3

195/55 R16 87H                                                           2.3                           2.1                          2.4                         2.4

205/45 R17 88V                                                           2.4                           2.2                          2.5                         2.4

Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.
With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.



ENGINE OIL CHANGE
                                              1.4                                 1.4 T-JET                            1.3 Multijet                   1.6 Multijet
                                   litres               kg               litres               kg                  litres            kg           litres            kg
Engine sump and filter              2,6                  –                 2,4                2,6                  3,2              –              4,6                    –




FUEL CAPACITIES (litres)
                                                                               1.4 - 1.4 T-JET - 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet
Tank capacity                                                                                                45
Reserve                                                                                                   5÷7

Refuel petrol engines with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) no lower than 95 only (EN 228 Specifications)
Refuel diesel engines with diesel fuel for motor vehicles only (EN 590 Specifications)




          Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. - Customer Services - Technical Services - Service Engineering - Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 5 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia)
                                                               Print N. 603.81.411 - 09/2008 - 2nd Edition

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Stats:
views:484
posted:5/2/2012
language:English
pages:234